i 


it»..««wm««ttN4***T*ttT: 


DRAKE 
THE  SEA  KING 


'?^^ 


I 


y^ 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  witin  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.arcliive.org/details/drakeseakingofdeOOtowlrich 


Young  Folks'  Heroes  of  History 


DRAKE 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON 


BY 


GEORGE    M?  tOWLE 

L  OF  "VASCO  DA  GAMA 
"MARCO  POLO' 


AUnrOR  OF  •'  VASCO  DA  GAMA  "  "  MAGELLAN  '*  «*  PIZARKO** 
"MARCO  POLO"  "RALIGH" 


BOSTON : 
LOTHROP,    LEE   &   SHEPARD   CO. 


Copyright,  13582, 
By  lee  and  SHEPARD. 


All  Rights  Reserved, 


Bancroit  Ubraxy 


PREFACE. 


i 


5 


IR  FRANCIS  DRAKE,  called  in  his  own 

time  the  "  Sea- King  of  Devon,"  was  one 

of  the  chief  figures  in  that  brilliant  group 

of  genius  and  valor  which  surrounded  the  throne 

of  the  Maiden  Queen  Elizabeth.     He  was  the  fore- 

..^   most  of  the  sea-conquerors  of  his  age.     Amid  a 

-    throng  of  English  captains  skilled  in  every  mari- 

*   time  art,  fearless  in  encounter,  dauntless  in  attack 

and  spirited  in  adventure,  Drake  rose  to  undisputed 

V  pre-eminence.      As  a  buccaneer,   ploughing    the 

^  oceans  in  search  of  captures  and  plunder,  preying 

upon  the  commerce  of  the  hated  Spaniards,  pil- 

''^^  feiging  colonies  and  filling  the  holds  of  his  ships 

,,^  y/ith  the  gold  and  gems  taken  from  the  enemy, 

'  he  was  more  vigorous,  successful  and  ruthless  than 

^^  any  corsair  of  that  day.     He  was  the  first  English 

admiral  to  sail  a  ship  completely  around  the  globe ; 

and  a  remote  result  of  his  famous  and  romantic 


iv  PREFACE. 

voyage  was  the  establishment  of  an  English  Em- 
pire in  the  Orient.  He  was  the  hero  of  the 
magnificent  victory  which  the  English  won  over 
the  Invincible  Armada  in  the  Channel;  and  his 
bravery,  which  drove  the  Armada,  burning,  scat- 
tered, and  wrecked,  from  English  waters,  may  be 
said  to  have  determined  the  course  which  the 
civilization  of  the  world  —  especially  of  the  New 
World  —  would  thenceforth  pursue. 

Drake  was  one  of  those  rough,  blunt,  sturdy,  fear- 
less men  who  seem  peculiarly  formed  to  do  deeds 
of  heroism,  to  appear  most  nobly  in  scenes  of  danger, 
and  to  achieve  the  most  difficult  feats  of  daring 
and  action,  whether  in  warlike  contention  or  in 
conflict  with  formidable  elements  of  nature ;  and 
his  career,  stirring  and  adventurous,  bold  and  un- 
resting from  early  youth  to  age,  in  spite  of  the  pira- 
cies which  were  excused  by  his  own  time,  though 
they  seem  wicked  in  ours,  is  full  of  lessons  of  manly 
qualities,  and  of  great  and  often  admirable  deeds. 


CONTENTS, 


CHAPTER  L 
Youthful  Days i 

CHAPTER  II. 
Drakb  crosses  the  Atlantic i6 

CHAPTER  III. 
A  Desperate  Sea-Fight       ......      33 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Drake  in  Mexico 49 

CHAPTER  V. 
Drake  beholds  the  Pacific       .        »        .        .        .      65 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Drake  in  Ireland 81 

CHAPTER  Vll. 
Bound  for  the  Pacific 96 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Doughty*s  Treason  and  Execution  .        •        •       .113 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Drake  at  Cape  Horn •       •    130 

CHAPTER  X. 
Adventures  with  the  Indians 149 


VI  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  XL  rAox. 

Drake  crosses  the  Pacific 164 

CHAPTER  XII. 
Drake  in  the  Asiatic  Seas         .        .       •        •        •    181 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
Around  the  Globe 200 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Sea-Battles  in  the  West  Indies       .        •        •        •    215 

CHAPTER  XV. 
The  Spanish  Armada 331 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Drake's  Last  Voyage  .        .        .        .        .        •        •    245 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
Death  of  Drake 260 


DRAKE: 

THE   SEA-KING    OF   DEVON, 


CHAPTER    I. 

YOUTHFUL   DAYS. 


HE  picturesque  and  historical  English 
county  of  Devon  was  not  only  the  birth- 
place of  Sir  Walter  Ralegh,  whose  career 
was  described  in  our  last  volume,  but  was  also  the 
birthplace  of  his  great  predecessor  in  naval  war- 
fare, who  forms  the  subject  of  these  pages. 

While  Ralegh's  boyhood,  however,  was  spent 
in  the  eastern  part  of  the  county,  that  of  Drake 
was  passed  some  miles  westward,  where  Devon 
borders  on  Cornwall. 

In  this  western  part,  the  pastoral  beauties  of  the 
county,  its  dipping  vales  and  verdant  hills,  its 
noisy  streams  and  ancient  manors,  rival  the  scenes 
of  Ralegh's  early  days. 


2  DRAKE : 

There  still  clusters  on  the  banks  of  the  river 
Tavy  the  old  market  town  of  Tavistock,  in  the 
midst  of  a  fertile  valley,  and  at  the  central  point 
of  a  smiling  landscape.  The  town  is  as  busy  and 
bright  as  it  was  three  centuries  ago.  The  sur- 
rounding farmers  still  flock  into  its  zigzag  streets 
on  market  days,  display  the  fruits  of  their  toil, 
and  bargain,  haggle,  and  gossip,  just  as  their 
sturdy  ancestors  were  wont  to  do  in  the  remote 
days  of  the  good  Queen  Bess.  The  two  strong 
bridges  which  even  so  long  ago  spanned  the  Tavy 
in  the  midst  of  the  little  town,  still  serve  to  bear 
the  heavy  wagons  as  they  creep  along  to  the  scene 
of  bucolic  trade. 

Indeed,  Tavistock,  with  its  straggling  thorough- 
fares by  the  river  side,  its  quaint  old  rows  of 
houses,  its  homely  and  cozy  hostelries,  has  changed 
its  aspect  but  very  little  since  the  troublous  times  of 
the  Tudors.  A  few  small  manufactories  have  been 
added  to  its  farming  industry ;  and  these  serve  to 
sustain  its  ancient  importance  in  the  county. 

Just  aside  from  the  Tavy,  you  may  espy  the  ven- 
erable abbey,  the  largest  and  most  imposing  in 
Devonshire ;  where  the  good  people  of  Tavistock 
have  worshipped,  wedded,  and  been  buried  these 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  3 

nine  hundred  years  or  more.  It  is  said  that  the 
second  printing  press  ever  set  up  in  England  was 
put  in  motion  in  Tavistock  abbey. 

When  this  ancient  edifice  was  taken  away  from 
its  original  proprietors,  the  Benedictine  monks,  it 
was  conferred  on  Lord  Russell,  the  ancestor  of  the 
famous  family  of  that  name,  which  has  taken  so 
notable  a  part  in  English  history ;  and  the  abbey 
is  still  the  property  of  the  Duke  of  Bedford,  the 
head  of  the  Russell  family. 

At  a  place  named  Crowndale,  about  a  mile  from 
the  town,  there  used  to  stand,  as  recently  as  the  lat- 
ter part  of  the  last  century,  a  low,  wide-roofed  cot- 
tage, almost  hid  from  view  by  dense  ivies  and  other 
clinging  vines,  and  almost  buried  amid  copses  of 
venerable  trees.  It  was  a  queer  old  place,  with 
its  gables,  its  small-paned  windows,  and  its  air  of 
drowsy  age.  Those  who  came,  ever  and  anon,  to 
visit  it,  did  not  fail  to  observe  how  it  lay  in  the 
midst  of  a  lovely  picture  of  pastoral  scenery.  On 
one  side  rose  the  rough,  imposing  Morwell  Rocks ; 
from  its  windows  you  had  charming  glimpses  of 
the  sloping  and  winding  vales  of  the  Walcombe 
and  the  Lyd  ;  not  far  off  you  might  examine  the 
Dewer  Stone,  and  crouch  in  the  "  Cave   of  the 


4  DRAKE : 

Virtuous  Lady/'  listening  to  the  legend  which 
suggests  its  name,  as  told  by  some  loquacious 
rustic. 

It  was  in  this  cottage,  and  amid  these  sweet 
and  sunny  scenes,  that  there  lived,  in  the  time  or 
bluff  Henry  the  Eighth,  a  modest,  retiring,  and 
somewhat  poverty-stricken  gentleman,  by  the  name 
of  Drake.  What  had  been  the  avocation  of  hi^: 
early  days,  or  how  he  came  to  settle  down  in  this 
quaint  Devon  cottage,  we  do  not  know.  But  in 
the  middle  of  the  sixteenth  century  he  was  serving 
as  a  chaplain  in  the  royal  navy ;  while  he  eked  out 
a  straitened  existence  by  the  cultivation  of  his 
little  farm.  Mr.  Drake  no  doubt  found  it  a  far 
from  easy  task  to  satisfy  the  appetites  of  his 
healthy  and  fast  growing  boys  ;  but  he  kept  work- 
ing away,  and  besides  feeding  them,  imparted  to 
them  such  an  education  as  his  knowledge  of  men 
and  books  could  supply.  But  Mr.  Drake  had  a 
trait  which  got  him  into  trouble.  He  was  a 
firm  and  sturdy  Protestant,  and  made  no  secret 
of  his  conversion  to  and  zeal  in  the  new  faith. 
Those  were  stormy  and  uncertain  days  for  Prot- 
estants in  England ;  for  Henry  the  Eighth,  though 
he  had  introduced  the  Reformation  into  England, 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  § 

was  capricious  in  his  theological  course,  and  some- 
times oppressed  the  Protestants  as  bitterly  as  he 
had  done  the  Catholics. 

Under  one  of  the  royal  edicts,  the  poor  navy- 
chaplain  of  Tavistock  became  liable  to  punishment 
for  the  boldness  and  openness  of  his  religious 
views ;  to  escape  which,  he  one  night  suddenly 
broke  up  his  household  at  Crowndale,  and  hastened 
with  his  family  to  an  obscure  retreat  in  Kent,  at 
the  other  end  of  England.  How  long  he  staid 
in  Kent,  or  what  he  did  to  gain  a  living  during 
his  sojourn  there,  history  does  not  tell  us ;  but 
there  is  reason  to  believe  that  after  bluff  King 
Hal  had  been  succeeded  on  the  throne  by  the  boy 
king,  Edward  the  Sixth,  Mr.  Drake  returned  to 
his  former  home  in  Devonshire. 

The  eldest  of  his  family  of  twelve  hearty  boys  was 
named  Francis^  after  his  father.  Francis  was  born, 
undoubtedly,  before  his  father  hurried  away  so 
abruptly  into  Kent.  The  date  of  his  birth  was 
probably  1539  ;  though,  so  obscure  are  the  records 
of  his  early  life,  that  some  historians  are  disposed 
to  believe  that  he  came  into  the  world  at  a  later 
period.  At  all  events,  Francis  Drake  spent  the 
days  of  his  early  childhood  amid  the  lovely  sur* 


O  DRAKE : 

roundings  of  Tavistock.  He  was  from  the  first 
noted  for  his  active  and  restless  temperament,  his 
hardy  frame  and  powers  of  endurance,  his  fond- 
ness for  daring  adventure  and  athletic  sports.  He 
fished  in  the  pretty,  winding  Tavy  ;  he  climbed  the 
Dartmoor  hills,  and  perhaps  hunted  among  their 
dells  for  small  game ;  he  studied  somewhat,  though 
his  opportunities  for  education  were  for  the  most 
part  confined  to  the  instruction  his  father,  in  mo- 
ments snatched  from  absorbing  toils,  was  able  to 
give  him ;  and,  in  the  midst  of  his  pursuits  and 
recreations,  he  began  very  early  in  life  to  dream 
glowing  dreams  of  a  career  at  sea. 

In  pursuance  of  his  duties  as  navy-chaplain,  the 
elder  Drake  often  repaired  to  the  busy  Devon  port 
of  Plymouth ;  and  was  in  the  habit  of  sometimes 
taking  his  eldest  son  with  him.  Indeed  it  is  said 
that  for  a  while  the  family  resided  in  that  town. 
Here  Francis  was  brought  in  contact  with  many 
a  talkative  "  old  salt,"  who  told  him  tales  of  the 
sea  which  made  him  impatient  to  grow  big  enough 
to  follow  the  adventures  of  the  perilous  main  him- 
self. While  his  good  father  was  busy  with  his 
pious  services,  the  boy  wandered  delightedly 
about  the  wharves  and  ships,  or  strolled  among 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  f 

the  rocks  and  cliffs  which  overlook  the  English 
Channel. 

Among  the  many  hardy  navigators  whom  young 
Drake  met  at  Plymouth,  was  the  famous  Captain, 
afterwards  Sir  John  Hawkins.  This  brave  man 
was  a  cousin  of  Drake's,  and  had  long  been  en- 
gaged in  the  trade  which  existed  between  England 
and  the  Canary  Islands.  Hawkins  took  a  great 
fancy  to  his  young  cousin,  and  liked  to  sit  and 
tell  him  long  and  thrilling  yarns  about  his  adven- 
tures at  sea.  He  encouraged  the  lad's  desire  to 
himself  follow  the  sea  as  a  profession ;  and  soon 
perceived  that  he  was  the  sort  of  stuff  to  carve 
out  a  brilliant  career  for  himself. 

In  after  years,  Hawkins  was  destined  to  perform 
many  feats  of  naval  warfare  and  peril ;  and  the 
fate  of  young  Drake  became,  for  a  time,  closely 
connected  with  that  of  his  doughty  kinsman. 

One  day,  as  young  Drake  was  idling  among  the 
ships,  he  was  accosted  by  a  brawny  seaman,  whom 
he  had  often  seen  and  talked  with  at  his  father's 
house.  This  seaman,  being  a  bachelor,  had  often 
sojourned  for  a  week  or  two  with  the  Drakes ;  and 
had  received  many  kindnesses  from  the  navy- 
chaplain.      He  owned,  it  seemed,  a  sturdy  little 


8  DRAKE : 

vessel,  which  he  was  in  the  habit  of  sailing  be* 
tween  Plymouth  and  the  French  coast,  carrying 
backward  and  forward  such  modest  cargoes  as  he 
could  pick  up. 

He  was  not  long  in  perceiving  Francis's  bent, 
and  his  big  heart  warmed  to  the  boy  who,  thus 
early,  evinced  a  passion  for  all  that  pertained  to  the 
sea.  So,  on  this  day,  taking  him  on  board  his 
vessel,  and  bidding  him  sit  down  on  the  ropes,  he 
said  to  him,  — 

"  Don't  you  think  I've  a  tight  little  craft  here, 
my  lad.?" 

"You  have,  indeed,"  replied  Drake,  looking 
around.  "There's  none  stancher  in  Plymouth 
harbor." 

"  So  you  like  her,  do  you  ?  And  how  would  you 
like  to  sail  in  her  back  and  forth .? " 

Young  Drake  stared  at  the  seaman  with  a  look 
of  surprise ;  and  his  face  lit  up  with  an  eager  ex- 
pression. He  had  never  been  really  out  to  sea; 
and  his  dream  by  day  and  night  had  long  been  to 
find  himself  on  the  broad  deep,  and  out  of  sight 
of  land. 

"  Oh,  I  should  like  it,"  replied  he,  "  more  than 
anything." 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  9 

"Well,"  said  the  master  of  the  vessel,  "I'll  tell 
you  what  I've  been  thinking.  I've  followed  the  sea 
now  this  many  a  year ;  and  though  I'm  tough  still, 
I  feel  myself  getting  old.  My  arms  and  legs  don't 
stand  me  in  as  good  stead  as  they  used  to  do,  and 
I  find  it  harder,  in  an  ugly  squall,  to  manage  my 
boat  than  I  did  a  year  or  two  ago.  Now,  I  want  a 
good,  sturdy  young  fellow  to  help  me  run  her 
back  and  forth  ;  and  I  rather  think  you're  just  the 
boy  for  me.    Would  you  like  to  be  my  apprentice  ? " 

"I'd  like  nothing  better  in  all  the  world,"  re- 
sponded Francis,  with  beaming  eyes. 

"  But  how  would  your  father  like  it  ?  Do  you 
think  he  would  consent  ?  " 

"  Oh,  I  hope  so.  If  you  will  only  ask  him,  sir,  I 
think  he  will." 

"  Well,  I  will  lose  no  time  in  doing  so,"  was  the 
hearty  reply  of  the  old  mariner. 

He  was  as  good  as  his  word.  He  sought  an 
early  occasion  to  talk  with  Mr.  Drake,  who  was  at 
first  very  unwilling  to  give  his  consent  to  the 
proposal.  The  boy,  he  said,  was  too  young,  and 
had  not  yet  received  his  education.  But  when  he 
found  that  not  only  the  master  of  the  vessel,  but 
Francis  himself  was  set  upon  the  plan,  he  yielded. 


lO  DRAKE : 

It  did  not  take  Francis  long  to  prepare  for  the 
momentous  change  in  his  boyish  life.  With  eager 
zeal  he  devoted  himself  to  learning  the  various 
terms  for  the  rigging  and  other  parts  of  the  vessel ; 
how  to  manage  the  sails,  how  to  steer,  and  how  to 
ascertain  the  position  of  the  ship.  He  watched, 
more  narrowly  than  ever  before,  the  manoeu- 
vres of  the  sailors  on  board  the  various  vessels  in 
the  harbor ;  and  received  with  more  than  willing 
ear  the  careful  advice  and  instructions  of  his 
father. 

A  snug  little  berth  was  fitted  up  for  him  on  board 
the  vessel  which  was,  for  a  while  at  least,  to  be- 
come his  rude  and  tempest-tossed  home ;  and  a 
suit  of  rough  sailor's  clothes  was  soon  completed 
for  him  by  the  busy  hands  of  his  mother. 

It  was  with  much  emotion  that,  on  the  eve  of 
his  first  voyage,  he  embraced  and  bade  adieu  to 
father  and  mother,  and  the  noisy  troop  of  his  many 
little  brothers ;  and  that,  at  last,  he  found  himself 
on  the  deck  of  the  vessel,  one  afternoon,  gliding 
under  a  brisk  breeze  out  of  Plymouth  harbor. 

We  may  well  imagine  that  the  first  few  hours 
were  not  very  comfortable  ones  to  our  verdant 
young  sailor ;  but  we  may  be  sure  that,  through 


THE   SEA-KING    OF   DEVON.  II 

all  the  discomfort  and  danger,  he  kept  up  a  stout, 
manly  heart.  He  soon  became  used  to  the  slough- 
ing and  pitching  of  the  ship ;  and  before  his  first 
voyage  was  over,  knew  as  well  how  to  hoist,  trim, 
and  take  in  sail  as  his  master.  The  latter  was  sur- 
prised at  the  quickness  with  which  his  apprentice 
learned  to  perform  every  task  on  board ;  and  exult- 
ingly  declared  to  him  that  he  "  was  born  to  be  a 
great  sailor." 

It  was  not  many  months  before  the  worthy 
skipper  found  himself  able  to  leave  the  entire 
charge  of  his  vessel  to  Drake's  management ;  and 
being  now  old  and  infirm,  he  often  remained 
ashore,  and  allowed  the  young  tar  to  run  along  the 
coast,  and  to  and  fro  on  the  Channel  by  himself. 

The  more  Drake  saw  of  the  rough  life  of  the 
sea,  the  fonder  he  became  of  it,  and  the  more  ar- 
dent grew  his  ambition  to  pursue  it  in  a  wider 
sphere.  Month  by  month  he  added  to  his  ex- 
perience, and  managed  to  lay  up  a  little  of  the 
small  wages  he  received.  By  and  by  his  master 
admitted  him  into  partnership,  so  that  he  shared 
the  modest  profits  acquired  by  the  excursions  of 
the  little  craft. 

Drake's   courage  and  quickness  to  learn,  his 


12  DRAKE : 

manly  and  active  temperament,  and  his  love  for 
the  sea,  completely  won  the  affection  of  his  master, 
who  ended  by  adopting  him  as  his  heir. 

One  day  the  old  skipper  was  taken  ill  in  his 
cottage ;  and  it  soon  became  clear  that  he  would 
never  rise  from  his  bed  again.  When  Drake  re- 
turned from  the  short  voyage  he  had  been  making 
to  a  neighboring  port,  he  found  the  good  man 
dying.  He  was  overwhelmed  with  grief,  for  his 
master  had  been  all  that  was  kind  and  generous 
to  him.  The  young  sailor  devoted  his  care  and 
time  to  his  departing  friend ;  tended  at  his  bed- 
side, and  did  what  he  could  to  comfort  his  last 
hours. 

When  at  last  the  skipper  breathed  his  last,  and 
was  buried,  Drake  found  that  he  had  bequeathed 
all  his  earthly  possessions  to  him.  These  posses- 
sions were,  indeed,  trifling ;  but  in  them  was  in- 
cluded the  stout  little  craft  in  which  Drake  had 
sailed  so  long,  and  to  which  he  was  so  strongly 
attached. 

He  now  found  himself  her  sole  owner ;  and  with 
her,  the  master  of  a  thriving  coastwise  trade. 
Several  of  his  younger  brothers,  —  he  had  eleven 
brothers  in  all, — had  now  reached  an  age  when 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.     '  1 3 

they,  too,  could  go  to  sea.  They  shared  their 
eldest  brother's  love  of  a  seafaring  life ;  and  he 
initiated  the  two  next  younger  than  himself  in 
the  mysteries  of  managing  a  vessel. 

He  pursued  his  trade  with  all  the  strength, 
ardor,  and  ambition  of  his  hardy  nature.  He  braved 
the  fiercest  storms  with  a  cool  intrepidity  which 
won  him  praise  on  every  hand.  No  tempest,  how- 
ever furious,  could  keep  him  in  port  when  he  had 
a  voyage  in  view.  Many  times  he  was  in  great 
peril  of  his  life,  and  once  or  twice  he  was  driven 
by  the  heavy  seas  of  the  Channel  upon  the  islands. 

As,  month  by  month,  and  year  by  year,  he 
steadily  stuck  to  his  business,  he  gradually  saved 
a  goodly  sum ;  and  with  it  he  aided  his  father  and 
mother,  who  were  now  old  and  poor,  and  gave, 
now  and  then,  a  lift  to  his  little  brothers. 

But  after  a  while,  he  began  to  long  to  take  part 
in  larger  undertakings  than  those  of  the  Channel 
trade.  At  the  age  of  eighteen,  he  was  a  man  in 
height  and  strength,  and  in  the  fullness  of  his 
experience.  He  thought  himself  capable  of  greater 
things  than  the  humble  calling  which  he  had  thus 
far  followed ;  and  he  made  up  his  mind  that,  at 
the  first  opportunity,  he  would  transfer  his  faithful 


14  DRAKE : 

little  craft  to  one  of  his  brothers,  and  embark  on 
more  ambitious  enterprises. 

At  that  period  of  the  world's  history,  no  one 
seemed  to  regard  the  slave  trade  as  barbarous  or 
cruel.  It  was  considered  a  proper  and  lawful  ob- 
ject of  commerce  to  seize  the  savage  Africans  on 
their  coast,  to  stow  them  away  in  the  holds  of 
vessels,  and  to  carry  and  sell  them  where  their 
labor  was  needed.  The  traffic  in  slaves  was 
indulged  in  without  hindrance  by  the  most  civil- 
ized nations.  The  slave  merchant  grew  rich,  and 
was  respected  in  the  community  where  he  lived. 
The  moral  sense  even  of  the  most  enlightened  men 
had  not  been  aroused  to  regard  this  trade  as  an 
enormity  and  a  crime. 

The  slave  trade  was  indeed,  in  Drake's  time, 
the  most  profitable  of  all  the  branches  of  English 
commerce.  All  who  entered  it  made  fortunes. 
Besides,  there  was  just  enough  danger  in  it  to 
stimulate  the  love  of  adventure  and  incident  which 
found  a  place  in  the  hearts  of  the  tough  English 
sailors. 

Drake,  never  once  taking  it  into  his  head  that 
it  was  wrong  to  kidnap  and  sell  the  poor  blacks 
of  Africa,  began  to  be  anxious  to   share  in  the 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  1 5 

perils  and  profits  of  this  traffic.  He  saw  in  it  a 
chance  to  get  rich,  to  give  ease  to  the  declining 
years  of  his  parents,  and  at  the  same  time  to  in- 
dulge in  the  stirring  life  for  which  his  bold  and 
uneasy  spirit  yearned. 

Ere  long  an  opportunity  presented  itself ;  and 
Drake  found  hirriself  launched  upon  a  far  more 
exciting  sphere  of  action  than  that  in  which  he 
had  hitherto  labored. 


l6  DRAKE : 

CHAPTER  11. 

DRAKE   CROSSES   THE   ATLANTIC- 


RAKE'S  kinsman,  stout  John  Hawkins,  had 
been  for  some  years  actively  engaged  in  the 
slave  trade.  He  would  sail  his  ship  to  the 
coast  of  Guinea,  and  there,  by  force  or  stratagem, 
would  procure  his  cargo  of  dusky  savages,  and 
carry  them  away  to  the  Spanish  islands.  There 
he  would  barter  them  for  gold ;  and  returning  to 
Plymouth,  would  relate  with  rough  glee  the  ad- 
ventures and  profits  of  his  expedition. 

Of  course,  there  were  now  and  then  times  when 
Drake  found  himself  in  Plymouth  when  Hawkins 
was  there.  He  heard  the  captain's  glowing  stories 
of  gain,  and  became  fired  with  the  ambition  to 
follow  his  example.  It  never  entered  his  mind 
that  the  trade  in  slaves  was  cruel  and  infamous ; 
it  was  the  custom  of  the  age,  and  was  encouraged 
by  the  sovereign  herself.  Why  should  he  not  en- 
rich himself  in  this  way,  as  others  had  done  and 
were  doing  ? 

Finally,  Hawkins  agreed  to  take  his  brave  and 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  tf 

sturdy  young  kinsman  into  his  service.  He  gave 
him  the  place  of  mate  in  his  own  ship ;  and  after  a 
while,  Drake  was  admitted  to  a  share  in  the  large 
profits  of  the  voyages. 

Drake  soon  found  himself  quite  at  home  in  his 
wider  sphere  of  action.  Familiar  now  with  all  the 
arts  of  practical  navigation,  and  fearless  amid  the 
most  formidable  perils,  he  won  the  complete  admi- 
ration and  confidence  of  Hawkins.  He  bore  a 
stout  and  blithe  heart  amid  the  tempests,  and  in 
dealing  with  the  sailors  showed  that  he  possessed 
the  genius  of  command.  When,  on  his  first 
voyage,  the  ship  anchored  off  the  Guinea  coast, 
Drake  was  one  of  the  foremost  of  those  who  went 
ashore,  and  invaded  the  rude  villages  of  the  ill- 
fated  natives.  In  the  unequal  contests  between 
the  invaders  and  their  victims,  he  always  took  a 
vigorous  part ;  and  soon  proved  himself  as  dauntless 
in  this  savage  warfare  as  he  was  when  ploughing 
the  mighty  deep. 

Ere  very  long,  Drake  found  himself  in  posses- 
sion of  a  goodly  competence,  which  he  freely  lav- 
ished upon  his  parents  and  brothers.  Visions  of 
a  yet  wider  career  began  to  occupy  and  stir  his 
mind ;   and  when,  one  day,  Hawkins  announced 


1 8  DRAKE  : 

to  him  that  he  was  about  to  proceed  with  a  squad- 
ron across  the  Atlantic,  and  offered  him  the  com- 
mand of  one  of  the  vessels,  Drake  seized  the 
chance  with  joyful  promptness. 

Drake  was  now  a  muscular  man  of  twenty-eight. 
His  features  had  become  bronzed  and  weather- 
beaten  ;  his  frame,  of  medium  height,  was  strongly 
knit  by  the  exposure  and  hardships  which  he  had 
been  continually  undergoing  from  early  boyhood  ; 
his  countenance  was  bold,  fearless,  and  somewhat 
stem ;  his  bearing  betokened  a  man  used  to  com- 
mand. His  large  blue  eyes  were  bright  and  pierc- 
ing ;  a  flowing  moustache  and  a  pointed  beard  on 
his  chin  followed  the  fashion  of  Queen  Elizabeth's 
time.  Drake  made  himself  respected  and  feared 
by  the  sailors  over  whom  he  was  placed.  He  had 
but  little  education,  and  was  rough  and  sailor-like 
in  his  ways.  His  was  a  soul  of  iron ;  he  was  full 
of  courage,  of  determination,  and  had  great  men- 
tal and  physical  vigor. 

The  expedition  to  the  islands  of  the  Spanish 
Main  was  to  sail  from  the  familiar  Plymouth  har- 
bor. It  was  not  Hawkins's  first  voyage  across  the 
Atlantic.  Twice  before,  he  had  followed  the  track 
of  Columbus  toward  the  setting   sun.      English 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  IQ 

navigators  and  buccaneers,  who  had  long  ceased 
to  find  a  profit  on  the  American  coast,  had  once 
more  turned  their  eyes  in  that  direction ;  and 
their  ambition  had  been  aroused  anew  by  the 
rivalry  which  had  arisen  between  England  and 
Spain.  Spain  had  become  England's  bitterest 
foe ;  and  England  had  resolved,  in  retaliation,  to 
become  Spain's  rival  on  the  high  seas,  and  in  the 
conquest  and  colonization  of  distant  lands.  But 
previous  to  this  quarrel,  Hawkins  had  made  two 
voyages  to  the  American  islands ;  and  had  suc- 
ceeded in  making  them  exceedingly  profitable  by 
the  sale  of  his  slaves.  The  last  of  these  voyages 
had  taken  place  two  years  before  the  expedition 
was  planned,  in  whose  adventures  Drake  was  des- 
tined to  take  part. 

Now,  the  prospect  of  capturing  rich  Spanish 
galleons,  laden  with  cargoes  of  precious  metals 
and  the  valuable  products  of  remote  climes,  was 
added  to  the  almost  certain  profits  to  be  gained 
from  the  sale  of  slaves  ;  and  both  Hawkins  and 
Drake  looked  forward  with  high  hope  to  the 
results  of  their  venture. 

It  was  in  the  early  autumn  of  1567  that  the  six 
goodly    ships,   which  were    to    form    Hawkins's 


20  DRAKE : 

squadron,  rode  at  anchor  in  the  pretty  harbor  of 
Plymouth.  One  of  the  smallest,  but  stoutest  and 
most  seaworthy,  of  the  ships,  was  the  "Judith," 
of  the  burden  of  only  fifty  tons.  It  was  the 
"Judith"  which  was  assigned  to  Drake's  com- 
mand. In  the  last  days  preceding  the  setting 
forth  of  the  expedition,  Drake  busied  himself  in 
making  ample  preparations  for  the  long  and  peril- 
ous voyage. 

With  what  pride  did  he  watch  the  movements 
of  the  trim  little  ship,  as  she  rocked  gently  on  the 
waves  of  the  harbor!  With  what  paternal  fond- 
ness did  he  examine  her  rigging,  her  sides,  her 
masts,  and  her  cabin  !  He  stocked  his  own  cabin 
with  such  nautical  instruments  as  were  then  known 
to  mariners,  and  with  a  few  books  on  the  art  of  navi- 
gation ;  he  took  great  care  in  selecting  his  crew, 
choosing  them,  as  far  as  he  could,  from  among  the 
sturdy  companions  of  his  former  voyages  ;  and  he 
made  provision  for  the  comfort  of  his  parents  dur- 
ing his  long  stay  on  distant  waters. 

At  last,  on  the  second  of  October,  all  was  ready, 
and  the  little  squadron  set  sail,  with  colors  flying 
and  amid  a  chorus  of  farewells  from  the  quays, 
just  as  the  sun  was  rising  to  its  zenith.     Hawkins 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  2 1 

himself  commanded  the  "Jesus,"  the  flag-ship, 
which  led  the  rest  out  into  the  Channel.  Then 
came  the  "Judith,"  upon  whose  deck  stood  the 
bronzed  and  stalwart  Drake,  with  plumed  hat  and 
flowing  cloak. 

For  a  week  the  squadron  proceeded  on  its  way, 
the  six  ships  keeping  close  together,  under  sunny 
skies  and  wafted  by  gentle  breezes.  But  on  the 
eighth  day  out  a  tremendous  storm  scattered  them 
over  the  angry  waves,  and  the  coolness  and  skill 
of  Drake  were  sorely  tried.  So  violent  were  the 
winds  that  even  the  hardy  Hawkins  deemed  it 
wise  to  turn  his  prows  homeward ;  and  gave  the 
order  to  such  ships  as  he  could  hail,  to  return 
towards  England.  Scarcely  had  the  ships  headed 
in  a  northerly  direction,  however,  than  the  wind 
suddenly  changed  again,  and  fell  to  a  light  breeze  ; 
whereupon  Hawkins  once  more  gave  the  order 
to  proceed  toward  the  African  coast. 

The  ships,  scattered  over  the  great  deep  by  the 
storm,  found  a  rendezvous  at  the  Canary  Islands, 
where  they  took  in  water.  In  just  six  weeks 
after  setting  out  from  Plymouth,  Drake  espied, 
from  the  deck  of  the  "Judith,"  the  familiar  coast 
of  Guinea ;  and  the  squadron  was  soon  after  safely 
anchored  off  Cape  Verde. 


22  DRAKE  : 

The  first  thing  to  do  was  to  seize  as  many 
negroes  as  possible,  and  to  stow  them  away  in  the 
ships.  Landing  with  one  hundred  and  fifty  picked 
men,  Hawkins  and  Drake  scoured  the  country  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  coast.  But  their  success  was 
not  equal  to  their  hopes,  for  they  were  able  to 
capture  but  few  blacks  ;  and  even  these  were  not 
secured  until  they  had  killed  a  number  of  the 
English  with  their  poisoned  arrows  and  javelins. 
"  Although  in  the  beginning,"  wrote  Hawkins  in 
narrating  the  expedition,  "these  seemed  to  be 
but  small  hurts,  yet  there  escaped  hardly  any  men 
who  had  blood  drawn  of  them  ;  but  they  died  in  a 
strange  manner,  after  their  wounds  seemed  healed. 
I  myself  had  one  of  the  most  serious  wounds ;  yet, 
thanks  be  to  God,  I  escaped."  After  this  rather 
unlucky  adventure,  Hawkins  continued  cruising 
along  the  African  coast,  and  picking  up,  here  and 
there,  what  few  unfortunate  blacks  he  and  his 
men  could  lay  their  hands  on. 

One  day  the  ships  anchored  in  a  harbor  where 
there  seemed  to  be  a  good  prospect  of  making 
some  captures.  While  Hawkins  was  preparing  to 
make  an  incursion  inland,  some  of  his  men  came 
to  him  and  told  him  that  a  negro,  evidently  of 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  23 

rank  and  importance,  had  arrived  from  the  interior, 
and  was  anxious  to  communicate  with  the  captain. 

Seating  himself  on  a  little  knoll  just  above  the 
harbor,  with  Drake  and  the  other  shipmasters 
around  him,  Hawkins  ordered  that  the  negro 
should  be  brought  before  him.  The  new  comer 
was  so  very  black  that  his  features  could  scarcely 
be  distinguished.  His  big  eyes  glistened  and 
showed  their  whites,  partly  from  distrust  and  fear, 
and  partly  from  curiosity.  He  wore  nothing  but 
a  rude  robe  made  from  a  tiger's  skin ;  and  in  his 
ears  hung  two  enormous  rings  of  some  shining 
metal. 

As  soon  as  he  had  recovered  from  his  timidity 
at  finding  himself  alone  in  the  midst  of  a  group  of 
white  men,  the  negro  began  to  make  rapid  motions 
and  gestures,  chattering  all  the  while  in  his  native 
tongue,  of  which,  of  course,  none  of  the  English- 
men understood  a  word.  But  Hawkins  had  been 
so  long  engaged  in  the  slave  trade,  and  had  had  so 
many  dealings  with  the  negroes,  that  he  was  not 
slow  to  understand  the  meaning  of  his  gestures 
and  grimaces. 

He  succeeded  in  making  out  that  the  negro 
was  the  envoy  of  a  certain   swarthy  king,  who 


24  DRAKE : 

ruled  one  of  the  countries  not  many  miles  in  the 
interior;  and  that  this  potentate,  hearing  of  the 
arrival  of  the  English  on  the  coast,  had  sent  to 
seek  their  aid  in  a  desperate  war  which  he  was  at 
that  moment  carrying  on.  It  appeared  that  two 
neighboring  kings  had  joined  forces  for  the  pur- 
pose of  destroying  him,  and  dividing  his  dominions 
between  them.  He  was  now  in  a  forlorn  state, 
for  his  subjects  had  been  overwhelmingly  defeated 
in  a  long  and  ferocious  battle. 

Hawkins,  always  with  a  keen  eye  to  his  own 
advantage,  saw  at  once  that  this  was  an  oppor- 
tunity to  profit  by  the  quarrels  of  these  savage 
monarchs.  By  allying  himself  with  the  defeated 
king,  and  putting  his  enemies  to  rout,  he  might 
hope  to  fill  the  nearly  empty  holds  of  his  vessels 
with  the  human  cargoes  he  had  hitherto  failed  to 
obtain ;  and  by  capturing  and  sacking  their  towns, 
he  might  also  find  treasures  worth  carrying  away 
with  him. 

So  he  told  the  negro  envoy  to  hasten  back  to 
his  master,  and  to  apprise  him  that  the  English 
would  follow  forthwith  to  his  rescue.  With  the 
bold  Drake  as  his  lieutenant,  Hawkins  set  forward 
next  morning  with  a  well-armed  force  of  one  hun« 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  25 

dred  and  twenty  men.  With  their  skill  and  their 
firearms,  even  so  small  a  number  would  be  a  match 
for  an  army  of  untaught  savages.  The  company 
marched  without  obstacle  or  hindrance  through 
the  country,  which  at  first  they  found  almost  de- 
serted ;  for  the  negroes,  dreading  the  slave-ships, 
had,  to  a  large  extent,  retreated  from  the  neighbor- 
hood of  the  coast.  At  last,  on  reaching  the  top 
of  a  hill,  Hawkins  espied  a  thickly  settled  village, 
nestled  in  an  open  space  on  the  further  edge  of 
the  valley.  He  found  that  this  village  belonged 
to  one  of  the  adversaries  of  his  dusky  ally ;  and 
lost  no  time  in  preparing  to  attack  it. 

The  village  was  strongly  defended  by  high 
palings  and  fences ;  and  as  soon  as  the  inhabitants 
caught  sight  of  the  white  strangers,  and  suspected 
their  hostile  intentions,  they  prepared  to  resist 
the  assault  by  every  means  in  their  power. 

Drake  led  the  attacking  force;  but  so  stout 
was  the  resistance  of  the  natives,  that  he  was 
driven  back  again  and  again.  The  poisoned  ar- 
rows, shot  from  behind  the  palings,  did  deadly 
work;  while  the  firearms  of  the  English  were  of 
little  avail  against  the  wooden  rampart.  Hawkins 
was  obliged  to  send  in  all  haste  back  to  the  ships 


26  DRAKE : 

for  reinforcements.  When  these  arrived,  he  once 
more  assailed  the  negro  town.  He  was  soon  joined 
by  a  body  of  savages  led  by  the  king  whose  cause  he 
was  aiding ;  and  now  the  conflict  became  hot  and 
desperate.  At  last  the  ramparts  were  scaled,  and 
the  English  adventurers  found  themselves  in  pos- 
session of  the  place. 

"  We  put  the  inhabitants  to  flight,"  says  Hawk- 
ins, in  his  narrative,  "  and  took  two  hundred  and 
fifty  persons,  men,  women,  and  children,  while  our 
friend  the  king  took  six  hundred  ;  of  whom  we 
hoped  to  have  had  our  choice.  But  the  negro  (in 
which  nation  is  seldom  or  never  found  truth) 
meant  nothing  less ;  for  that  night  he  removed 
his  camp  and  prisoners,  so  that  we  were  fain  to 
content  us  with  those  few  we  had  gotten  our- 
selves." 

Thus  was  Hawkins  repaid,  by  the  ingratitude 
of  the  dusky  monarch  whom  he  had  come  to  help. 
But  the  expedition,  after  all,  was  not  an  unprof- 
itable one;  for  the  buccaneers  found  that  their 
vessels  were  now  laden  with  four  or  five  hundred 
negroes. 

It  was  early  in  February,  1568,  —  four  months 
after  its  departure  from  Plymouth  —  that  the  little 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  2^ 

squadron  turned  its  prows  westward,  and  sailed 
towards  the  Spanish  main.  For  the  first  time 
Drake  exulted  in  the  thought  that  he  was  on  the 
broad  Atlantic,  and  was  ploughing  across  that  un- 
ruly and  dangerous  deep  of  which  so  many  thrilling 
stories  had  reached  his  ears.  At  last,  his  eye 
would  rest  on  the  wonders  of  the  New  World ;  its 
rich  and  luxuriant  scenery,  its  wealth  in  fruits  and 
in  precious  metals ;  and  his  love  of  adventure 
would  be  gratified  by  the  encounter  with  England's 
Spanish  rivals,  and  the  dusky  tribes  of  the  Western 
Islands. 

The  transit  across  the  Atlantic  consumed  about 
seven  weeks ;  nor  did  any  accident  occur  to  mar 
the  prosperous  voyage.  No  mighty  storms  scat- 
tered or  wrecked  the  sturdy  ships;  there  was 
ample  provision  on  board;  and  the  experience 
which  Hawkins  had  acquired  by  his  two  previous 
voyages  was  now  of  great  service  to  him  in  guid- 
ing the  squadron  across  the  ocean  by  the  quickest 
route.  On  the  27th  of  March,  Drake,  standing  on 
the  deck  of  the  "Judith,"  and  enjoying  the  soft 
and  balmy  breezes  blowing  from  the  Gulf  of  Mex- 
ico, caught  sight  of  land ;  and  the  intelligence 
quickly  spread  to  the  other  vessels.     The  land 


28  DRAKE : 

proved  to  be  the  island  we  now  call  Hayti,  but 
which  the  buccaneers  then  knew  as  "Dominica." 
The  squadron  cast  anchor  in  one  of  the  harbors, 
and  Hawkins  prepared  to  sell  his  slaves,  and  to 
exchange  his  merchandise  with  the  Spanish  col- 
onists. 

England  and  Spain  were  now  unfriendly  to  each 
other ;  and  the  Spanish  king  had  sent  orders  to 
his  colonists  in  the  West  Indies  not  to  have  any 
dealings  with  the  English.  But  Hawkins's  slaves 
and  goods  were  too  tempting  to  be  rejected;  and 
in  spite  of  the  king's  commands,  he  drove  a  brisk 
trade  with  the  Spanish  planters  and  merchants. 

The  squadron  coasted  along  from  island  to  island, 
and  wherever  the  English  landed,  they  were  well 
received  and  entertained.  At  last  they  reached 
Capo  de  la  Vela,  and  attempted  to  open  a  traffic 
with  a  large  Spanish  settlement  called  Rio  de  la 
Hacha.  The  governor  of  this  place  was  of  dif- 
ferent metal  from  the  rest.  He  hated  and  feared 
the  English,  and  was  eager  to  fulfil  his  sovereign's 
commands.  Hawkins  was  very  anxious  to  trade 
at  Rio  de  la  Hacha,  for  it  was  there  that  he 
expected  to  get  pearls  in  exchange  for  his  mer- 
chandise.   But  when  he  found  himself  oppositp 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  29 

the  town,  he  perceived,  to  his  chagrin,  that  it 
was  fortified,  and  that  its  ramparts  were  defended 
by  Spanish  soldiers. 

"We  were  obhged,"  he  says,  "to  assail  the  town 
and  enter  it  by  force.  With  two  hundred  men  we 
landed  and  broke  in  upon  their  bulwarks,  and 
entered  the  town  with  a  loss  of  only  two  men  on 
our  part.  No  hurt  was  done  to  the  Spaniards, 
because,  after  they  had  discharged  their  first  volley 
of  shot,  they  all  turned  and  fled.  Thus  having 
possession  of  the  town,  we  obtained  a  secret 
trade ;  for  the  Spaniards  resorted  to  us  by  night, 
and  bought  of  us  to  the  number  of  two  hundred 
negroes." 

Having  thus  overcome  the  Spanish  governor 
and  his  troops  at  Rio  de  la  Hacha,  Hawkins  pro- 
ceeded on  his  way.  At  Cartagena,  he  met  with  a 
similar  cold  reception ;  but  as  the  season  was  ad- 
vancing, as  he  had  already  spent  many  weeks 
among  the  islands,  and  as,  moreover,  he  had 
disposed  of  a  large  part  of  his  cargoes  of  slaves, 
he  thought  it  the  part  of  prudence  not  to  attempt 
to  take  this  town  by  force. 

Already,  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  the  Caribbean 
sea  were  swept  by  frequent  and  terrific  storms. 


30  DRAKE : 

The  little  squadron  had  been  long  at  sea,  and 
several  of  the  vessels  sadly  needed  repairs.  Haw- 
kins, therefore,  resolved  to  gain  a  good  shelter  on 
the  main  coast  as  speedily  as  possible. 

He  first  directed  his  course  toward  the  peninsula 
of  Florida.  Skirting  the  western  coast  of  Cuba, 
and  animated  by  the  hope  of  soon  reaching  a 
secure  haven  where  the  ships  could  be  repaired 
and  the  crews  rested  and  refreshed,  of  a  sudden 
the  whole  squadron  was  plunged  into  imminent 
peril. 

A  terrific  hurricane  and  tempest,  such  as  are 
frequent  in  midsummer  in  that  region,  over- 
whelmed the  ships,  and  drove  them  frantically 
hither  and  thither  over  the  mountainous  billows. 
For  four  days  and  four  nights  the  storm  raged 
with  a  fury  such  as  Drake  had  never  witnessed  or 
imagined.  Day  and  night,  lashed  to  a  mast,  he 
remained  on  deck  to  give  his  orders,  and  to  take 
on  the  instant  every  measure  for  the  safety  of  his 
ship.  The  flag-ship,  the  "Jesus,"  fared  the  worst 
from  the  dreadful  fury  of  the  winds  and  waves.  One 
after  another  the  buildings  on  her  deck  were 
beaten  down  and  swept  away.  Her  rudder  was 
broken  in  a  furious  gale ;  and  suddenly  she  sprung 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  3 1 

SO  large  and  dangerous  a  leak,  that  Hawkins  was 
on  the  point  of  leaving  her  and  trusting  to  the  life- 
boats to  take  him  and  his  crew  safely  to  one  of  the 
other  ships. 

Towards  the  evening  of  the  fourth  day,  however, 
the  gale  subsided;  and  presently  the  voyagers 
were  filled  with  joy  to  see  the  clouds  break  away, 
and  the  waves  decrease  in  size  and  violence. 
Hawkins  observed  with  delight  that  all  six  of  the 
ships  were  still  safe  and  sound,  and  that  they 
were  soon  able  to  join  each  other. 

The  Florida  coast  ere  long  appeared  in  sight ; 
and  soon  the  squadron  was  sailing  along  its  level 
and  sandy  shores.  But  in  vain  did  Hawkins 
search  for  a  secure  harbor.  Everywhere  the  little 
bays  and  inlets  were  too  shallow  to  admit  the 
ships.  The  gallant  captain  kept  up  a  stout  heart, 
nor  did  his  sailors  murmur  at  their  disappoint- 
ment. Hawkins  knew  that  his  only  resource  was 
to  cross  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  find  a  haven  on 
the  Mexican  coast.  No  sooner  had  the  squadron 
got  well  away  from  the  mainland,  than  it  once 
more  had  to  submit  to  the  fury  of  the  winds. 
Another  storm  burst  forth,  equal  in  violence  to 
that  through  which  they  had  passed  so  short  a 


32  i»rake: 

time  before.  It  lasted  three  days;  but  the  skill 
of  the  sailors,  and  the  hardy  courage  of  their 
commanders,  carried  the  vessels  safely  through  its 
perils. 

The  trials  of  the  voyagers  were  but  begun. 
Events  soon  occurred  which  tried  all  their  forti- 
tude and  valor.  At  the  port  of  Saint  John  d'Ul- 
loa,  in  Mexico,  which  they  reached  after  a  dif- 
ficult voyage,  they  were  destined  to  meet  with 
more  than  one  thrilling  adventure. 


E 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  33 

CHAPTER  III. 

A  DESPERATE   SEA-FIGHT. 

|S  the  little  squadron  was  making  for  the 
Mexican  coast,  it  encountered  three  small 
Spanish  vessels,  which  carried  about  one 
hundred  passengers.  In  those  days,  the  right 
always  lay  with  the  strongest ;  and  so  Hawkins 
did  not  hesitate  to  stop  and  board  these  ships, 
and  transfer  the  passengers  to  his  own  vessels. 
They  would  serve  as  hostages,  in  case  he  had  any 
trouble  with  the  Spaniards  on  the  Mexican  coast ; 
and  would  enable  him  to  demand  provisions  and  a 
harbor. 

Three  days  after  this  capture,  the  coast  ap- 
peared in  view ;  and  soon  the  squadron  was  enter- 
ing the  narrow  channel  which  led  to  the  port 
of  St.  John  d'Ulloa.  It  was  a  miserable  harbor, 
and  the  only  safe  anchorage  was  off  a  small,  low,- 
gravelly  island  in  the  bay.  Even  here,  the  only 
secure  place  for  ships  to  be  moored  was  narrow 
and  confined,  and  did  not  offer  more  than  enough 
room  for  Hawkins's  squadron.     So  violent  were  the 


34  DRAKE : 

winds  in  that  region,  that  he  was  forced  to  put  up 
as  best  he  could  with  this  inconvenient  shelter. 

The  Spaniards  in  the  town,  which  lay  along  the 
main  shore  just  opposite  the  island,  had  no  sooner 
perceived  the  squadron,  than  they  mistook  it  for  a 
Spanish  fleet  which  they  had  long  been  daily  ex- 
pecting. The  officers  in  the  town,  therefore,  made 
all  haste  to  go  and  welcome  those  whom  they  sup- 
posed to  be  their  countrymen.  Several  boats  speed- 
ily put  out  from  the  main  shore,  and  sped  toward 
the  ships.  When  they  came  alongside  the  "Jesus," 
the  officers  were  taken  on  board.  On  gaining  the 
deck,  they  stared  about  them  in  amazement.  They 
perceived  at  once  that  the  vessel  was  not  a  Span- 
ish one,  and  that  the  men  were  foreigners,  who 
spoke  a  strange  tongue.  Their  swarthy  faces 
changed  to  an  expression  of  alarm.  They  per- 
ceived that  they  had  been  greatly  mistaken,  and 
that  they  were  completely  in  the  power  of  an  Eng- 
lish crew. 

The  Spaniards,  however,  were  soon  reassured. 
Hawkins  addressed  them  in  their  own  language, 
and  told  them  that  they  had  nothing  to  fear  from 
him ;  that  they  might  depart  as  they  came,  in 
safety ;  and  that  all  he  asked  of  them  was  a  prom- 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  35 

ise  that  his  ships  should  be  supplied  with  provis- 
ions from  the  town.  This  promise  the  Spaniards 
very  promptly  made ;  and  were  soon  hastening 
back  to  the  shore  in  their  boats. 

The  next  day,  Hawkins  and  Drake  boarded  a 
number  of  Spanish  ships  which  were  anchored 
near  the  shore,  and  found  that  they  had  on  board 
a  large  treasure  in  gold  and  silver.  The  English- 
men were  sorely  tempted  to  seize  this ;  but  pru- 
dence prevailed  over  cupidity.  Hawkins  took  the 
precaution  to  seize  two  Spaniards  of  rank,  and 
to  dispatch  them  into  the  interior  with  a  message 
for  the  Governor  of  Mexico.  He  sent  him  word 
that  the  English  squadron  had  been  forced  to  put 
in  at  St.  John  d'Ulloa  by  stress  of  weather  and 
want  of  food ;  and  demanded  that  the  Spaniards 
on  the  mainland  should  be  permitted  to  sell  him 
provisions,  and  to  make  the  needed  repairs  on  his 
ships. 

But  before  he  could  receive  a  reply  from  the 
Governor,  a  new  peril  confronted  him.  One  morn- 
ing, as  he  and  Drake  sat  together  talking  over 
their  situation  on  the  main  deck  of  the  flag-ship, 
a  cloud  of  sail  appeared  above  the  horizon  on  the 
east.     The  rising  sun,  glowing  upon  the  sail,  soon 


3^  DRAKE : 

showed  Hawkins  the  Spanish  flag  floating  above 
the  canvasses.  One  after  another  the  big  galleons 
hove  into  full  sight ;  and  with  slow  and  stately- 
movement  bore  directly  down  upon  the  harbor 
where  the  English  squadron  was  anchored. 

"There  is  the  Spanish  fleet,"  said  the  admiral 
to  Drake.  "  There  is  serious  work  in  store  for  us. 
What  shall  we  do?" 

"  We  must  not  let  them  pass,"  returned  Drake. 

"  If  I  let  them  go  within  the  harbor,"  said  Hawk- 
ins, "  they  will  be  playing  us  some  of  their  false 
Spanish  tricks ;  and  in  such  a  position  we  could 
not  cope  with  them.  But  if  we  hold  them  off  in 
the  Gulf,  they  will  surely  be  shipwrecked ;  and  then, 
perchance,  Queen  Bess  could  call  us  to  heavy 
account." 

"Of  the  two  dangers,"  retorted  Drake,  "we 
must  choose  the  least.  Once  we  are  in  their 
power,  our  doom  is  sealed.  If  they  pass  we 
shall  be  surely  ruined." 

"  I  will  make  a  treaty  with  them,"  said  Hawk- 
ins. "  If  they  will  agree  to  my  conditions,  I  wilJ 
take  the  risk  of  letting  them  go  within." 

A  messenger  was  at  once  dispatched  in  a 
long  boat  to  the  approaching  fleet.     He  boarded 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  37 

the  Spanish  flag-ship,  and  seeking  the  admiral, 
gave  him  Hawkins's  message.  The  Spaniard 
received  him  with  polite  courtesy,  and  said  that 
he  would  gladly  accept  fair  conditions.  Haw- 
kins demanded  that  the  people  in  the  town 
should  be  allowed  to  sell  him  victuals,  and  to  buy 
his  merchandise;  that  the  island  where  his  ships 
were  moored  should  remain  undisputed  in  his 
possession,  and  that  the  eleven  cannon  on  the 
island  should  be  at  his  disposal  for  purposes  of  de- 
fence; that  the  Spanish  admiral  should  send  to 
the  English  flag-ship  twelve  gentlemen  of  rank  as 
hostages  and  pledges  of  peace ;  and  that  no  Span- 
iard should  land  upon  the  island  bearing  any  kind 
of  weapon.  The  conditions,  after  some  hesitation, 
were  accepted ;  except  that  the  Spanish  admiral 
sent  only  ten,  instead  of  twelve  hostages  to  the 
English  squadron. 

Everything  appearing  to  be  thus  amicably  set- 
tled, the  Spanish  galleons  floated  toward  the 
English  ships.  As  they  drew  near,  the  trumpets 
were  sounded  in  loud  token  of  the  friendly  feeling 
on  both  sides ;  and  when  the  Spanish  flag-ship  was 
passing  the  "Jesus,"  the  two  commanders,  each 
standing  erect  on  his  own  deck,  and  surrounded 


38  DRAKE : 

by  his  officers,  gracefully  saluted  one  another, 
waving  their  hats  and  bowing  low,  in  token  of 
their  mutual  respect.  As  they  did  so,  the  guns 
boomed  in  every  direction,  and  the  flags  were  run 
briskly  up  to  the  mast-heads. 

It  was  necessary  for  the  Spanish  fleet  to  be 
moored  off  the  same  little  island  which  afforded  a 
haven  to  the  English ;  and  in  order  to  make  room 
for  them,  Hawkins's  ships  were  huddled  still  closer 
together  on  one  side,  while  the  Spanish  ships  were 
similarly  crowded  on  the  other.  For  two  or  three 
days  all  went  on  as  pleasantly  as  possible.  The 
Spanish  and  English  officers  visited  each  other 
freely  on  the  decks,  and  strolled  together  on  the 
pebbly  shore  of  the  little  island.  Hawkins  and  the 
Spanish  admiral  made  merry  with  each  other  over 
bounteous  fare  and  rich  wines  in  their  cabins ;  and 
it  seemed  as  if  nothing  was  likely  to  disturb  these 
friendly  relations. 

But  on  the  fourth  day  after  the  entrance  of  the 
Spanish  fleet,  Hawkins  received  intelligence  which 
filled  him  with  suspicion  and  alarm.  He  was  told 
by  his  spies  that,  on  the  night  before,  a  thousand 
men  had  been  quietly  taken  on  board  the  Spanish 
ships  from  the  mainland ;  that  many  strange  move* 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  39 

ments  had  been  observed  in  the  fleet;  that  the 
Spanish  cannon  had  been  turned  and  pointed  to- 
wards the  English ;  and  that  there  was  a  great 
deal  of  bustling,  and  hurrying  to  and  fro,  between 
the  fleet  and  the  town  on  the  mainland. 

Hawkins  at  once  made  up  his  mind  what  to  do. 
He  sent  a  messenger  to  the  Spanish  flag-ship,  to 
ask  of  the  admiral  what  all  these  unusual  move- 
ments meant,  and  to  declare  that  he  relied 
implicitly  upon  the  admiral's  good  faith.  The 
admiral  pretended  to  give  prompt  orders  that  the 
cannon  should  be  turned  away  from  the  English 
squadron,  and  sent  back  word  that  no  foul  play 
toward  Hawkins  was  intended. 

But  the  sturdy  Englishman  refused  to  be  satisfied 
with  this  response;  and  forthwith  sent  back  the 
master  of  his  own  ship,  the  "Jesus,"  —  a  man  who 
could  speak  and  understand  Spanish,  —  to  ask  the 
admiral  if  it  were  true  that  a  thousand  armed  men 
had  been  brought  on  board  the  Spanish  ships  from 
the  mainland. 

Minutes  and  hours  passed,  and  Hawkins  awaited 
in  vain  the  return  of  his  messenger.  He  failed  to 
reappear.  It  was  evident  that  the  faithful  master 
was  being  detained  against  his  will.     It  was  now 


40  DRAKE : 

clear  to  Hawkins  that  the  Spaniards  meant  to  play 
him  false.     His  suspicion  was  very  soon  confirmed. 

As  he  stood  upon  deck,  straining  his  eyes  in  the 
direction  whence  he  expected  his  messenger  to 
return,  of  a  sudden  the  blasts  of  the  trumpets  on 
board  the  Spanish  galleons  struck  upon  his  ear. 
In  another  instant,  one  of  the  largest  galleons, 
which  was  moored  close  by  the  English  ship 
"Minion,"  swung  round,  and  poured  a  broadside 
into  her  side. 

It  happened  that  at  this  moment  a  number  of 
the  English  sailors  were  on  the  shore  of  the  island. 
Not  suspecting  the  sudden  treachery  of  the 
Spaniards,  Hawkins  had  not  taken  the  precaution 
to  order  his  men  on  board.  The  poor  fellows, 
straggling  along  the  sands,  were  assailed  merci- 
lessly by  the  Spanish  cannon,  and  scattered  in  all 
directions ;  some  fleeing  away  from  the  shore,  and 
others  plunging  into  the  water  so  that,  if  possible, 
they  might  reach  the  shelter  of  the  ships.  Mean- 
while, many  Spaniards  landed  on  the  island  and 
pursued  the  English  here  and  there  with  desperate 
impetuosity.  In  various  places  there  were  bloody 
hand-to-hand  fights  ;  but  the  Spaniards,  being  more 
numerous,    and  fully  armed  and  prepared,  soon 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  4I 

overcame  the  resistance  of  their  surprised  enemies. 
Every  Englishman  who  fell  in  their  way  was 
savagely  slaughtered,  and  left  writhing  and  dying 
upon  the  beach.  A  few  of  the  English,  who  were 
good  swimmers,  succeeded  in  getting  to  the 
"Jesus,"  and  scrambled  on  board. 

The  deck  of  the  big  galleon  which  had  given  the 
signal  for  the  conflict  by  firing  into  the  "  Minion," 
was  crowded  with  a  force  of  not  less  than  three 
hundred  fierce  and  heavily  armed  men.  She  con- 
tinued her  assault  upon  the  English  vessel,  which 
fared  hard  in  the  unequal  encounter.  But  the 
"  Minion "  gallantly  defended  herself  from  the  on- 
slaught of  her  bulky  foe,  and  maintained  her  ground 
with  valiant  pluck.  At  last  her  crew  were  able  to 
loosen  her  headfasts  and  to  haul  her  away,  and 
she  escaped  from  the  murderous  blows  of  the 
galleon. 

The  latter  now  turned  her  attention  to  the 
"  Jesus,"  Hawkins's  flag-ship ;  at  the  same  moment, 
two  other  galleons  bore  down  upon  the  "Jesus." 
Hawkins  and  his  men  were  in  a  perilous  strait. 
In  numbers,  they  were  no  match  for  the  perfidious 
Spaniards,  nor  were  they  as  well  off  in  arms,  am- 
munition, and  ordnance.     They  had  two  tasks  to 


42  DRAKE : 

perform ;  first,  to  defend  the  good  ship  from  the 
combined  attack  of  the  three  galleons,  and,  at  the 
same  time,  to  make  a  desperate  attempt  to  loosen 
her  moorings,  so  that  she  might  escape  from  the 
shower  of  the  Spanish  shot. 

The  brave  Hawkins  stood  on  deck  with  un- 
covered head,  waving  his  naked  sword,  and  shouting 
his  orders  to  his  men  in  hoarse,  stentorian  tones. 
Now  he  turned  to  the  plucky  fellows  who  were 
answering,  with  grim  persistency,  the  Spanish  fire ; 
now  he  cried  out  to  the  sailors  who  were  tugging 
away  to  set  free  the  ship  from  the  island.  At  last 
the  latter  were  successful ;  the  moorings  yielded, 
and  the  flag-ship  swung  out  from  her  close  prox- 
imity to  her  assailants,  and  found  herself  floating 
in  the  channel  alongside  the  **  Minion,"  in  a  far 
better  position  to  cope  with  the  great  galleons 
which  still  pursued  her. 

It  was  not  long  before  both  fleets  were  engaged 
in  the  furious  fray.  The  fight  waxed  hot  and  close. 
The  air  was  heavy  with  the  up-rolling  clouds  of 
smoke,  and  the  din  of  the  reverberations  was  ter- 
rible to  hear.  The  noise  of  masts  falling  with  a 
crash,  and  then  a  splash  into  the  water ;  of  cannon 
balls  crunching  through  hulk  and  gunwale;  the 


A  Desperate  Sea  Fight.  — Page  43. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  43 

cries  of  the  wounded,  and  hoarse  shouts  of  the 
officers ;  the  lunging  and  plunging  of  the  ships, 
filled  the  scene  with  dreadful  echoes. 

Soon  Drake,  with  the  "Judith,"  was  in  the  midst 
of  the  conflict.  Standing  with  grim  features  and 
dauntless  bearing  on  the  deck,  his  blood  boiled 
with  the  rage  of  the  onset.  It  was  the  first  des- 
perate sea-fight  in  which  he  had  ever  taken  part ; 
and  his  bold  spirit  exulted  in  the  turmoil  and 
danger  and  excitement  of  the  mel^e.  Once  a 
Spanish  ship  approached  so  close  to  the  "Judith," 
that  Drake,  reaching  across  the  narrow  interval, 
dealt  so  terrific  a  blow  at  a  Spanish  officer  with  his 
long  sword,  that  the  assaulted  man  fell  whirling 
into  the  water,  and  sank,  leaving  a  bloody  streak 
upon  the  waves,  to  rise  no  more. 

For  an  hour  or  more,  each  ship,  Spanish  and 
English,  heroically  stood  its  ground,  and  refused 
to  sink  beneath  the  assaults  of  its  antagonists. 
Then  the  Spanish  flag-ship  was  seen  to  whirl  and 
shiver,  and  with  a  mighty  creak  settle  beneath  the 
waves.  A  great  shout  went  up  from  the  English- 
men, and  Hawkins  began  to  hope  for  victory  after 
all.  Then  another  Spanish  galleon  plunged  her 
bow  into  the  waves  and  disappeared,  while  the  men 


44  drake: 

who  had  manned  her  were  seen  struggling  in  the 
water. 

But  these  calamities  only  incited  the  fierce 
Spanish  warriors  to  still  more  desperate  valor. 
Hawkins's  ship,  the  "Jesus,"  was  terribly  riddled. 
Her  masts  and  yards  were  cut  away,  and  swung  off 
into  the  sea;  and  presently,  so  disabled  did  she 
become,  that  her  commander  and  his  men  were 
forced  to  abandon  her  to  her  fate,  and  seek  refuge 
on  the  other  vessels.  The  loss  of  the  "  Judith  " 
was  presently  followed  by  the  sinking  of  one  or 
two  of  the  other  English  vessels. 

Hawkins  had  gone  on  board  the  "  Minion,"  the 
stout  little  ship  which  had  borne  the  brunt  of  the 
first  sudden  onset  of  the  Spaniards.  He  succeeded, 
even  in  the  midst  of  the  battle,  in  transferring  to 
her  the  provisions  and  ammunition  of  the  deserted 
"Jesus."  Then  the  "Jesus"  was  swung  round 
between  the  "Minion"  and  the  island,  so  as  to 
receive  the  shot  from  a  battery  which  the  Spaniards 
had  planted  close  to  the  shore,  and  from  which 
they  were  pouring  quickly-succeeding  volleys  into 
the  sides  of  the  "  Minion."  Thus  was  the  "  Minion  " 
sheltered  and  saved. 

Fire  was  soon  added  to  the  other  terrors  of  the 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  4{ 

thrilling  scene.  Suddenly  a  lurid  glare  shed  it- 
self over  the  ships  and  the  water.  A  huge  Span- 
ish galleon  was  burning  from  end  to  end;  and 
the  men  on  board  of  her  were  dropping  fast  and 
thick  into  the  water.  The  Spaniards  retaliated  by 
setting  fire  to  two  of  the  larger  English  ships, 
which  speedily  became  a  glowing,  roaring  mass 
of  flame.  So  near  were  these  burning  ships  to  the 
"  Minion,"  that  her  men  were  terribly  alarmed  lest 
she  too,  should  catch  fire.  In  spite  of  Hawkins's 
remonstrances,  the  men  weighed  anchor,  and  having 
set  her  sails,  withdrew  her  from  the  scene  of 
devastation. 

Drake,  too,  saw  that  all  was  lost.  Both  sides 
had  been  terribly  punished ;  but  the  Spaniards,  by 
reason  of  their  numbers,  arms,  and  the  sudden 
treachery  of  their  attack,  had  proved  too  much  for 
the  English.  As  far  as  he  could  see,  Drake  could 
not  discern  any  English  craft,  except  the  "  Min- 
ion," which  he  perceived  hurriedly  sailing  away, 
and  his  own  vessel,  the  "Judith."  To  cope  alone 
with  the  still  ferocious  and  undismayed  Spaniards, 
would  have  been  an  act  of  the  sheerest  folly.  It 
might  be  that  it  was  too  late  even  to  escape.  But, 
with  sorrowful  heart,  he  ordered  his  men  to  cease 


46  DRAKE : 

fighting,  and  to  get  away,  if  possible,  under  cover  of 
the  now  deepening  twilight.  It  grieved  his  sturdy 
soul  that  in  his  first  fight  he  had  suffered  the 
humiliation  of  defeat ;  and  this  event  only  planted 
in  his  heart  an  undying  hatred  of  the  Spaniard, 
and  a  fierce  resolve  to  revenge  himself  some  day 
on  England's  perfidious  foe.  We  shall  see  how 
effectually  he  afterwards  kept  this  promise  to 
himself. 

Darkness  soon  enveloped  the  scene  of  the  bloody 
conflict,  and  under  its  dense  obscurity  the  "  Judith  '* 
slipped  away  into  the  open  sea.  Drake  hoped  to 
rejoin  Hawkins  and  the  "  Minion  "  in  the  morning. 
As  soon  as  he  had  got  to  a  safe  distance  from  the 
Spaniards,  he  cast  anchor,  and  lay  by  all  night. 
Fortunately  the  sea  was  calm  and  the  wind  gentle, 
or,  so  disabled  was  his  little  vessel,  he  might  have 
been  wrecked. 

By  dawn  the  stout-hearted  captain  was  on  deck, 
looking  in  every  direction  for  the  "  Minion."  But 
she  was  nowhere  to  be  seen.  The  situation  was 
full  of  peril.  If  Drake  remained  in  his  present 
position  near  the  island,  he  might  well  fear  that 
the  Spaniards  would  perceive  the  "Judith,''  and 
would  make  short  work  of  capturing  her,  and  of 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  47 

raking  himself  and  his  companions  prisoners.  If, 
on  the  other  hand,  he  sailed  away,  he  must  entirely 
give  up  all  hope  of  rejoining  the  *'  Minion."  Of 
these  dangers  he  soon  made  up  his  mind  to  choose 
the  least.  Even  if  he  staid  where  he  was,  it  was 
doubtful  whether  he  would  be  able  to  find  Hawk- 
ins's ship ;  so  he  decided  that  his  only  course  was 
to  make  his  way,  as  best  he  could,  out  of  the  gul^ 
and  across  the  Atlantic. 

So  it  was  that  the  only  two  remaining  ships  of 
the  adventurous  little  squadron  which  had  sailed 
so  cheerily  out  of  Plymouth  harbor,  returned  home- 
ward separately,  neither  knowing,  until  the  familiar 
shores  of  England  wiere  reached,  whether  or  not 
the  other  had  survived  the  perils  of  the  great  deep. 
Their  fortunes  on  the  Atlantic  were  very  different. 
Hawkins's  homeward  voyage  was  full  of  suffering 
and  perils,  which  at  times  drove  his  men  almost  to 
despair.  The  "  Minion  "  was  badly  damaged  by  the 
battle ;  "  she  was  so  sore  beaten  with  shot  from  our 
enemies,"  says  Hawkins,  "  and  bruised  with  shoot- 
ing off  our  own  cannon,  that  our  weary  and  weak 
arms  were  scarce  able  to  defend  and  keep  our 
water.  But  all  things  happened  adversely  to  us ; 
for  we  found  neither  people,  victual,  nor  haven  of 


48  drake: 

relief."  For  three  days  the  distressed  little  ship 
was  assailed  by  a  furious  tempest,  "  sd  that  every 
hour  we  looked  for  shipwreck."  Many  of  the  men 
died  from  hunger  and  sickness,  and,  at  last  there 
were  scarcely  enough  left  to  serve  the  ship  on  her 
voyage.  But  Hawkins  was  finally  rejoiced,  after 
all  his  calamities,  to  see  the  well-known  coast  of 
Cornwall.  On  Jan.  20,  1569,  the  "Minion"  safely 
anchored  in  Mount's  Bay. 

Drake  had  a  far  quicker  and  more  prosperous 
homeward  voyage.  He  had  already  arrived,  having 
lost  but  few  men  and  undergone  but  few  hardships, 
when  Hawkins  landed  on  the  Cornish  coast. 


THE  SEA-KING  OF  DEVON.  4^ 

CHAPTER  IV. 

DRAKE   IN   MEXICO. 


RANCIS  DRAKE  was  a  man  of  stern, 
stubborn  and  resolute  character.  He  had 
a  spirit  which  quailed  before  no  obstacle, 
and  which  no  defeat  could  subdue.  Neither  the 
tempests  of  the  great  deep,  nor  the  overwhelming 
assaults  of  an  enemy,  could  dismay  him.  Disaster 
only  spurred  him  to  greater  vigor  and  more  sturdy 
effort.  He  was,  truly,  of  the  metal  of  which  heroes 
and  rulers  of  men  are  made. 

His  voyage  with  Hawkins  had  been  a  great  mis- 
fortune to  him  in  more  than  one  respect.  Not 
only  had  he  undergone  the  many  hardships  in- 
cident to  so  long  and  dangerous  an  expedition ; 
not  only  had  he  suffered  the  agony  of  seeing  the 
gallant  little  squadron  overcome  and  scattered  by  a 
perfidious  foe,  and  of  being  forced  to  fly  in  presence 
of  a  superior  force  ;  but  he  had  lost  nearly  every- 
thing he  possessed  in  the  world.  He  had,  indeed, 
made  easy  the  declining  years  of  his  aged  parents ; 
but  the   rest  of  his  fortune  had  been  invested 


50  DRAKE : 

in  Hawkins's  enterprise.  All  this  had  now  been 
swept  away.  On  his  arrival  in  England,  Drake 
found  himself  a  very  poor  man,  apparently  with  no 
future  before  him,  and  with  no  means  of  resum- 
ing his  maritime  career. 

But  this  outlook  did  not  discourage  him.  He 
took  his  loss  with  stoical  calmness,  and  presented 
a  calm  and  resolute  face  to  the  future.  His  first 
step  was  to  try  to  recover  the  value  of  the  prop- 
erty he  had  lost,  from  the  government  of  Spain. 
By  this  time,  however,  the  long  smouldering  hos- 
tility between  England  and  Spain  was  bursting 
into  flame.  Their  rivalry  on  the  high  seas  had 
become  each  year  more  bitter ;  and  an  informal 
warfare  was  continually  going  on,  in  which  the 
ships  of  the  two  nations  preyed  upon  each  other, 
and  deemed  it  no  wrong  to  seize  and  carry  off 
as  plunder  each  other's  cargoes. 

Drake's  hatred  of  Spain  and  the  Spaniards, 
aroused  by  the  terrible  disaster  of  St.  John  d'Ul- 
loa,  in  which  the  Spaniards  had  played  so  treach- 
erous a  part,  was  yet  further  inflamed  by  the 
refusal  to  restore  any  portion  of  the  property 
he  had  lost  by  their  perfidy.  He  was  resolved,  in 
one  way  or  another,  to  assert  what  he  though^  *■*' 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  $1 

be  his  rights,  and  to  avenge  what  he  considered 
his  grievous  wrongs. 

His  first  step,  strangely  enough,  was  to  repair 
to  a  certain  clergyman,  in  whom  he  had  great  con- 
fidence, and  whose  counsel  he  had  more  than  once 
sought  in  matters  of  difficulty.  He  told  the  cler- 
gyman the  story  of  his  misfortunes,  and  dwelt  on 
the  haughty  refusal  of  Spain  to  grant  him  any  re- 
dress. 

**  Now,"  said  Drake,  as  he  finished,  **  what  can 
I  lawfully  do  to  assert  my  rights }  " 

The  pious  man  was  stirred  by  the  hardy  sea- 
man's earnest  recital ;  and,  clergyman  though  he 
was,  responded  promptly : 

"  Without  a  doubt,  you  may  recover  from  the 
King  of  Spain,  and  repair  your  losses  upon  him 
wherever  you  can." 

This  was  the  same  as  saying  that  Drake  would 
be  justified  in  going  to  sea,  capturing  Spanish 
ships  wherever  he  could  find  them,  and  in  seizing 
and  holding  their  treasures. 

Drake's  adventures  had  now  become  well  known, 
not  only  in  the  sea-faring  neighborhood  of  Plym- 
outh, but  throughout  England.  The  treachery  of 
the  Spaniards  in  Mexico,  and  the  defeat  of  Hawk- 


$2  DRAKE : 

ins's  squadron,  created  much  excitement  at  the 
court  of  Queen  Elizabeth,  and  everywhere  aroused 
the  indignation  of  the  English.  When,  therefore, 
Drake  announced  his  firm  purpose  of  pursuing  the 
enemy,  and  of  avenging  the  perfidy  of  Spain,  he 
found  himself  surrounded  by  a  host  of  earnest 
friends  and  sympathizers.  He  went  to  London, 
where,  although  he  was  not  received  by  the  Queen, 
he  consulted  with  the  leading  statesmen  and  admi- 
rals of  the  day.  It  was  ere  long  evident  to  him 
that,  poor  as  he  was,  he  would  have  but  little  diflfi- 
culty  in  following  up  the  schemes  which  absorbed 
his  mind.  Offers  of  assistance  were  made  to  him 
on  every  hand  ;  and  crowds  of  ambitious  and  ad- 
venturous youths  flocked  to  him,  and  begged  to  be 
taken  into  his  service.  There  were  many,  too, 
who,  recognizing  in  Drake  a  man  of  indomitable 
spirit  and  courage,  were  led  to  offer  their  aid  in 
the  hope  of  sharing  the  plunder  he  seemed  certain 
to  obtain. 

Thus  encouraged,  Drake  quietly  and  carefully 
laid  his  plans.  He  did  not  mean  to  be  in  a  hurry, 
but  to  take  plenty  of  time  to  carry  out  his  end 
He  would  not  risk  anything  by  being  in  feverish 
haste  to  complete  his  vengeance.     His  first  step 


THE  SEA-KING  OF  DEVON.  $3 

was  to  prepare  a  small  expedition,  not  to  assail 
the  Spaniards,  but  to  familiarize  himself  with  the 
American  waters  and  coast,  and  gain  such  knowl- 
edge and  experience  as  would  enable  him,  when 
ready,  to  attack  them  with  effect.  With  this  pur- 
pose in  view,  he  sailed  in  the  year  following  his 
return  from  Mexico,  with  two  small  ships,  the 
"  Dragon  "  and  the  "  Swan."  The  transit  across 
the  Atlantic  was  safely  and  speedily  made.  Drake 
had  now  become  a  most  skilful  mariner.  He  well 
understood  the  science  of  managing  a  ship.  He 
had  carefully  observed  the  peculiar  features  of  the 
ocean  route.  He  had  also  that  natural  tact  in 
ruling  men,  which  gave  him  absolute  mastery  over 
the  crews  he  commanded. 

Several  months  were  spent  in  cautiously  cruising 
among  the  islands  of  the  Spanish  Main,  and  skirt- 
ing the  coast  of  South  America.  Drake  kept 
shrewdly  out  of  the  way  of  the  large  Spanish  settle- 
ments ;  and  if  he  saw  a  Spanish  fleet,  made  haste 
to  hide  his  little  ships  in  sheltered  inlets,  or  to 
disappear  amid  the  vastness  of  the  deep.  All  the 
time,  he  was  taking  the  most  careful  note  of  all 
the  features  of  the  regions  he  traversed ;  observ- 
ing the  weak  places  of  Spanish  defence,  and  mark- 


54  DRAKE : 

ing  on  his  charts  the  harbors  which  opened  along 
the  coast  as  a  refuge  for  tempest-tossed  squad 
rons. 

But  he  did  not  neglect  to  seize  such  advantages 
as  chance  offered  him.  When  he  caught  a  Spanish 
ship  in  a  position  where  he  could  attack  her,  he 
did  so  with  all  his  might.  In  every  encounter 
he  came  off  victorious.  He  did  not  hesitate  to 
board  his  captives,  and  to  search  for  such  treasures 
as  they  contained  ;  and  thus  his  two  little  vessels 
were  ere  long  laden  with  valuable  spoils.  Some- 
times he  found  gold  and  silver ;  but  more  often, 
the  rare  and  expensive  products  of  remote  regions, 
which  he  had  only  to  take  to  England  and  sell  at 
high  prices.  Happily,  he  escaped  every  attempt  of 
the  Spanish  to  seize  his  ships ;  and  returned 
home  safely  within  a  year  after  he  had  sailed. 

Exulting  in  the  success  of  this  expedition,  and 
now  amply  supplied  with  funds  for  his  future 
operations,  Drake  did  not  rest  after  returning  to 
his  native  England.  The  story  of  his  adventures 
and  gains  rapidly  spread,  and  he  found  the  number 
and  the  ardor  of  his  friends  ever  increasing.  Within 
a  few  months,  he  had  made  ready  for  a  second 
voyage  of  observation ;  for  in  his  first  he  had  been 


THE  SEA-KING   OF  DEVON.  5| 

forced  to  leave  some  regions  unexplored,  with 
which  he  desired  to  be  familiar.  So  he  set  sail 
again,  this  time  with  but  a  single  small  vessel, 
the  "  Swan,"  the  same  in  which  he  had  before 
sailed.  This  voyage  was  as  prosperous  as  the 
first.  Drake  reconnoitred  those  parts  in  the 
American  waters  which  he  had  before  omitted, 
and  returned  home  with  more  booty  taken  from 
the  luckless  Spanish  galleons  which  had  come  in 
his  way. 

And  now  he  felt  himself  able  to  set  forth  with 
more  ambitious  aims.  His  fame  had  spread 
throughout  England,  and  equalled  that  of  the 
dauntless  Hawkins  himself.  He  was  in  high 
favor  at  the  royal  court,  where  his  deeds  were  all 
the  more  warmly  applauded  because  they  were 
directed  against  the  hated  Spaniard.  He  had 
plenty  of  money,  and  could  choose  his  crew  from 
among  the  bravest  and  most  skilful  seamen  in  the 
land.  He  now  aimed  at  nothing  less  than  the 
capture  of  the  possessions  of  the  King  of  Spain  in 
the  American  waters.  While  Queen  Elizabeth 
could  not  outwardly  countenance  this  hardy  and 
ambitious  design,  —  for  she  was  not  at  open  war 
with   King   Philip,  —  Drake  knew  that  he  would 


$6  DRAKE : 

carry  with  him  the  sympathy  and  good  wishes 
of  the  sovereign  and  her  courtiers. 

Drake  did  not  let  the  grass  grow  under  his  feet. 
He  did  not  waste  any  time  on  the  pleasures  and 
pastimes  of  the  day,  nor  give  himself  up  to  the 
indolent  luxuries  which  his  ample  funds  might 
now  command.  Within  a  year  after  his  return 
from  his  second  voyage  of  observation,  he  had 
completed  his  preparations  for  a  more  daring 
venture. 

It  is  an  astonishing  fact  that  this  bold  buc- 
caneer, on  setting  forth  to  capture  towns  and  col- 
onies, and  very  likely  to  engage  formidable  fleets, 
confined  his  operations  to  two  small  vessels, 
and  to  what  seems  an  insignificant  force  of  men. 
Drake  always  seemed  to  prefer  small  vessels  to 
large  ones ;  and  now  he  armed  and  provisioned 
only  two  barks,  the  "Pacha"  and  the  "Swan." 
The  "  Pacha"  was  of  seventy  tons  burden,  and  this 
vessel  Drake  himself  commanded.  The  "Swan," 
in  which  Drake  had  already  twice  crossed  the 
ocean,  was  even  smaller ;  it  was  of  only  twenty. 
five  tons.  The  command  of  the  "  Swan "  was 
confided  by  Drake  to  his  younger  brother,  John, 
who  had  grown  to  be  a  sturdy  mariner  like  him* 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  5/ 

self,  and  shared  many  of  his  own  stalwart  quali- 
ties. 

These  little  barks,  when,  in  the  early  spring  of 
1572,  they  at  last  set  forth,  carried  only  seventy- 
three  men  and  boys,  besides  the  two  captains. 
Later,  however,  Drake  picked  up  additions  to 
his  force  from  the  vessels  he  met  in  the  various 
islands ;  so  that,  at  one  time  he  had  under  com- 
mand nearly  or  quite  two  hundred  men.  Both 
vessels  carried  enough  provisions  to  last  for  a  year. 
A  large  quantity  of  ammunition  was  stored  in 
their  holds,  and  each  was  supplied  with  several 
small  cannon. 

It  was  on  a  rather  raw  March  morning  that  the 
little  expedition  spread  sails  and  glided  out  of 
Plymouth  harbor.  Drake  only  felt  easy  when  he 
saw  the  coast  of  England  receding,  and  at  last 
forming  but  a  filmy  line  in  the  horizon ;  for  he  had 
feared  that,  though  the  sympathies  of  all  were  with 
him,  the  timid  scruples  of  the  men  in  power  might 
interfere  to  stop  him.  He  breathed  more  freely, 
now  that  he  found  his  barks  ploughing  the  limitless 
Atlantic ;  and  devoted  all  his  thoughts  to  the 
thrilling  adventures  which  surely  lay  before  him. 

The  voyage  across  the  Atlantic  was   prosper- 


58  drake: 

ous,  and,  for  those  days,  rapid.  No  untoward 
incident  checked  the  progress  of  the  modest  little 
squadron.  About  the  middle  of  July,  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico  had  been  entered  and  traversed,  and  the 
Central  American  coast  appeared  in  view. 

Drake  knew  well  what  he  was  about.  On  the 
coast,  not  far  from  where  he  was  now  putting  in, 
lay  a  small,  straggling  settlement  called  "  Nombre 
de  Dios."  Small  as  this  place  was,  it  was  an  im^ 
portant  point  to  Spanish  commerce,  for  it  formed 
the  depot,  or  way-station,  between  the  riches  of 
Peru  and  the  Indies,  and  their  destination  in  Eu- 
rope. Here  the  great  galleons,  coming  in  from  the 
remote  lands  which  Spanish  valor  and  enterprise 
had  subdued,  laden  with  spices,  silks,  gems,  and 
the  precious  metals,  rested  on  their  course  to  the 
old  world  ;  and  in  the  small  warehouses  of  Nombre 
de  Dios  were  often  stored  away  precious  cargoes 
worth  many  fortunes. 

It  was  Drake's  purpose  to  capture  Nombre  de 
Dios,  seize  upon  its  treasures,  and  thus  to  deal  at 
once  a  severe  blow  to  Spain  and  enrich  himself 
and  his  comrades.  He  therefore  put  in  at  the 
harbor  of  Point  Pleasant,  not  far  from  the  object 
of  his  intended  attack.    The  "  Pacha  "  and  "  Swan  '* 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  59 

were  quietly  moored  in  this  harbor,  and  Drake  pre- 
pared for  active  operations.  It  happened  very 
luckily  that,  just  as  he  was  on  the  eve  of  setting 
forth  to  the  assault  on  Nombre  de  Dios,  he  espied, 
one  morning,  a  large  sail  making  for  the  harbor ; 
and  was  soon  able  to  descry  the  royal  ensign  of 
England  at  its  mast-head.  The  ship  soon  drew 
alongside  his  own  vessel,  and  proved  to  be  an  Eng- 
lish trader. 

It  did  not  take  long  for  Drake  to  persuade  her 
master  to  join  him  in  his  design.  The  master  was 
excited  by  the  prospect  of  large  gains,  and  his 
men,  of  whom  there  were  about  forty,  heard  of 
Drake's  proposition  with  delight  and  impatience. 

Towards  dusk  the  following  evening,  the  three 
vessels  set  forth  on  their  expedition.  The  sea 
was  as  smooth  as  glass.  The  air  was  still  and  hot. 
The  darkness  which  soon  screened  the  buccaneers 
was  intense.  Under  its  cover,  Drake  could  reckon 
on  approaching  near  to  the  point  of  attack  without 
fear  of  discovery.  He  made  up  his  mind  that  he 
would  creep  along  the  shore  with  his  vessels, 
get  as  near  as  possible  to  Nombre  de  Dios,  and 
then  lie  by  till  morning.  With  the  break  of  dawn 
he  would  deliver  his  assault.     But  he  was  forced 


60  DRAKE : 

to  abandon  this  plan  on  account  of  the  fears  and 

impatience  of  his  men.  They  were  full  of  alarm 
at  the  idea  of  attacking,  in  broad  daylight,  a  place 
which  they  believed  to  be  stoutly  fortified,  and  to 
contain  a  much  more  numerous  force  than  that 
which  now  invaded  it.  The  rise  of  the  moon,  clear 
and  brilliant  in  an  unclouded  sky,  put  an  end  to 
these  fears  and  to  Drake's  hesitation.  The  moon's 
light  would  be  ample  to  guide  the  attack.  Accord-, 
ingly  Drake,  who  could  discern  the  settlement 
lying  in  slumber  along  the  shore,  and  unconscious 
of  the  fate  which  threatened  it,  ordered  his  men  to 
their  oars,  and  disposed  everything  for  action. 

The  assailing  force  consisted  of  about  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  men.  With  these,  Drake  first  cap- 
tured, without  a  struggle,  a  small  fort  on  a  jutting 
point  of  land,  which  served  to  cover  and  protect 
the  town.  Leaving  in  the  fort  a  sufficient  number 
of  men  to  hold  it,  he  effected  a  landing  with  the 
rest  on  one  of  the  quays,  before  the  inhabitants 
had  been  aroused  to  their  danger.  But  in  another 
moment  the  alarm  had  been  given,  and  the 
streets  were  seen  to  be  in  a  state  of  great  com- 
motion. Shouts  rent  the  air  in  every  direction ; 
men    were    seen    hurrying    in   and  out  of    the 


THE   SEA-KING  OF  DEVON.  6l 

houses;  figures  in  outline  under  the  moonlight 
glided  swift  and  terrified  hither  and  thither.  Pres- 
ently the  church  bell  began  to  clang  forth  its  dis- 
mal warning;  and  in  the  places  where  the  few 
Spanish  troops  were  quartered,  drums  were  fran- 
tically beaten. 

Drake  saw  that  no  time  was  to  be  lost.  Form- 
ing his  men  into  close  columns,  he  gave  the  order 
that  they  should  follow  his  lead  as  cautiously  and 
silently  as  possible ;  and  himself  advanced  at  their 
head  toward  the  little  open  square  which  served 
the  town  as  a  market  place.  Their  progress  to 
this  point  was  unresisted.  The  inhabitants  seemed 
bewildered.  They  did  not  at  first  understand  what 
all  the  hubbub  meant. 

When  the  assailants  found  themselves  in  the 
market  place,  Drake,  standing  in  their  midst,  sud- 
denly raised  his  sword.  Then  the  guns  were  fired 
off,  and  the  shrill  trumpets  gave  forth  a  loud  and 
prolonged  blast.  Immediately  these  were  answered 
by  the  trumpets  in  the  fort.  The  Spaniards  had 
now  rallied  in  a  small  group,  and  directed  a  deadly 
volley  from  behind  the  houses  upon  the  party  in 
the  market  square.  To  this  Drake  quickly  re- 
sponded by  ordering  his  archers,  of  whom  he  had 


62  DRAKE : 

a  little  company,  to  direct  their  bows  upon  the 
enemy.  A  shower  of  arrows  scattered  the  Span- 
iards right  and  left.  At  this  instant,  Drake  him- 
self was  severely  wounded  in  the  leg.  Instantly 
recovering  himself,  though  tortured  with  violent 
pain,  he  concealed  his  wound  from  his  men,  and 
with  grim  self-control  continued  giving  his  orders 
and  inciting  the  combat. 

The  market  place  was  now  completely  in  the 
possession  of  the  English,  who  could  not  see  any 
Spaniards  on  either  hand.  Drake,  therefore, 
marched  out  of  the  square,  and  along  the  princi- 
pal street.  A  stray  shot  from  one  of  the  houses 
killed  the  trumpeter.  The  blasts  of  the  trumpet 
had  been  decided  upon  as  a  signal  to  the  English- 
men left  in  the  fort  that  all  went  well  in  the  town. 
When,  therefore,  they  no  longer  heard  the  signal, 
they  were  seized  with  a  panic  ;  and,  believing  that 
Drake  and  his  followers  had  come  to  grief,  fled  in 
all  haste  to  the  ships.  The  fort  was  thus  com- 
pletely deserted. 

Meanwhile  Drake  advanced  boldly  through  the 
town.  He  did  not  so  much  as  limp,  though  his 
wound  tortured  him  almost  beyond  endurance  at 
every  step.     Seeing  one  of  the  inhabitants  who, 


THE   SEA-KING. OF    DEVON.  6$ 

just  roused  from  sleep  and  only  half  awake,  was 
creeping,  with  dazed  face,  out  of  his  house,  Drake 
strode  up  and  seized  him  by  the  collar.  With  a 
stern  threat,  he  ordered  the  astonished  Spaniard 
to  show  him  the  way  to  the  governor  s  house ; 
which  the  prisoner,  in  his  fright,  readily  consented 
to  do.  The  governor's  house  was  a  larger  and 
better  building  than  those  which  surrounded  it. 

On  entering,  Drake  hurriedly  passed  from  room 
to  room,  until  he  came  to  one  where  a  sight,  which 
made  his  eyes  glisten,  met  his  gaze.  There  on  the 
floor  were  piled  a  great  number  of  solid,  heavy 
silver  bars.  His  men  exclaimed  with  delight. 
Here  seemed  to  be  treasure  enough  to  make  every 
man  of  them  rich.  But  one  of  the  more  sober  and 
sedate  of  Drake's  followers,  after  a  pause,  said  : 

"  But  how  can  we  take  these  heavy  bars  to  the 
ships  .>" 

"Nay,"  returned  Drake,  turning  away  with  a 
sigh  of  regret,  "we  must  not  touch  a  single  bar. 
But  come,  my  men,  I  will  lead  you  to  the  royal 
treasury,  where  there  are  stored  gold  and  gems. 
They  may  be  carried  more  easily  than  these  great 
bars  of  silver.  Besides,  the  treasury  is  close  to 
the  shore,  and  therefore  to  the  ships." 


64  DRAKE : 

This  promise  reconciled  the  men  to  leaving  the 
treasure  which  glistened  so  temptingly  at  their 
feet ;  and  they  submissively  followed  their  leader 
out  of  the  house. 

The  captive  Spaniard  was  once  more  brought 
into  service ;  and  Drake,  in  a  rough  voice,  ordered 
him  to  conduct  them  to  the  king's  treasure-house. 
After  traversing  once  more  the  main  street,  and 
descending,  unmolested,  to  a  tall,  gloomy-looking 
building  near  the  quays,  the  Englishmen  eagerly 
rushed  forward  to  the  gates.  But  here  an  unfore- 
seen obstacle  checked  their  entrance.  The  gates 
were  locked  and  bolted.  Every  man  uttered  a  cry 
of  rage  and  dismay. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  6$ 

CHAPTER  V. 

DRAKE  BEHOLDS  THE  PACIFIC. 

RAKE  had  hoped  to  take  the  town  and  to 
capture  his  plunder  by  surprise.  Unfor- 
tunately, he  had  not  known  where  to 
strike  first ;  and  now  perceived,  too  late,  that  his 
first  assault  should  have  been  directed  upon  the 
king's  treasury,  instead  of  the  governor's  house. 
The  Spanish  soldiers  were  more  numerous  than 
his  own  little  force ;  they  were  also  better  armed ; 
and  they  had  now  concentrated  themselves  in  the 
treasure-house,  resolved  to  defend  it  to  the  last. 

But  Drake  was  equally  set  upon  accomplishing 
his  object;  and  quickly  resolved  not  to  abandon 
the  treasure-house  without  a  struggle. 

"My  men!"  he  cried,  as  his  company  stood 
in  close  array  opposite  the  bolted  gate,  "I  have 
brought  you  to  the  mouth  of  the  treasure-house  of 
the  world.  If  ye  gain  not  the  treasure,  none  but 
yourselves  are  to  be  blamed." 

"  We  will  gain  it ! "  replied  the  men,  with  angry 
voices. 


66  DRAKE : 

"Courage,  then!"  retorted  their  commander, 
grasping  his  sword,  and  waving  it  aloft.  "  For  if 
so  bright  an  opportunity  setteth,  it  seldom  riseth 
again !  '* 

With  this  Drake  advanced  to  the  gate,  and 
boldly  examined  it.  He  shook  the  iron  bars  again 
and  again,  but  the  huge  portal  did  not  yield  to  his 
efforts.  His  exertions  were  too  much  for  him.  A 
deathly  pallor  spread  over  his  bronzed  features ; 
his  head  swam,  and  his  body  swayed  a  moment  to 
and  fro.  Then,  with  a  sudden  lurch,  he  fell  heavily 
to  the  ground. 

His  faithful  soldiers  were  filled  with  alarm  on 
seeing  their  captain  thus  overcome.  Several  of 
them  hastened  to  him,  and  on  lifting  his  head,  at 
first  cried  out  that  he  was  no  more.  But  it  soon 
appeared  that  he  had  fainted  from  pain  and  loss  of 
blood.  For  the  first  time  they  discovered  the 
gaping  wound  in  his  leg,  from  which  the  blood 
trickled  slowly  through  the  rent  in  his  breeches. 
He  was  frightfully  pale,  and  had  evidently  lost  a 
great  deal  of  blood ;  and  his  men  bent  anxiously 
over  him,  fearful  lest  he  should  die  from  exhaus- 
tion. Then  one  of  them  tenderly  bound  up  the 
wound,  tearing  off  a  portion  of  his  scarf  for  the 
purpose. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  6f 

Drake  presently  revived,  and  for  a  moment 
looked  about  him  with  a  bewildered  gaze.  Then, 
recollecting  where  he  was,  he  turned  sadly  to  his 
men,  and  said  that  the  attack  upon  the  treasure- 
house  must  be  given  up.  Resting  on  the  shoulders 
of  two  of  his  comrades,  he  slowly  and  painfully 
limped  down  to  the  quay,  which  was  fortunately 
near  by.  Meanwhile,  several  of  the  men  had  run 
for  the  small  boats,  which  speedily  drew  up  where 
Drake  was  waiting.  With  gloomy  faces  and  mut- 
tered imprecations  against  the  Spaniards,  the 
adventurers  slowly  boarded  the  boats.  Drake  was 
laid  carefully  in  one  of  them,  and  in  this  recum- 
bent position  gave  his  orders. 

The  boats  were  first  directed  to  the  little  fort 
which  Drake  had  captured  and  garrisoned  before 
attacking  the  town.  On  reaching  it  several  of  the 
men  entered,  expecting  to  find  their  companions. 
Much  to  their  amazement  and  alarm,  they  found  it 
quite  deserted.  The  rooms  were  solitary,  and  no 
footstep  could  be  heard  in  any  direction.  The 
men  now  saw  that  their  fellow-soldiers  had  left  the 
fort,  and  that  they  had  fled  for  safety  to  the  ships. 

They  lost  no  time  in  apprising  Drake  of  what 
had  happened.     He  knew  that  there  was  no  time 


68  DRAKE : 

to  be  lost ;  for  the  Spaniards,  percemng  tTie  fort 
unoccupied,  might  at  any  moment  put  out  from 
the  quays  and  assail  the  boats.  Drake  accordingly 
ordered  that  the  boats  should  make  with  all  speed 
for  the  ships. 

On  boarding  the  "Pacha"  and  "Swan,"  the 
men  who  had  been  in  the  fort  were  found  safe  and 
sound. 

Drake's  dauntless  spirit  did  not  permit  him  to 
rest  after  the  failure  to  capture  the  treasures  of 
Nombre  de  Dios.  In  spite  of  his  wound,  which 
still  pained  him,  he  began  to  concert  with  his 
officers  what  step  to  take  next.  It  was  resolved 
that  the  expedition  should  not  yet  come  to  an  end, 
but  that  another  attack  should  be  made,  with  as 
little  delay  as  possible,  upon  the  rich  station  of 
Cartagena,  further  along  the  coast.  But  this  pro- 
ject was  destined  to  meet  with  no  better  success 
than  the  first.  As  the  two  ships  were  entering 
the  mouth  of  the  harbor  of  Cartagena,  they  en- 
countered a  large  English  frigate.  Drake  man- 
aged to  communicate  with  this  vessel ;  and  learned 
with  dismay  from  one  of  its  officers  that  a  Spanish 
pinnace  had  shortly  before  gone  into  port,  carrying 
the  news  of  his  approach  to  the  inhabitants  of  the 


THE  SEA-KING  OF  DEVON.  69 

town.  He  had  hoped  to  take  the  place  by  sur- 
prise ;  but  looking  in  the  direction  of  the  town,  he 
saw  that  the  fortress  which  frowned  protectingly 
above  it  was  manned,  and  that  the  Spanish  ships 
were  marshalled  in  hostile  array  in  front  of  the 
quays. 

Drake  could  not  hope  to  successfully  attack  this 
armament,  and  so  gave  up  his  design  to  attempt 
the  capture  of  Cartagena.  He  therefore  turned 
the  prows  of  his  ships  seaward  again.  As  they 
were  sailing  away,  they  encountered  a  large  Span- 
ish ship  coming  in.  The  English  at  once  assailed 
her  with  such  fury  that  after  a  short  conflict  she 
surrendered  to  Drake  at  discretion.  On  the  way 
out,  two  smaller  Spanish  vessels  were  in  like 
manner  captured. 

At  a  safe  distance  from  shore,  Drake  cast 
anchor,  and  considered  what  course  he  should 
take  next.  The  big  Spanish  ship  was  much 
stronger  and  more  seaworthy  than  his  own  little 
vessel,  the  "  Swan " ;  while  his  company  was 
smaller  than  when  he  had  begun  operations.  So 
he  resolved  to  burn  the  "  Swan,**  and  to  make  use 
of  the  Spanish  ship.  Torches  were  set  to  the 
little  vessel,  and  presently  the  flames  shot  up  in 


70  DRAKE : 

the  air,  and  illumined  the  scene  around  with  « 

lurid  glare. 

A  secure  haven  for  the  two  vessels,  the  "  Pacha  " 
and  the  Spanish  ship,  was  speedily  found  at  an 
island  which  lay  near  that  part  of  the  coast,  but  a 
short  distance  from  the  land.  Some  of  Drake's 
men  had  begun  to  murmur  at  their  discomfitures 
and  privations,  and  to  urge  him  to  return  home  to 
England.  But  he  soon  formed  a  plan  which  sub- 
dued their  discontent,  by  once  more  strongly  appeal- 
ing to  their  adventurous  instincts. 

His  study  of  the  coast  and  of  the  operations  of 
the  Spaniards,  with  the  knowledge  he  had  picked 
up  from  English  sailors  and  prisoners,  had  made 
him  familiar  with  the  fact  that  the  treasures  from 
Peru  were  often  carried  overland  across  the  Isth- 
mus of  Darien,  from  one  ocean  to  the  other.  Long 
trains  of  mules,  laden  with  the  spoils  taken  from 
the  dethroned  Incas  and  their  subjects,  were  in  the 
habit  of  traversing  the  hot  and  difficult  route  be- 
tween Panama  and  Nombre  de  Dios.  These  trains 
were  often  guarded  by  a  small  party  of  Spaniards  ; 
who,  with  their  fire-arms,  had  little  to  fear  from  the 
native  Mexicans,  and  who  did  not  look  in  that  re- 
mote region  for  any  European  foes. 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  ft 

To  attack  these  mule  trains,  to  seize  the  treas- 
ures which  they  bore  across  the  country,  and  to 
sail  home  with  the  precious  cargo,  now  formed 
Drake's  bold  design. 

In  preparing  for  this  venture,  Drake  did  not 
neglect  to  acquire  one  advantage  which  he  knew 
to  be  essential  to  his  success.  This  was,  to  secure 
the  alliance  and  aid  of  some  Indian  tribe  on  the 
mainland.  He  accordingly  sent  two  picked  men 
on  shore  to  reconnoitre,  and  if  possible  to  enter 
into  friendly  relations  with  the  natives.  These 
scouts  were  entirely  successful  in  their  errand. 
After  wandering  about  a  little  while,  they  met 
some  Indians  belonging  to  a  tribe  who  lived  a  short 
distance  in  the  interior,  and  who  were  inveterate 
enemies  of  the  Spaniards.  At  first  they  were  shy, 
not  recognizing  the  scouts  as  Englishmen,  but  on 
perceiving  this  to  be  the  fact,  they  soon  became 
confident  and  communicative.  The  two  scouts 
were  conducted  to  the  chief  of  the  tribe ;  and 
found  him  only  too  eager  to  join  in  any  undertak- 
ing directed  against  his  Spanish  foes.  He  treated 
the  scouts  with  cordial  hospitality,  and  sent  them 
away  with  provisions,  and  with  a  message  that 
seventeen  hundred  Indians  were  at  Drake's  disposal 


72  drake: 

This  was  better  fortune  than  Drake  had  dared 
to  hope  for.  His  wound  had  now  nearly  healed ; 
and  so  delighted  was  he  at  the  news  brought  by 
the  scouts,  that  he  resolved  to  go  on  shore  himself, 
and  see  the  friendly  chief.  He  found  that  the  tribe 
was  that  of  the  Symerons,  and  that  they  had  suf- 
fered many  barbarous  cruelties  at  the  hands  of 
the  Spaniards.  Some  of  the  tribe  had  been  made 
slaves  by  the  Spaniards,  and  had  escaped  from 
their  clutches.  Drake  was  welcomed  as  a  friend, 
and  almost  as  a  deliverer.  It  did  not  take  long  for 
him  and  the  chief  of  the  Symerons  to  perfect  a  plan 
for  advancing  into  the  interior  of  the  Isthmus  and 
attacking  the  mule  trains. 

The  expedition  consisted  of  about  one  hundred 
Englishmen  and  three  or  four  hundred  Indians. 
For  several  days  they  marched  through  the  coun- 
try without  meeting  any  caravan.  At  last  a  train 
appeared  in  sight.  Drake  prepared  to  surprise  it 
by  lying  in  ambush ;  but  something  gave  warning 
to  the  conductors  of  the  trains,  who  all  of  a  sudden 
turned  their  mules  obliquely  into  the  woods,  and 
whipping  them  savagely,  got  them  safely  away. 

The  adventurers  passed  on  their  march,  full  of 
rage  at   this    disappointment;    but  their  spirits 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  73 

soon  revived  again.  One  morning,  the  company 
slowly  ascended  a  lofty  hill.  Its  sides  were  cov- 
ered with  the  luxuriant  foliage  of  the  tropics ;  its 
ascents  were  often  steep,  and  at  times  almost  im- 
possible to  scramble  up.  Nearer  the  summit,  a 
forest  of  huge  trees  loomed,  and  the  advance  be- 
neath these  proved  easy  and  pleasant.  The  faith- 
ful Indians,  familiar  with  the  tortuous  paths,  led  the 
way,  and  on  reaching  the  top,  gave  a  great  shout 
This  was  to  encourage  the  Englishmen,  who,  reek- 
ing with  perspiration,  were  toiling  up  the  spur  of 
the  hill. 

"On  the  twelfth  day,"  relates  one  of  Drake's 
companions  in  this  expedition,  "we  came  to  the 
height  of  the  desired  hill  (lying  east  and  west,  like 
a  ridge  between  the  two  seas)  about  ten  o'clock ; 
when  the  chiefest  of  the  Symerons  took  our  captain 
(Drake)  by  the  hand,  and  prayed  him  to  follow 
him.  Here  was  that  goodly  and  great  high  tree 
in  which  they  had  cut  and  made  divers  steps  to 
ascend  to  the  top;  where  they  had  made  a  con- 
Venient  bower  or  arbor  wherein  ten  or  twelve  men 
might  easily  sit.  And  from  thence  we  beheld  the 
Atlantic  Ocean,  from  whence  we  came,  and  the  South 
Atlantic  so  much  desired.   South  and  north  of  this 


74  PRAKE : 

tree  they  had  felled  certain  trees,  that  the  prospect 
might  be  the  clearer.  After  our  captain  had  as- 
cended this  bower  with  the  chief  Symeron,  and 
having  (as  it  pleased  God  at  this  time  by  reason  of 
the  breeze)  a  very  fair  day ;  and  after  he  had  seen 
that  sea  of  which  he  had  heard  such  golden  reports, 
he  besought  of  Almighty  God  in  his  goodness,  to 
give  him  life  and  heart  to  sail  once  in  an  English 
ship  in  that  sea ;  and  then,  calling  up  all  the  rest 
of  our  men,  he  acquainted  John  Oxnam  especially 
with  this  his  petition  and  purpose,  if  it  should 
please  God  to  grant  him  that  happiness."  Thus 
Drake's  eyes  beheld,  for  the  first  time,  in  the  dim 
distance,  the  smooth  and  sunny  waters  of  the 
Pacific,  as  Balboa  had  done  many  years  before. 

This  view  of  the  Pacific  excited  Drake  to  an 
exalted  pitch  of  enthusiasm  and  ambition.  He 
felt  that  his  mind  would  know  no  rest  till  he  had 
explored  that  vast  and  mysterious  expanse ;  until 
the  pennons  of  the  Maiden  Queen  floated  above 
those  billows,  on  whose  surface  had  hitherto  only 
been  reflected  the  arms  of  Spain  and  Portugal. 
He  gazed  long  and  with  flushed  cheeks  over  the 
waves  glittering  in  the  meridian  sun,  and  lingered 
for  several  hours  in  the  arbor  at  the  top  of  the 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  7$ 

giant  tree.  Then,  expressing  as  best  he  could  his 
gratitude  to  the  friendly  chief  who  had  conducted 
him  thither,  he  slowly  descended  from  the  tree, 
followed  by  his  men. 

As  he  trudged  along  at  the  head  of  his  adven- 
turous company,  with  his  brother,  John  Drake,  at 
his  side,  the  captain  talked  excitedly  about  the 
project  of  a  Pacific  expedition,  which  was  already         : 
forming  itself   in  his   active  brain.     Schemes  of         i 
adventure  and  conquest,  of  acquiring  wealth  un-         5 
told,  of  attaining  unheard-of  glories  for  England,  ? 

and  of  humiliating  proud  Spain  in  the  dust,  fired 
his  fancy,  and  gave  buoyancy  to  every  step  and 
movement. 

In  no  long  time  after  this  thrilling  glimpse  of 
the  Pacific,  the  Indian  chief  told  Drake  that  they 
were  almost  in  sight  of  Panama.  Drake's  thoughts 
at  once  reverted  to  the  capture  of  the  mule  cara- 
vans ;  and  his  approach  to  the  principal  Spanish 
port  on  the  Pacific  side  of  the  Isthmus  warned  him 
that  he  must  now  proceed  with  great  prudence. 
Halting,  therefore,  in  a  thick  grove  a  mile  or  two 
from  Panama,  he  asked  the  chief  to  send  forward 
some  of  his  Indians  to  reconnoitre,  and  find  out 
what  was  going  forward.     Three  of  the  Indians 


76  DRAKE : 

therefore  disguised  themselves  in  the  attire  of  a 
tribe  which  was  known  to  be  friendly  to  the  Span- 
iards, and  advanced  boldly  to  the  fortifications. 
They  were  admitted  into  Panama  without  difficulty, 
and  lost  no  time  in  fulfilling  their  errand.  Prowl- 
ing about  the  streets,  and  talking  with  the  Indians 
they  chanced  upon,  they  discovered  something 
which  caused  them  to  hasten  back  to  the  hidden 
camp  with  all  speed. 

Running  into  Drake's  camp,  they  told  him  that 
a  fine  chance  for  plunder  would  offer  itself  that 
very  evening.  The  treasurer  of  Lima,  the  capital 
of  Peru,  was  on  the  point  of  setting  out  for  Nom- 
bre  de  Dios.  With  him  were  to  go  nine  mules, 
laden  with  a  precious  burden  of  gold  and  jewels. 
Drake  was  rejoiced  at  this  news  ;  and  at  once  sum- 
moning his  men,  apprised  them  of  the  stroke  which 
good  luck  had  in  store  for  them.  Then,  as  he 
began  to  reflect  more  coolly  upon  the  event,  he 
made  a  deliberate  scheme  of  attack.  He  formed 
his  force  into  two  companies,  and  marched  with 
them  several  miles  in  retreat,  on  the  road  to  Nom- 
bre  de  Dios  over  which  they  had  just  come.  In  a 
short  time  they  reached  a  plain  which,  while  bor- 
dered and  screened  by  dense  woods,  was  covered 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  JJ 

With  very  high,  waving  grass.  Here  he  took  his 
stand,  sending  scouts  back  to  watch  for  and  warn 
him  of  the  approach  of  the  expected  mule-train. 
Less  than  an  hour  had  passed  when  the  scouts 
returned,  and  told  him  that  the  train  was  in  sight 
at  some  distance  away  on  the  road. 

Drake  at  once  ordered  his  men  to  lie  in  rows, 
fiat  on  their  stomachs,  in  the  high  grass.  Pres- 
ently the  tinkling  of  belVs  apprised  him  that  the 
mules  were  very  near.  Raising  his  head  above  the 
grass  so  as  to  see  them,  he  discovered,  to  his  sur- 
prise, that  not  only  was  the  treasurer's  mule-train 
in  plain  sight,  but  that  another  mule-train,  coming 
in  the  opposite  direction,  and  going  towards  Pa- 
nama, was  also  in  view.  For  a  moment  he  was 
sadly  perplexed  what  to  do.  The  second  mule- 
train  came  opposite  the  ambuscade  first;  and 
Drake  whispered  to  his  men  not  to  molest  it. 
This  having  passed  in  safety,  the  treasurer's  mules 
were  advancing  straight  into  the  trap  set  for  them, 
when  an  incident  occurred  which  threw  Drake's 
design  into  complete  confusion.  One  of  his  men 
had  spent  his  time  in  the  grass  drinking;  and, 
having  become  grossly  intoxicated,  jumped  up  and 
waved  his  arms  just  at  the  critical  moment.    Tha 


78  DRAKE : 

treasurer's  train  was  preceded  by  a  small  cavalcade, 
who  acted  as  its  guard.  The  foremost  of  the 
horsemen  perceived  the  drunken  man,  and  at  once 
guessed  why  he  was  there.  He  instantly  whirled 
his  horse  around,  and  gave  the  treasurer  warning 
of  his  danger.  The  mule-train  was  quickly  turned 
the  other  way,  its  rear  being  protected  by  the 
cavalcade  ;  and,  before  Drake  could  rally  his  force 
and  make  an  attack,  the  fugitives  were  in  full 
flight  on  the  road  back  to  Panama.  Drake's  rage 
and  mortification  may  be  imagined.  He  ordered 
the  drunken  man  to  be  seized  and  soundly  whipped ; 
and  with  gloomy  face  prepared  to  return  in  despair 
to  Nombre  de  Dios. 

An  unexpected  stroke  of  good  fortune,  however, 
awaited  him.  As  the  company  was  getting  ready 
to  resume  its  march,  a  tinkling  of  bells  in  the  dis- 
tance struck  upon  the  captain's  ear.  Once  more 
he  ordered  the  men  to  lie  low  in  the  grass ;  and, 
straining  his  eyes  in  the  direction  whence  the 
tinkling  proceeded,  saw  with  joy  that  another 
mule-train  was  approaching  from  the  direction  of 
Panama.  It  had  evidently  not  encountered  the 
treasurer's  caravan ;  for  it  advanced  boldly,  as  if 
suspecting  nothing.     When  the  train  had  reached 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  79 

the  spot  where  Drake  and  his.  comrades  were  con- 
cealed, the  latter  suddenly  pounced  upon  it,  and  in 
ten  minutes  had  captured  the  entire  escort. 

The  mules  were  quickly  stripped  of  their  bur- 
dens, and  the  heavy  bags  were  greedily  torn  open. 
They  proved  to  contain  a  considerable  treasure  of 
gold  and  gems ;  and  now  the  disappointment  of 
the  English  was  turned  into  uproarious  rejoicing. 
They  danced  about  the  mules,  and  embraced  each 
other,  and  shouted  till  their  rough  voices  echoed 
again.  The  spoils  were,  indeed,  so  heavy,  that 
Drake  and  his  men  could  not  carry  them  all  away. 
Loading  themselves  with  as  much  as  they  could 
take  with  them,  they  caused  the  Indians  to  dig  a 
deep  pit ;  and  in  this  the  remaining  treasure  was 
buried.  A  cross  was  put  up  to  mark  the  spot,  so 
that  the  men  might  afterwards  return  and  bring  it 
to  the  ships. 

Drake  now  ordered  an  immediate  retreat  to  the 
east  coast;  and,  burdened  with  their  spoils,  the 
company  made  such  haste  as  they  could  back  to 
the  ships. 

No  sooner  had  the  coast  been  reached,  than 
Drake  despatched  a  party  of  men  back  to  obtain 
the  buried  treasure.     On  arriving  at  the  pit,  they 


80  DRAKE : 

found,  to  their  amazement,  that  it  had  been  dug 
out,  and  that  the  booty  had  disappeared.  An 
Indian,  who  chanced  to  see  them,  told  them  that 
one  of  the  EngHshmen  had  loitered  behind,  in 
order  to  get  some  of  the  treasure  and  conceal  it  on 
his  own  account.  He  had  been  captured  by  the 
Spaniards,  and  put  to  the  torture  ;  whereupon  he  had 
confessed  to  them  where  the  treasure  was  hidden. 
The  Spaniards  then  went  to  the  pit,  and  took  it 
away.  The  party  returned  crestfallen,  and  told 
their  news  to  Drake ;  who,  in  a  rage,  ordered  that 
if  the  treacherous  Englishman  should  again  make 
his  appearance,  he  should  be  executed  on  the  spot. 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  8 1 

CHAPTER  VI. 

DRAKE   IN   IRELAND. 

HILE  awaiting  the  men  who  had  gone  to 
recover  the  buried  treasure,  Drake  had 
not  been  idle.  With  his  mind  bent  on 
plunder, — for  it  must  be  confessed  that  this  bold 
buccaneer,  following  the  custom  and  morals  of  his 
time,  was  no  better  than  a  robber  on  a  large 
scale,  —  he  cast  about  for  some  tempting  point 
of  attack.  The  Indians  told  him  of  a  town  on  the 
coast.  Vera  Cruz,  which,  like  Nombre  de  Dios,  was 
a  way  station  and  depot  for  the  stowing  of  goods 
and  the  convenience  of  travellers.  Here  he  might 
hope  to  obtain  booty,  and  replenish  his  nearly  ex- 
hausted stores  of  provisions. 

He  accordingly  set  forth  one  morning,  with  the 
force  still  remaining  to  him,  and  advanced  upon 
Vera  Cruz.  He  at  once  attacked  the  town,  which 
proved  to  be  but  feebly  defended ;  and,  upon  en- 
tering its  irregular  and  scantly  built  streets,  he 
and  his  men  eagerly  searched  for  valuable  objects. 
But,  to  their  intense  disappointment,  they  found 


82  DRAKE : 

neither  gold,  silver  nor  jewels.  Only  ordinary 
bales  and  boxes  of  merchandise,  too  bulky  for  them 
to  hope  to  carry  away,  rewarded  their  efforts.  In 
their  anger,  the  Englishmen  killed  six  or  seven  of 
the  merchants,  who  in  vain  tried  to  escape  them. 
The  only  booty  they  could  seize  which  was  any 
use  to  them,  consisted  of  a  good  supply  of  victuals. 
After  having  ruthlessly  and  wantonly  destroyed  a 
large  portion  of  the  goods  stowed  in  the  town,  they 
marched  away  again. 

Despite  all  this  cruel,  relentless  robbery,  Drake 
sometimes  showed  that  he  could  be  generous  and 
large-hearted.  The  friendly  Indians,  the  Symerons, 
entertained  him  with  profuse  generosity  on  his 
return  to  the  east  coast.  The  chief  was  delighted 
to  find  in  him  so  sturdy  a  foe  to  the  perfidious 
Spaniards ;  and  was  grateful  for  the  fairness  with 
which  Drake  had  from  first  to  last  treated  his 
tribe.  This  chief  had  often  admired  the  long  and 
beautifully  ornamented  cutlass  which  Drake  always 
wore  in  his  belt;  and  many  times  expressed,  in 
his  peculiar  way,  his  longing  to  possess  it.  One 
day,  Drake  entered  the  chief's  tent,  and  pulling 
out  the  cutlass,  gave  it  to  him,  and  told  him  that 
he  might  keep  it.    The  Indian  was  beside  himself 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  83 

with  joy.  He  leaped  up  and  down,  with  many  grim 
aces,  and,  holding  the  cutlass  in  his  hand,  ran  from 
one  tent  to  another,  displaying  it  to  his  Indian 
subjects.  Then  he  fastened  it  at  his  waist,  and 
strutted  up  and  down  as  if  he  were  the  proudest 
man  in  the  world.  His  gratitude  soon  betrayed 
itself  in  a  more  substantial  way.  He  ordered  his 
Indians  to  take  four  heavy  wedges  of  solid  gold, 
and  deposit  them  at  Drake's  feet.  The  gold  would 
have  bought  the  cutlass  several  hundred  times 
over ;  and  Drake  was  as  pleased  with  his  present 
as  the  chief  had  been  with  the  weapon.  But  he 
showed  himself  too  generous  to  keep  the  gold  him- 
self, as  he  might  have  done.  He  ordered  that  its 
value  should  be  added  to  the  common  stock,  and 
divided  among  his  faithful  comrades. 

"I  think  it  but  just,"  said  he,  "that  such  as 
have  borne  the  charge  of  so  uncertain  a  voyage  for 
my  credit,  should  have  the  utmost  advantage  that 
the  voyage  produces." 

The  return  of  the  men  from  the  pit  where  the 
treasure  had  been  hid,  and  whence  it  had  been 
taken  from  the  Spaniards,  decided  Drake  to  take 
to  his  ships,  and  to  return  homeward. 

He  therefore  broke  up  his  camp,  and  marched 


84  DRAKE : 

along  the  shore  until  he  came  opposite  the  island 
where  he  had  left  the  ships.  To  his  amazement, 
they  were  nowhere  to  be  seen.  What  could  have 
become  of  them  ?  He  had  left  orders  that  they 
should  remain  at  the  island  until  his  return,  and 
that  they  should  on  no  account  move  away  from  it. 
His  heart  was  full  of  alarm  and  misgiving,  and  his 
men  shared  his  gloomy  forebodings. 

To  add  to  their  distress,  some  Indians  came  run- 
ning up,  and  told  them  that  a  party  of  Spaniards 
had  been  seen  in  the  interior,  advancing  to  the 
spot  where  the  English  now  were  ;  and  almost  at 
the  same  moment,  seven  large  Spanish  vessels, 
which  seemed  to  be  on  the  watch,  showed  their 
sails  at  a  distance  of  several  miles  out  at  sea. 
The  adventurers  were  in  great  peril,  and  were 
driven  to  desperate  extremities. 

Drake  discussed  their  position  as  calmly  as  he 
could  with  his  chief  officers.  Should  they  plunge 
into  the  woods,  and  trust  to  the  aid  of  the  friendly 
Indians,  to  defend  them  from  the  attack  of  the 
enemy  ?  Or  should  they  try  to  find  the  ships  and 
gain  them  before  the  Spanish  fleet  came  up.? 
There  was  no  time  to  be  lost ;  they  must  decide 
quickly.     To  fly  into  the  interior  was,  perhaps,  to 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  S$ 

suffer  from  starvation,  and  probably,  at  the  best, 
to  be  overcome  by  the  greatly  superior  numbers  of 
the  Spanish;  and,  if  they  fell  into  the  hands  of 
their  foes,  they  might  expect  no  mercy  whatever. 

At  last  it  was  resolved  at  all  hazards  to  try  to 
reach  the  ships.  In  order  to  do  this,  they  must 
trust  themselves  to  the  sea,  and,  in  constant  peril 
from  the  Spanish  squadron,  search  up  and  down 
the  vague  and  limitless  waters.  But  they  could 
not  trust  themselves  to  the  sea  in  the  frail 
canoes  of  the  Indians,  which  seemed  their  only 
resource. 

While  Drake  was  pondering  upon  this  obstacle, 
he  happened  to  look  towards  the  river,  on  the  bor- 
ders of  which  the  party  were  resting.  He  saw 
some  large  trees  floating  down  its  current,  and  en- 
tangling themselves  in  the  rushes  along  the  river 
bank.  An  idea  at  once  flashed  upon  his  mind. 
Turning  to  his  comrades,  he  said,  eagerly  : 

"Do  you  see  those  big  trees,  caught  in  the 
bushes.?  Heaven  surely  sent  them  to  us.  We 
will  haul  them  up,  and  make  a  raft.  Some  of  us 
will  put  to  sea  on  it,  find  the  ships,  and  come  back 
for  the  rest." 

It  was  no  sooner  said  than  three  or  four  men 


S6  DRAKE  : 

sprang  to  their  feet,  and  ran  towards  the  trees. 
They  were  ere  long  sufficiently  drawn  up  to  be  con- 
veniently reached.  In  less  than  an  hour  they  had 
been  converted  into  a  stout  raft.  The  men  cut 
down  some  smaller  trees,  and  with  their  hatchets 
carved  out  two  rude  oars  and  a  rudder.  Then, 
taking  a  large  sack  which  had  contained  biscuits, 
they  framed  it  as  best  they  could  into  the  shape  of 
a  sail.  Planting  this  on  a  pole  in  the  centre  of 
the  raft,  they  returned  to  Drake,  and  told  him  it 
was  ready. 

Drake  selected  three  or  four  of  the  strongest 
men,  and  told  them  that  they  should  go  with  him 
on  the  raft  in  search  of  the  ships.  He  ordered  the 
rest  of  the  company  to  remain  concealed  as  near  as 
possible  to  the  spot  on  which  they  now  were.  He 
would  surely  return,  and  that  soon.  Meanwhile, 
the  faithful  Indians  would  help  them  to  resist  any 
attack  which  the  Spaniards  might  make. 

Then,  mounting  the  raft,  and  pushing  it  out  into 
the  centre  of  the  river,  he  waved  an  adieu  to  his 
comrades  on  shore,  and  found  himself  rapidly  glid- 
ing towards  the  sea.  The  oarsmen  plied  their  oars, 
and  the  rude  sail  proved  to  serve  its  purpose  well ; 
but  so  hastily  had  the  raft  been  constructed,  that 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  8; 

sometimes  Drake  and  his  companions  found  them- 
selves up  to  their  waists  in  the  water.  As  long, 
however,  as  they  could  keep  afloat,  they  did.  not 
lose  heart.  They  first  made  for  the  island  where 
they  had  left  the  ships  ;  but,  on  passing  around  it, 
they  could  see  nowhere  any  signs  of  them.  Then 
they  paddled  out  into  the  open  again,  and  were 
about  to  give  up  the  search  in  despair,  and  return 
to  their  comrades  again,  when  Drake  espied  an- 
other small  island,  a  mile  or  two  away.  On  ap- 
proaching this,  he  dimly  saw  a  sail  peeping  above 
a  small  promontory.  Was  it  an  English  or  Span- 
ish sail }  Paddling  nearer  and  nearer,  he  became 
more  and  more  convinced  that  it  belonged  to  one 
of  his  own  ships.  He  resolved  to  stake  all  upon 
the  conjecture,  and  boldly  bore  his  raft  down  upon 
the  island. 

There,  nestled  in  a  cozy  and  well-hidden  harbor 
were  to  be  seen  the  "  Pacha  "  and  her  sister  ves- 
sel. Drake  joyfully  mounted  once  more  to  the 
deck  of  his  gallant  little  flag-ship,  and  embraced  the 
officers.  Then  it  appeared  that  the  ships,  perceiv«. 
ing  the  Spanish  squadron,  and  fearing  to  be  discov, 
ered  and  captured,  had  sought  refuge  in  this  more 
secure  retreat.     Without  delay  they  weighed  an* 


SS  DRAKE : 

chor,  and  were  soon  sailing  fast  towards  the  shore 
where  the  rest  of  the  adventurers  were  awaiting 
them  with  feverish  impatience. 

There  was  much  rejoicing  when  the  men  found 
themselves  once  more  together,  and  ready  now  to 
set  sail  for  merry  England.  Nearly  a  year  had 
elapsed  since  their  departure  from  Plymouth,  and 
they  were  eager  to  see  their  families,  and  to  rejoice 
their  hearts  with  the  booty  they  had  taken.  The 
booty  was  stored  away  in  the  holds,  and  the 
friendly  Indians  were  warmly  embraced  and  bid- 
den adieu.  Then  the  ships  sailed  forth,  and 
directed  their  course  as  straight  as  possible  across 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico.  It  was  well  that  they  had  set 
sail  when  they  did ;  "  for,"  as  one  of  the  adven- 
turers relates,  "  they  had  not  been  half  an  hour  on 
board  when  there  came  to  the  seaside  above  three 
hundred  Spanish  soldiers,  who  were  sent  on  pur- 
pose to  take  them ;  but  God  suffered  Drake  to 
escape  their  hands,  to  be  a  further  plague  unto  the 
Spaniards." 

The  homeward  voyage  was  unusually  prosperous. 
In  twenty-three  days  after  setting  forth,  the  ships 
anchored  at  the  Scilly  Islands.  This  was  the 
quickest  passage  which  had  yet  been  made  across 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  89 

the  Atlantic ;  and  amply  proved  Drake's  genius  as 
a  navigator. 

It  was  on  Sunday  the  9th  of  August,  1573,  that 
the  weather-beaten  ships  made  their  entrance  into 
Plymouth  harbor.  The  sight  of  the  familiar  gray 
cliffs,  rising  in  perpendicular  masses  above  the 
boisterous  EngHsh  Channel,  made  the  hearts  of  the 
adventurers  beat  with  delight.  Flags  and  pen- 
nons were  run  up  to  the  mastheads.  Trumpets 
were  sounded,  and  the  drums  beat  with  rattling 
sound ;  and  as  the  ships  at  last  cast  anchor,  greet- 
ings passed  between  the  voyagers  and  the  crowd 
of  friends  who  had  gathered  on  the  quay  to  wel- 
come them  home. 

The  news  of  their  arrival  soon  spread  through 
the  town.  Drake  was  now  a  famous  man,  and  his 
expedition  had  been  known  and  watched  through- 
out England.  It  so  happened  that  his  ships 
reached  Plymouth  while  services  were  going  on  in 
the  churches.  The  event  was  whispered  through 
the  congregations,  and  **few  or  no  people  re- 
mained with  the  preacher;  all  running  out  to 
observe  the  blessing  of  God  upon  the  dangerous 
adventures  of  the  captain,  who  had  spent  one  year, 
two  months  and  some  odd  days  on  this  voyage." 


\ 


90  DRAKE : 

Drake  hastened  to  embrace  the  members  of  his 
family,  and  to  take  the  rest  needful  after  so  much 
exposure  and  so  rough  an  existence ;  while  his 
men,  in  like  manner,  scattered  to  their  several 
homes. 

But  Drake  could  not  remain  long  in  idleness  and 
luxury.  Ever  since  the  day  on  which  he  had 
gazed  so  intently  upon  the  waters  of  the  Pacific, 
he  had  cherished  the  ardent  ambition  to  plough  its 
waters  with  English  keels.  On  his  homeward 
voyage,  he  had  continually  indulged  the  glowing 
fancy ;  and  he  had  been  impatient  to  find  himself 
once  more  on  English  shores,  that  he  might  set 
about  accomplishing  the  purpose  he  now  had  at 
heart. 

After  a  short  sojourn  at  Plymouth,  therefore,  the 
mdefatigable  mariner  embarked  on  a  coastwise 
vessel  for  London.  In  the  capital,  whither  the 
renown  of  his  deeds  had  preceded  him,  and  where 
he  was  sure  to  meet  with  a  lordly  welcome,  he 
might  hope  to  receive  encouragement  in  pursuing 
his  audacious  project.  His  reception  among  the 
great  men  was  all  that  he  could  desire.  He  was 
honored  and  feted,  and  on  every  hand  he  heard 
echoed  the  praises  of  his  patriotism  and  daring. 


THE   SEA-KING    OF   DEVON.  Ql 

But,  although  the  attitude  of  England  towards 
Spain  was  hostile,  open  war  had  not  yet  broken 
out  between  the  two  countries;  and  just  at  the 
time  of  Drake's  return.  Queen  Elizabeth  was  cher- 
ishing hopes  that  peace  might  still  be  preserved. 
Drake  even  found  that  his  sovereign  did  not  wholly 
approve  of  his  expedition  to  Mexico  ;  that  she 
thought  it  rash  and  unwise.  In  short,  he  soon 
discovered  that  he  was  not  in  favor  at  the  royal 
court;  and,  as  such  was  the  state  of  affairs,  he 
deemed  it  best  not  to  announce  at  present  his  plan 
of  navigating  the  Pacific.  His  restless  spirit,  how- 
ever, would  not  brook  indolence  ;  and  no  sooner  did 
he  find  himself  obliged  to  postpone  his  darling 
project,  than  he  cast  about  for  some  other  outlet 
for  his  active  and  enterprising  temper. 

It  so  happened  that  a  fierce  rebellion  had  not 
long  before  broken  out  in  Ireland.  The  chiefs  of 
Ulster  and  Connaught,  never  tamed  to  English 
rule,  thought  they  saw  a  chance,  amid  the  furious 
contentions  and  rivalries  of  Elizabeth's  court,  to 
win  independence  for  their  oppressed  land.  Eng- 
lish troops  had  been  sent  to  the  subject  island  in 
all  haste ;  and  these  were  under  the  command  of 
Walter  Devereux,  Earl  of  Essex,  the  father  of  the 


92  DRAKE : 

ill-fated  young  man  of  the  same  title  who  after, 
wards  became  Elizabeth's  favorite.  In  the  war- 
fare  of  those  days,  it  was  customary  for  any  one 
who  chose  to  organize  an  expedition,  and  take  part 
in  the  martial  conflicts  as  a  volunteer.  Drake  was 
now  a  rich  man.  His  share  of  the  plunder  taken  in 
America  not  only  placed  him  above  want,  but  left 
at  his  disposal  a  large  amount,  which  he  could 
devote  to  any  venture  on  which  he  chose  to 
enter.  Full  of  warlike  ardor,  and  ripe  in  warlike 
experience,  he  eagerly  caught  at  the  idea  of  win- 
ning new  laurels  and  gaining  the  friendship  of  the 
court,  by  aiding  in  the  suppression  of  the  Irish 
rebellion. 

He  fitted  out  three  large  frigates,  supplied  them 
with  an  armament,  and  sailed  for  Ireland.  Gaining 
access  to  the  Earl  of  Essex,  he  offered  him  his 
frigates,  his  men,  and  his  own  services.  They  were 
accepted ;  and  Drake,  appointed  to  the  command 
of  his  expedition,  set  forth  to  begin  active  opera- 
tions. In  many  a  battle  and  skirmish  he  proved 
himself  not  only  a  valiant,  but  a  skilful  and  deter^ 
mined  warrior ;  and  his  military  fame  waxed 
almost  as  bright  as  his  naval  renown. 

It  was  while  engaged  in  this  war  that  Drake  be* 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  93 

came  acquainted  with  a  man  who  was  destined  to 
do  him  a  signal  service.  This  was  an  officer  of  the 
EngHsh  army  named  Thomas  Doughty.  Im- 
pressed with  Drake's  strong  and  sturdy  traits, 
Doughty  grew  to  be  his  devoted  friend.  Often,  in 
bivouac  together,  Drake  told  him  of  his  adventures 
and  escapes  in  the  barbarous  wilds  of  Central 
America,  and  confided  to  him  his  dream  of  sail- 
ing in  the  Pacific.  Doughty  listened  with  rapt  at- 
tention, and  was  aroused  to  enthusiasm  by  Drake's 
great  project. 

The  Irish  were,  after  an  obstinate  resistance, 
completely  subdued,  and  then  Drake  and  Doughty 
returned  to  England.  As  soon  as  they  had  reached 
London,  Doughty  told  his  companion  that  he 
would  introduce  him  to  a  man  who  could,  if  he 
choose,  smooth  away  the  obstacles  to  the  Pacific 
expedition.  This  was  no  less  a  person  than  Sir 
Christopher  Hatton,  at  that  time  Queen  Elizabeth's 
most  favored  courtier  and  counsellor.  Hatton's 
influence  was  great  at  the  royal  court,  and  was 
supreme  with  the  sovereign.  If  Hatton  could 
be  interested  in  the  scheme,  it  would  surely  be 
successful. 

During  these  events,  nearly  four  years  had  passed 


94  DRAKE : 

since  Drake*s  return  from  Central  America.  He 
was  now  in  the  full  prime  of  his  manhood,  being 
about  thirty-eight  years  of  age  ;  while  his  fame  was 
still  bright  in  the  minds  of  his  countrymen. 

Doughty  very  soon  afterwards  found  an  excellent 
chance  of  presenting  the  naval  hero  to  the  celebrated 
courtier.  Sir  Christopher  Hatton  received  his 
visitor  with  a  warm  welcome,  and  asked  him  many 
questions  about  his  voyages.  He  was  pleased  with 
Drake's  frank,  blunt  bearing  and  homely  ways  ; 
and  when  the  important  subject  of  the  Pacific  ven- 
ture was  proposed  to  him,  Hatton  entered  into  it 
with  cordial  sympathy.  He  promised  to  lay  it 
before  the  Queen  herself,  and  almost  promised  her 
approval  beforehand. 

A  day  or  two  after,  Drake  was  summoned  into 
the  Queen's  presence.  She  was  surrounded  by 
her  court,  and  the  rough  sailor  was  dazzled  by  its 
splendor.  Elizabeth  smiled  and  bowed  her  head 
at  him,  and  treated  him  with  marked  distinction. 
Commanding  him  to  approach,  she  rose  from  her 
seat,  and  taking  a  magnificent  sword  from  an 
attendant  who  stood  by,  she  thus  addressed  him :  — 

"  Receive  this  sword,  Francis  Drake  ;  and  wear 
it  till  we  require  it  of  thee.     And  we  do  account, 


Drake  Before  Queen  Elizabeth. —  Page  94. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  95 

Drake,  that  he  who  striketh  at  thee,  striketh  at 
us." 

By  this,  she  made  him  understand  that  she 
took  him  into  her  favor,  and  accepted  him  in  her 
service.  He  knew  at  once  that  Hatton  had  made 
his  influence  felt ;  and  that  the  only  obstacle  in 
the  way  of  his  own  cherished  ambition  —  the 
absence  of  the  royal  sanction  —  no  longer  ex- 
isted. 

He  retired  from  the  brilliant  scene  with  a 
heart  swelling  high  with  exultation  and  hope. 
After  that,  Sir  Christopher  Hatton  became  Drake's 
intimate  friend  as  well  as  his  powerful  protector ; 
and  as  the  sunshine  of  royal  favor  now  shone  upon 
him,  Drake  received  also  in  abundance  the  rays  of 
those  lesser  lights,  the  stars  in  the  firmament  of 
the  court.  He  had  now  only  to  make  all  haste  to 
organize  his  fleet,  and  to  sail  away  toward  the 
setting  sun. 


96  Dt{AK£ 


CHAPTER  VII. 

BOUND   FOR  THE   PACIFIC. 


RAKE  began  his  preparations,  not  only 
with  despatch,  but  in  the  utmost  secrecy. 
His  project  was  only  known  to  a  few  of 
the  courtiers  and  to  his  most  familiar  adherents.  It 
was  necessary  that  Spain  should  not  suspect  the 
object  or  the  destination  of  the  fleet ;  and,  besides, 
Drake  was  anxious  that  no  other  navigator  should 
get  wind  of  his  project,  and  take  advantage  of  it  to 
precede  him  to  the  Pacific.  He  even  concealed 
his  destination  from  the  crews  whom  he  enlisted ; 
nor  did  they  know  or  suspect  whither  they  were 
bound,  until  they  had  been  some  days  at  sea. 

The  rendezvous  of  the  fleet  which  Drake  busied 
himself  with  collecting  and  equipping,  was  the 
familiar  harbor  of  Plymouth.  In  no  long  time, 
five  goodly  vessels  were  moored  in  the  placid 
waters  of  its  sound.  These  were  the  "  Pelican," 
better  known  as  the  "  Golden  Hind,"  of  one  hun- 
dred tons  burden,  commanded  by  Drake  himself ; 
the  "Elizabeth,"  of    eighty   tons    burden,  John 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  97 

Winter,  captain;  the  "Marigold,"  thirty  tons, 
John  Thomas,  captain ;  the  "  Swan,"  fifty  tons, 
John  Chester,  captain  ;  and  the  **  Christopher," 
fifteen  tons,  Thomas  Moon,  captain.  A  small 
pinnace,  the  "  Benedict,"  went  in  company  with 
the  flag-ship,  the  **  Golden  Hind."  Besides  these 
vessels  themselves,  Drake  caused  to  be  put  on 
board  the  frame-work  of  four  more  pinnaces,  to  be 
taken  out  and  put  together  when  occasion  served. 

The  ships  were  provided  with  ample  provisions 
for  a  long  and  doubtful  voyage ;  and  with  a  good 
supply  of  cannon,  arms,  and  ammunition.  Nor 
did  Drake  omit  to  provide  for  the  recreation  of 
himself  and  his  men,  during  the  tedious  hours  of 
their  expedition.  Many  articles  of  luxury  were 
stowed  in  the  cabins  and  hold ;  a  number  of  musi- 
cal instruments  were  added ;  the  cabins  were  ele- 
gantly furnished,  and  a  supply  of  gold  and  silver 
plate  and  ornaments  was  put  on  board.  All  the 
dishes  used  at  Drake's  own  table  were  of  the 
precious  metals,  "whereby  the  civility  and  mag- 
nificence of  his  native  country  amongst  all  nations 
whithersoever  he  might  come,  should  be  the  more 
admired." 

His  company  consisted  of    one   hundred  and 


98  drake: 

sixty-four  gentlemen  and  sailors,  a  band  oi  musi- 
cians, and  a  number  of  skilful  cooks.  It  seemed 
as  though  he  were  setting  out  on  a  voyage  of 
pleasure,  rather  than  on  a  warlike  expedition. 

Everything  being  at  last  ready,  Drake  repaired 
to  Plymouth  to  join  his  fleet.  With  him  went  his 
friend  Doughty,  whom  Drake  had  appointed  his 
second  in  command.  He  found  the  captains  and 
crews  assembled  in  their  several  vessels,  only 
awaiting  his  signal  to  spread  sails  and  depart. 

It  was  at  five  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  of  Novem- 
ber 15,  1577,  that  the  gallant  fleet  set  forth  on  its 
long  and  perilous  venture.  Although  its  destina- 
tion was  not  certainly  known,  the  people  suspected 
that  it  was  aimed  against  the  arrogant  and  hated 
Spaniards ;  and  the  great  multitude  which  thronged 
the  quays  to  see  it  set  forth,  rent  the  air  with  their 
shouts  of  "God-speed." 

Drake's  object  was  to  make,  with  as  little  delay 
as  possible,  for  the  Straits  of  Magellan,  thus  to 
double  South  America,  and  pass  northward  along 
the  Pacific  coast  of  the  two  western  continents. 
This  resolve  was  all  the  more  audacious,  as  the 
Spaniards  had  long  since  ceased  to  sail  their  ships 
through   the    Straits,   on    account    of    its    many 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  99 

dangers.  It  was  even  said  that  the  passage  was 
closed  up.  Besides,  there  was  much  superstition 
about  the  dreadful  perils  of  the  Pacific.  Sailors 
were  in  the  habit  of  declaring  that  it  would  be 
surely  fatal  to  every  discoverer  who  ventured  upon 
it.  Magellan  had  himself  been  killed  by  savages 
in  its  islands.  Balboa,  whose  eyes  had  first  gazed 
on  the  Pacific,  had  met  a  violent  death ;  and  De 
Solis  had  been  murdered  by  the  barbarians  of  the 
Rio  de  la  Plata,  while  on  his  way  to  the  dreaded 
Straits.  But  these  events  and  superstitions  did 
not  in  the  least  daunt  Drake's  sturdy  spirit.  He 
knew  that  the  only  way  to  reach  the  Pacific  by 
water,  yet  discovered,  was  by  the  Straits  of 
Magellan ;  and  through  them  he  determined  to 
go,  or  perish  in  the  attempt. 

A  bad  omen  occurred  at  the  very  outset  of  the 
voyage,  which,  had  Drake  been  superstitious, 
might  have  led  him  to  despair.  Scarcely  had  the 
fleet  reached  the  open  sea,  when  a  terrific  gale 
assailed  it.  Such  was  the  fury  of  the  wind  that 
the  mainmast  of  the  "  Golden  Hind "  had  to  be 
cut  away,  while  the  "  Marigold  "  was  driven  ashore 
and  badly  damaged.  Drake  was  forced  to  put  in 
at  Falmouth  till  the  tempest  abated.     Then,  set- 


lOO  f  DRAKE  : 

ting  sail  once  more,  he  directed  the  course  of  the 
fleet  southward  to  the  coast  of  Barbary.  This 
was  to  hoodwink  the  Spaniards,  and  to  make  them 
think  that  his  expedition  was  simply  for  the  pur- 
pose of  capturing  cargoes  of  slaves.  By  Christmas 
the  ships  had  sighted  the  island  Mogadore,  off  the 
African  coast. 

This  island  lay  about  a  mile  from  the  shore.  It 
had  broad,  sandy  beaches,  which  glistened  in  the 
bright  winter  sun.  Lofty  hills  rose  in  the  interior 
of  the  island ;  and  between  it  and  the  mainland, 
was  a  safe  and  convenient  harbor.  Here,  there- 
fore, Drake  cast  anchor.  It  was  necessary  to  take 
in  water,  and  to  make  some  repairs  in  his  ships. 

It  was  with  great  satisfaction  that  the  adven- 
turers found  themselves  upon  dry  land.  They 
wandered  over  the  island,  camped  on  the  shore, 
and  leisurely  made  their  repairs.  Some  of  the 
men  found,  at  the  southern  extremity  of  the 
island,  three  great  hollow  rocks,  in  the  deep 
basins  of  which  they  discovered  some  very  hideous- 
looking  fish,  which,  however,  they  found  very 
eatable.     They  also  killed  many  sea-fowl. 

One  day,  as  several  sailors  were  standing  on 
the  summit  of  a  hill,  and  were  looking  towards  the 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  lOI 

mainland,  they  espied  a  number  of  natives,  with 
large  white  turbans,  standing  on  the  shore  and 
making  signals  to  them.  They  were  waving  a  flag 
of  truce,  and  uttering  loud  cries.  The  men  hast- 
ened to  Drake  and  told  him  what  they  had  seen. 
Drake  was  well  acquainted,  from  his  previous  ex- 
perience in  the  slave  trade,  with  the  traits  of  the  in- 
habitants on  this  part  of  the  coast.  He  interpreted 
the  signals  which  his  men  had  seen,  as  indicating 
a  desire  on  the  part  of  the  natives  to  communicate 
with  him.  He  accordingly  dispatched  a  boat,  with 
an  officer  and  three  men,  to  the  mainland.  They 
found  that  the  Moors  wished  to  be  taken  on  board 
the  flag-ship.  Leaving  one  of  the  crew  behind  as 
a  hostage,  they  invited  two  of  the  Moors  to  enter 
the  boat,  and  quickly  transported  them  to  the 
"Golden  Hind."  Drake  received  his  swarthy 
guests  with  all  honor  and  distinction.  Chairs 
were  placed  for  them  on  the  deck,  and  they  were 
regaled  with  a  dainty  repast ;  and  in  order  still 
more  to  win  their  good-will,  Drake  caused  some 
linen,  shoes,  and  javelins  to  be  brought,  and  pre- 
sented them  to  the  Moors.  He  then  conversed 
with  them  as  well  as  he  could  by  signs  and 
motions;    and     soon     learned    that    they    were 


I02  DRAKE : 

anxious  to  trade  with  him.  Suspecting  noth- 
ing, he  willingly  entered  into  their  wish,  and 
sent  them  ashore  with  many  friendly  demonstra- 
tions. The  English  hostage  was  faithfully  set  at 
liberty,  and  returned  in  the  boat  to  the  ship. 

The  next  morning  at  the  appointed  hour,  Drake 
saw  the  Moors  stationed  once  more  on  the  beach. 
They  had  brought  with  them  a  train  of  camels, 
which  appeared  to  be  loaded  down  with  a  great 
variety  of  wares.  A  boat  promptly  put  out  for  the 
shore,  and  ran  into  an  inlet  between  the  rocks. 
One  of  the  men,  named  John  Fry,  jumped  briskly 
on  the  beach,  and  advanced  toward  the  Moors. 
He  had  not  gone  many  yards  when  the  Moors 
rushed  up,  seized  him,  and  hurried  him  away  with 
them.  At  the  same  time  a  multitude  of  natives, 
who  had  been  hidden  in  the  bushes,  showed  them- 
selves with  threatening  gestures,  and  seemed  about 
to  attack  the  rest  of  the  men  in  the  boat.  Mean- 
while, poor  Fry  was  bound  fast  to  a  horse  ;  and 
the  last  his  comrades  saw  of  him,  he  was  galloping 
away  between  his  captors.  The  crew  perceived  at 
once  that  the  Moors  were  too  many  for  them,  and 
consulted  their  safety  by  making  all  haste  back  to 
the  ships. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  IO3 

Drake  was  very  angry  at  the  apparent  perfidy 
of  the  natives,  and  landed  a  large  force  of  men  to 
attack  them,  and,  if  possible,  to  rescue  Fry.  But 
he  did  not  succeed  in  finding  their  retreat.  It 
turned  out  afterwards  that  the  conduct  of  the 
Moors  was  not,  after  all,  as  black  as  it  seemed  to 
be.  They  had  resorted  to  stratagem  to  capture 
Fry.  But  their  object  was,  not  to  treat  him  with 
cruelty,  but  to  find  out  whether  or  not  Drake's 
fleet  belonged  to  their  bitter  enemies,  the  Portu- 
guese. When  they  found  out  that  it  was  English, 
they  not  only  treated  Fry  gently  and  hospitably, 
but  set  him  free.  Finding  that  Drake's  fleet 
had  sailed  before  he  was  set  at  liberty.  Fry  re- 
turned to  England  in  the  first  ship  that  came  to 
that  coast. 

Drake,  having  given  up  all  hope  of  recovering 
the  captive,  put  in  wood  and  water,  and  having 
remained  a  week  at  Mogadore,  once  more  set  sail. 
A  fortnight's  voyage  brought  him  to  Cape  Blanco, 
where  he  halted  for  five  days,  so  that  his  men 
might  amuse  themselves  with  fishing.  He  availed 
himself  of  this  delay  to  also  exercise  them  in 
drilling,  that  they  might  be  prepared  for  the 
fierce  encounters  which  he  foresaw  the  future  had 


104  DRAKE : 

in  store  for  them.  The  fleet  succeeded  in  captur 
ing  three  Spanish  fishing-boats,  and  two  or  three 
smaller  Spanish  vessels.  The  natives  at  Cape 
Blanco  were  docile  and  friendly.  There  was  a 
great  scarcity  of  water  in  that  region,  and  the 
natives  came  to  the  ships  to  beg  for  some,  bringing 
ambergris  and  gum  to  exchange  for  it.  Drake 
generously  filled  their  leather  bags  from  his  not 
too  ample  store,  and  sent  them  away  capering 
with  delight. 

The  next  stopping-place  of  the  fleet  was  the 
island  of  Mayo,  upon  which  dwelt  a  thriving 
Portuguese  colony  of  shepherds  and  farmers. 
Here  Drake  hoped  to  procure  a  supply  of  dried 
goats'  flesh  and  other  provisions.  But  on  anchor- 
ing in  one  of  the  harbors  of  the  island,  he  found, 
to  his  chagrin,  that  the  Portuguese  would  not 
trade  with  him.  They  shared  with  the  Spaniards 
their  jealousy  and  dread  of  the  English,  whom 
they  recognized  as  their  most  formidable  rivals  on 
the  sea.  Drake  was  resolved  not  to  brook  such 
a  lack  of  hospitality.  The  next  day  he  sent  a  force 
of  sixty  men  on  shore,  commanded  by  Captain 
Winter.  This  party  marched  straight  to  the 
principal  settlement,  composed  of  a  cluster  of  low 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  10$ 

huts,  built  in  irregular  groups  in  a  valley.  Every 
hut  was  deserted.  On  repairing  to  the  springs  for 
water,  Winter  and  his  companions  found  that  the 
Portuguese  had  maliciously  sprinkled  salt  in  every 
one  of  them,  so  that  the  water  could  not  be 
drunk.  The  party  advanced  some  distance  into 
the  interior  of  the  island,  but  could  nowhere  find 
any  traces  of  the  fugitives.  They  were  amazed, 
however,  to  see  on  every  hand  the  evidences  of 
the  extraordinary  fertility  and  fruitfulness  of  the 
place.  They  beheld  the  greatest  quantity  of 
delicious  grapes,  and  passed  through  lovely  groves 
and  valleys,  where  cocoanuts  hung  from  the 
branches  in  the  richest  profusion.  On  the  slopes 
they  espied  goats  and  wild  hens,  and  in  the  lofty 
trees  birds  with  magnificent  plumage. 

They  were,  however,  forced  to  forego  their 
attempt  to  punish  the  Portuguese,  and  to  re- 
turn crestfallen  to  the  fleet.  Not  long  after 
setting  sail  from  Mayo,  Drake  fell  in  with 
a  large  Portuguese  galleon,  bound  for  Brazil, 
laden  with  wines,  cloth,  and  other  valuable 
wares,  and  containing  a  large  number  of  pas- 
sengers. He  straightway  attacked  and  cap- 
tured her,  and   made  prisoners  of  her  inmatea 


io6  drake: 

He  gave  the  command  of  this  prize  to  his  old 
friend,  Doughty ;  but  ere  very  long  he  found,  to 
his  great  grief,  that  this  friend,  who  had  done  him 
such  signal  service,  was  not  to  be  trusted.  Doughty 
secretly  took  bribes  from  the  Portuguese  prisoners, 
which  they  offered  him  as  a  reward  for  treating 
them  mildly,  and  kept  the  money  himself ;  where- 
upon Drake  deprived  him  of  the  command,  which 
he  conferred  on  his  brother,  Thomas  Drake. 
Doughty  was  destined  afterwards,  on  more  than 
one  occasion,  to  call  down  upon  him  the  displeasure 
of  his  commander. 

As  soon  as  he  could  make  a  convenient  port, 
Drake  set  the  Portuguese  prisoners  at  liberty, 
giving  them  their  clothes,  some  wine,  and  some 
provisions.  He  also  left  them  one  of  the  pinnaces 
which  he  had  brought  with  him  in  sections.  But 
he  kept  with  him  the  Portuguese  pilot,  who  would 
be  useful  in  guiding  the  expedition  on  the  Brazilian 
coast ;  and  retained  the  galleon  as  one  of  his  fleet. 

The  voyagers  soon  came  to  an  island  which, 
from  its  volcanoes,  was  called  the  "  Burning  Island." 
"In  this  island,"  says  one  of  the  adventurers, 
"rises  a  steep,  upright  hill,  eighteen  miles  from 
the  shore;  within  whose  bowels  is  a  consuming 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  IO7 

fire,  maintained  by  a  sulphurous  matter,  seeming 
to  be  of  marvellous  depth,  and  also  very  wide. 
The  fire  showeth  itself  but  four  times  an  hour,  at 
which  times  it  breaketh  out  with  such  violence  and 
force,  and  in  such  vast  abundance,  that,  besides 
giving  light  like  the  moon  a  great  way  off,  it 
seems  as  if  it  would  not  stop  till  it  touched  the 
heavens  themselves.  Herein  are  engendered  a 
great  store  of  pumice-stones  which,  being  in  the 
vehement  heat  of  the  fire  hurled  out  of  the  mouth 
of  that  fiery  body,  fall  down,  with  other  gross  and 
slimy  matter,  upon  the  hill." 

Another  island,  near  by,  Drake  found  to  be  "  a 
most  sweet  and  pleasant  island,  the  trees  whereof 
are  always  green  and  fair  to  look  upon ;  so  that 
they  call  it  the  *  Brave  Island.*  The  soil  is  almost 
full  of  trees ;  so  that  it  is  a  store-house  of  many 
fruits  and  commodities,  such  as  figs  always  ripe, 
cocoas,  plantains,  oranges,  lemons,  citrons,  and 
cotton.  From  the  brooks  into  the  sea  do  run,  in 
many  places,  silver  streams  of  sweet  and  whole- 
some water." 

It  was  with  delight  that  the  voyagers  lingered 
amid  such  luxuriant  and  smiling  scenes,  and 
rested  from  the  turmoils  of  the  deep.     But  their 


I08  DRAKE : 

sojourn  on  the  islands  was  always  brief ;  for 
months  had  passed  since  their  departure,  and  but 
a  small  part  of  their  long  voyage  had  been  accom- 
plished. From  the  Brave  Island  they  once  more 
pushed  out  into  the  boundless  ocean,  where,  for  a 
while,  they  enjoyed  gentle  breezes,  caught  dol- 
phins and  flying-fish,  and  listened,  on  bright,  calm 
days,  to  the  music  of  the  band  which  Drake  had 
brought  with  him.  Then  once  more  terrific  tem- 
pests assailed  them,  and  their  destruction  seemed 
inevitable.  In  one  of  these  tempests,  Drake  was 
grieved  to  find  that  his  Portuguese  prize  had 
separated  from  the  rest  of  the  fleet,  and  was  no- 
where to  be  seen.  He  was  relieved,  a  day  or  two 
after,  to  find  her  safely  anchored  off  an  island,  the 
cape  of  which  he  gratefully  named  Cape  Joy. 

The  fleet  had  set  out  from  Plymouth  in  Novem- 
ber. It  was  not  until  early  in  April  that  Drake 
sighted  the  long,  low  coast  of  Brazil.  For  sixty- 
three  days  the  fleet  had  been  out  of  sight  of  land  ; 
and  the  welcome  view  of  the  coast,  with  its  trees 
and  the  sloping  hills  beyond,  inspired  the  weather- 
worn seafarers  with  fresh  spirits  and  renewed 
hope. 

Scarcely  had  they  drawn  towards  the  coast, 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  IO9 

when,  to  their  surprise,  they  saw  it  lit  up  with 
many  bonfires.  Presently  they  had  come  near 
enough  to  perceive  numbers  of  men  and  women 
running  up  and  down  the  shore,  and  feeding  the 
flames  with  bundles  of  wood  and  brush.  At  first, 
the  sailors  took  these  fires  to  be  intended  as  a 
welcome  from  the  Brazilians  to  the  new-comers. 
But  Drake,  who  knew  well  the  habits  of  these  peo- 
ple, soon  undeceived  his  comrades. 

*' These  bonfires,"  he  said,  "are  not  meant  for 
our  welcome,  but  for  our  destruction.  It  is  a  sac- 
rifice which  these  Brazilians  make  to  the  devil. 
They  believe  that  if  they  pile  up  huge  heaps  of 
sand  and  build  fires  thereon,  and  go  through  cer- 
tain incantations,  the  devil  and  his  imps  will  ship- 
wreck and  thus  destroy  us.  But  still,  I  believe 
that  we  have  naught  to  fear.  They  think  we  are 
Portuguese,  and  hence  would  ruin  us.  When  they 
discover  that  we  are  English,  and  mean  them  no 
injury,  perhaps  they  will  treat  us  in  friendly 
fashion." 

For  some  distance  along  the  coast,  Drake  could 
find  no  secure  haven  for  his  ships.  The  weather 
became  stormy,  and  more  than  once  the  stress  of 
wind  and  wave  was  such  that  the  ships  became 


I  lO  DRAKE  : 

separated  from  each  other.  But  as  they  all  held 
the  same  southward  course,  they  always  came  to- 
gether again.  At  last  the  "  Golden  Hind "  and 
her  sister  ships  reached  the  mouth  of  the  River  de  la 
Plata,  where  Drake  came  to  anchor  in  a  pretty  bay 
under  a  protecting  cape. 

"  Among  other  cares  which  our  general  took," 
says  one  of  the  voyagers,  "  was  to  keep  our  whole 
fleet  (as  near  as  we  possibly  could)  together;  to 
get  fresh  water,  which  is  of  continual  use  ;  and  to 
refresh  our  men,  wearied  with  long  toils  at  sea,  as 
oft  as  he  should  have  opportunity."  The  River 
de  la  Plata  was  the  first  principal  station  of  the 
voyage  after  crossing  the  Atlantic.  It  was  a  most 
pleasant  and  convenient  place  to  tarry,  while 
Drake  prepared  for  a  more  perilous  task  than  he 
had  yet  undertaken  —  the  passage  of  the  Straits  of 
Magellan.  The  climate  was  temperate,  the  air 
pure  and  sweet,  the  landscape  beautiful,  and  the 
country  roundabout  fruitful.  A  still  more  shel- 
tered harbor  was  soon  found,  some  thirty  miles  up 
the  wide  mouth  of  the  stream  ;  and  here  the  fleet 
was  finally  anchored,  while  its  occupants  enjoyed 
their  much  needed  rest.  The  men  found  much 
sport  in  killing  seals,  the  meat  of  which  they  ate 


THE   SEA-KING  OF    DEVON.  Ill 

with  keen  relish ;  and  also  shot  many  deer  in  the 
forests  a  short  distance  inland.  They  explored 
the  river  above  their  haven  ;  but  wherever  they 
went,  the  natives,  probably  taking  them  for  Portu- 
guese or  Spaniards,  retreated  in  fright  before 
them. 

Not  long  after  the  fleet  had  resumed  its  voyage, 
the  "  Swan  "  became  separated  from  it  by  a  storm ; 
and  now  Drake  resolved  that,  as  soon  as  he  could 
again  make  a  good  harbor,  he  would  reduce  the 
number  of  his  vessels.  The  fleet  was  too  large  to 
keep  together ;  and  there  was  room  enough  for  all 
the  men  and  provisions  in  his  larger  ships.  So  he 
searched  diligently  for  another  place  of  anchorage. 
In  a  few  days,  a  lofty  headland  was  reached,  be- 
hind which  appeared  a  quiet  bay.  But  as  many 
jagged  rocks  reared  their  heads  above  the  water  off 
the  headland,  Drake  did  not  think  it  safe  to  at- 
tempt to  enter  the  bay,  without  first  carefully 
exploring  for  a  sufficiently  wide  channel.  "Our 
general,"  says  the  narrator  before  quoted,  "especi- 
ally in  matters  of  moment,  was  never  wont  to  rely 
alone  on  other  men's  care,  however  trusty  or  skil- 
ful they  might  be ;  but,  always  despising  danger, 
and  refusing  no  toil,  he  was  wont  himself  to  take  part 


112  drake: 

at  every  turn  where  courage,  skill,  or  industry  was 
to  be  employed,  Nor  would  he  at  this  time  en- 
trust the  discovery  of  these  dangers  to  others; 
but  rather  to  his  own  experience  in  searching  out 
and  sounding  of  them.  A  boat  being  therefore 
hoisted  forth,  he,  with  some  others,  rowed  into  the 
bay ;  and  being  now  very  near  the  shore,  one  of 
the  natives  of  the  country  showed  himself  unto 
him,  seeming  very  pleasant,  singing,  and  dancing 
to  the  noise  of  a  rattle  which  he  shook  in  his 
hand." 

Before  Drake  could  effect  a  landing,  a  dense  fog 
spread  itself  over  the  bay  and  coast.  The  men  on 
the  ships  became  alarmed  for  his  safety,  and  sent 
forward  the  "  Marigold,"  in  spite  of  the  danger  of 
the  reefs,  to  search  for  him.  But  the  fog  lifted  in 
a  few  hours,  and  then  Drake,  landing  on  the  beach, 
lit  some  huge  fires  as  signals  to  the  ships  to  enter 
the  harbor. 


fi 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  IIJ 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

DOUGHTY's   treason   and   EXECUTION. 

LL  the  ships,  except  the  "Swan"  and 
the  Portuguese  prize  (which  was  named 
"  Mary  "),  found  their  way  safely  through 
the  channel  by  which  Drake  had  entered  with 
his  boat.  The  crews  went  on  shore  and  en- 
camped ;  while  Drake,  taking  two  vessels,  went 
forth  again  in  search  of  the  missing  ships.  Hap- 
pily, he  succeeded  in  finding  the  "Swan,"  which 
he  brought  into  the  harbor ;  and  this  vessel,  after 
transferring  her  cargo  to  the  others,  he  caused  to 
be  broken  up  for  firewood. 

The  adventurers  found  many  interesting  and 
curious  things  in  the  region  near  the  bay.  They 
came  upon  strange-looking,  low  houses  near  the 
shore,  upon  entering  which  they  saw  a  great  num- 
ber of  ostriches,  which  were  evidently  being  dried 
for  food.  They  also  discovered  a  number  of  rude  im- 
plements, used  by  the  natives  in  capturing  and 
curing  the  ostriches.  The  Englishmen  afterwards 
learned  that,  in  order  to  catch  these  huge  birds, 


1 14  DRAKE  : 

the  natives  were  in  the  habit  of  fixing  a  bunch  of 
feathers  to  a  long  staff,  so  fashioned  as  to  resemble 
an  ostrich's  head  at  the  top,  and  a  broad  tail  below. 
Holding  this  dummy  ostrich  before  them,  they 
would  stalk  off,  and  drive  a  flock  of  ostriches  upon 
a  narrow  neck  of  land,  where  they  ensnared  them 
with  nets.  They  also  employed  dogs  in  hunting 
the  ostriches  down. 

Drake  and  his  comrades  had  not  been  long  in 
this  place  before  scraping  an  acquaintance  with  the 
natives.  At  first,  the  latter  were  shy  and  fearful ; 
but  by  degrees  they  became  reassured,  and  grad- 
ually came  nearer  and  nearer  the  camp.  Drake 
could  not  but  admire  their  fine,  tall,  symmetrical 
forms,  and  their  sprightly  ways.  Their  only  article 
of  dress  was  a  large  skin,  which  they  wore  about 
their  loins.  Their  method  of  adorning  themselves 
was  to  paint  their  entire  bodies  in  various  glaring 
colors.  When  they  had  gained  confidence,  and 
had  become  used  to  the  sight  of  the  Englishmen, 
they  would  come  in  parties  of  a  dozen  or  more,  and 
would  dance  and  caper  about  the  camp.  Drake 
pleased  them  exceedingly  by  giving  them  some 
knives,  bells,  trumpets,  and  similar  playthings; 
whereupon  they  leaped  about  more  frantically 
than  ever. 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  II5 

It  was  with  regret  that  the  voyagers  left  this 
pleasant  haven  and  these  friendly  natives.  But 
time  pressed ;  and  as  Drake  approached  the  pas- 
sage which,  if  he  succeeded  in  traversing  it,  would 
carry  him  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific,  he  be- 
came more  and  more  impatient  of  delay.  Be- 
fore attaining  these  perilous  Straits  of  Magellan, 
the  voyagers  were  destined  to  meet  with  many 
interesting  and  dangerous  adventures.  It  was 
necessary,  on  account  of  the  storms,  the  lack  of 
provisions,  the  need  of  repairs,  and  the  occasional 
separation  of  the  ships,  to  make  frequent  halts ; 
and  wherever  the  ships  cast  anchor,  there  was 
always  something  novel  to  see.  Fortunately  the 
"  Mary,"  which  had  long  been  lost  sight  of,  was 
found  after  a  troublesome  search  ;  and,  on  the  20th 
of  June,  the  entire  fleet,  being  together  once  more, 
put  in  at  Port  St.  Julian. 

They  had  not  been  long  here  before  they  saw 
some  of  that  race  of  giants  whom  Magellan  had 
called  Patagonians.  They  were,  indeed,  men  of 
huge  stature  and  of  proportionate  prowess.  Un- 
like many  of  the  South  Americans  before  encoun- 
tered, they  did  not  show  the  least  timidity  at  the 
approach   of  strangers.     They   speedily   mingled 


Ii6  drake: 

with  the  English  on  the  easiest  terms  of  famil 
iarity ;  took  the  presents  which  Drake  offered  them 
with  great  eagerness  and  dehght;  and  even  joined 
in  the  sports  of  the  crews. 

One  day,  several  of  these  giants  were  watching 
an  English  gunner,  named  Oliver,  who  was  prac- 
tising with  his  bow  and  arrows  on  the  shore. 
After  gazing  for  some  time  with  open  mouths,  and 
admiring  the  precision  with  which  Oliver's  arrows 
sped  to  the  centre  of  his  target,  they  made  signs 
that  they  should  like  to  try  their  own  skill  in 
shooting.  Oliver  willingly  gave  them  his  bow ; 
but  being  wholly  unused  to  it,  their  awkward  at- 
tempts greatly  amused  the  group  of  English  who 
had  gathered  in  a  circle  to  see  the  sport.  Then 
one  of  the  Englishmen,  named  Robert  Winter, 
took  the  bow,  and  aimed  at  the  target.  Just  as  he 
let  his  arrow  fly,  the  string  of  the  bow  broke 
with  a  loud  snap.  One  of  the  Patagonians,  a 
morose,  ill-natured  fellow,  who  had  been  urging 
his  comrades  to  come  away  from  the  strangers, 
and  who  seemed  bent  on  quarrelling,  took  advan- 
tage of  the  accident  to  raise  a  dismal  howl.  He 
thought  that,  as  the  bow-string  was  broken,  Win- 
ter and  his  friends  were  powerless  to  defend  them- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  II^ 

selves.  The  other  giants  caught  his  hostile  dis- 
position ;  and  retreating  a  short  distance,  let  fly  a 
shower  of  arrows  at  the  disarmed  archer.  They 
little  imagined  that  the  strange-looking  implements 
which  they  saw  in  the  hands  of  the  English  were 
deadly  weapons  ;  but  they  were  soon  to  be  unde- 
ceived. One  of  their  arrows  pierced  Winter's 
lung ;  still,  he  stood  his  ground  like  a  man.  Then 
Oliver  levelled  his  gun  and  pulled  the  trigger ;  but 
it  missed  fire,  and  at  the  same  moment  Oliver  fell 
dead,  pierced  to  the  heart  by  one  of  the  Patagon- 
ian  arrows. 

Drake  saw  that  he  must  act  boldly  and  promptly, 
or  that  his  entire  party  would  be  massacred. 
Rushing  forward  in  front  of  his  men,  he  ordered 
them  to  cover  themselves  with  their  targets,  and 
to  advance  upon  the  natives.  The  latter  were 
fast  increasing  in  numbers,  and  growing  more 
ferocious.  Seizing  a  gun  which  one  of  the  men  at 
his  side  was  holding,  Drake  levelled  it  with  firm 
hand  at  the  quarrelsome  savage  who  had  insti- 
gated the  attack.  The  huge  fellow  received  the 
shot  in  his  stomach,  and  reeling,  fell  with  a  heavy 
thud  on  the  ground.  The  Patagonians  were  terror- 
stricken  at  this  i  and  having  now  no  leader  to  rally 


ii8  drake: 

them,  turned  and  precipitately  fled  to  the  woods. 
But  no  time  was  to  be  lost  ;  for  Drake  knew  that 
as  soon  as  they  had  recovered  their  senses,  they 
would  rally  in  far  greater  numbers,  and  that  their 
wrath  would  know  no  bounds.  So  he  and  his  party 
made,  with  all  haste,  for  the  ships,  carrying  with 
them  the  wounded  Winter.  The  body  of  poor 
Oliver,  who  had  been  killed  by  the  arrows  of  the 
savages,  was  left  on  the  shore.  Winter  had  scarcely 
reached  his  ship,  when  he  died  of  his  wound.  The 
voyagers  were  safe  enough  on  board  the  fleet, 
for  the  Patagonians  could  not  hope  to  assail  the 
ships  in  their  rude  canoes.  If  they  did,  the  cannon 
would  make  short  work  of  them.  So  Drake  was 
in  no  hurry  to  leave  Port  St.  Julian,  his  repairs 
not  being  yet  completed. 

A  few  days  after  the  fight  with  the  Patagonians, 
Drake  made  a  discovery  which  filled  him  both  with 
grief  and  indignation.  Thomas  Doughty,  whose 
acquaintance  he  had  made  years  before  in  Ireland, 
who  had  been  the  means  of  procuring  him  the 
powerful  aid  of  Sir  Christopher  Hatton  and  the 
favor  of  the  Queen,  and  whom  he  had  brought  on 
this  expedition  as  his  second  in  command,  proved 
to  be  not  only  an  ambitious  man,  but  a  false  friend. 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  II9 

He  had  already,  during  the  voyage,  showed  an 
unruly  disposition,  and  had  been  deprived  of  the 
command  of  the  "  Mary  '*  on  account  of  his  dis- 
honest actions.  Drake,  however,  had  still  clung 
to  his  faith  in  his  old  friend,  who  had  once  served 
him  so  well,  and  who  seemed  to  him  incapable  ot 
deliberate  perfidy. 

But  at  Port  St.  Julian,  Drake  was  told,  ons 
morning,  by  an  officer  of  the  fleet  who  was  warmly 
devoted  to  him,  that  Doughty  was  plotting  a 
mutiny.  He  declared  that  Doughty's  aim  was  to 
depose  Drake  from  the  command  of  the  fleet, 
and  to  usurp  it  himself ;  and  that  he  had  for  some 
time  been  trying  to  corrupt  the  officers  and  men. 
Drake  was  amazed  beyond  expression  at  this  in- 
telligence. He  could  scarcely  believe  his  ears. 
Was  it  possible  that  Doughty  could  find  it  in  his 
heart  to  be  so  treacherous } 

But  he  could  not  let  such  an  accusation  pass 
without  inquiring  into  its  truth  or  falsehood.  He 
began  at  once  to  make  cautious  inquiries  ;  and 
what  was  his  surprise  to  learn,  from  another  of  his 
officers,  that  Doughty's  ill-will  towards  him  had 
betrayed  itself  even  before  they  left  the  shores  of 
England  !      He  was    told   that,   one  day,   when 


120  drake: 

Doughty  was  walking  with  some  of  the  officers  in 
Drake's  garden  at  Plymouth,  Doughty  had  spoken 
very  insolently  of  Drake,  and  had  tried  to  excite 
the  minds  of  the  officers  against  him. 

"  I  can  scarce  believe,"  exclaimed  Drake,  resting 
his  head  on  his  hand,  "  that  one  I  have  so  dearly 
loved  would  conceive  evil  against  me.  But  I  see," 
he  added,  "  that  leniency  will  do  no  good,  and  that 
it  is  high  time  to  call  Doughty's  conduct  in  question. 
Let  a  strict  watch  be  set  over  him.  He  shall  be 
arraigned  before  me  and  my  officers  without 
delay." 

The  next  day,  the  officers  of  the  fleet  were 
assembled  on  the  deck  of  the  **  Golden  Hind.'* 
Every  face  wore  a  sad  and  downcast  look.  The 
company  were  silent,  and  awaited  in  gloomy 
suspense  the  opening  of  the  examination  by  their 
commander.  Drake  sat  in  the  centre  of  the  deck, 
with  pale  but  grim  and  resolute  features.  Of  all 
the  tasks  and  troubles  of  his  voyage,  this  was  the 
most  painful;  but  he  nerved  himself  to  it  with 
stern  self-control.  Not  far  from  him  stood  the 
accused  Doughty,  with  bowed  head  and  trembling 
form,  guarded  on  either  side  by  two  sailors. 

Drake  addressed  the  officers  in  a  clear  voice. 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  121 

Looking  around,  and  then  pointing  at  Doughty,  he 
said :  — 

**This  man,  officers,  hath  many  good  qualities, 
as  I  have  full  reason  to  know.  He  hath  done  me 
many  precious  services.  He  was  a  true  friend  to 
me,  when  I  greatly  needed  such  a  one.  I  have 
had  the  greatest  good-will  and  inward  affection 
towards  him  ;  a  more  than  brotherly  love.  But  he 
is  here  accused  of  various  crimes  and  treacheries 
against  me  and  against  the  fleet.  It  is  for  you, 
officers,  to  judge  whether  or  not  he  is  guilty.'* 

Drake  then  recounted  the  charges  which  had 
been  brought  against  Doughty,  and  the  proofs 
which  he  had  gathered.  The  charges  were  of 
misconduct,  "not  only  at  sea,  but  even  at  Plym- 
outh ;  not  bare  words,  but  writings ;  not  only 
writings,  but  actions,  tending  to  the  overthrow 
not  only  of  the  expedition,  but  the  destruction  of 
its  commander  also." 

Having  thus  set  before  the  assembly  the  charges 
and  the  proofs,  Drake  enjoined  them  to  consider 
well  their  reply.  Was  Doughty  guilty  or  innocent  ? 
It  was  for  them  to  decide  and  honestly  declare.  A 
profound  silence  followed  the  commander's  closing 
words.     Then  the  officers  began  to  whisper  earn- 


122  drake: 

estly  among  themselves.  Meanwhile  Doughty 
stood  with  bent  head,  and  a  face  as  pale  as  death. 
Drake  sat  in  stern  serenity  in  the  midst  of  the 
group. 

Soon  one  of  the  captains,  by  right  of  his  rank, 
raised  his  voice,  and  declared  that  he  believed 
Doughty  to  be  guilty.  Drake  called  upon  the 
others  in  turn  to  give  each  his  judgment.  When 
he  had  gone  through  the  officers,  he  found  that 
only  one  or  two  acquitted  the  man,  and  that  forty 
condemned  him. 

Turning  to  Doughty,  he  said  in  solemn  tones,  — 

"  Doughty,  you  see  what  the  company  declares. 
You  are  judged  guilty  of  treason  towards  me  and 
the  fleet.  What  have  you  to  say  in  your  own 
defence  V* 

Stricken  with  sudden  and  overwhelming  re- 
morse, the  unhappy  man  prostrated  himself  at 
Drake's  feet.  For  a  moment,  he  was  so  overcome 
by  his  emotions  that  he  could  not  speak ;  then, 
with  a  broken  voice,  he  replied  :  — 

"I  do  humbly  and  remorsefully  confess  the 
crimes  of  which  I  have  been  found  guilty ;  and  I 
implore  your  clemency." 

"  Doughty,"  said  Drake,  "  I  have  but  one  course^ 


TMI   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  123 

and  that  is,  to  punish  you  for  your  great  treasoa 
But  I  cannot  forget  your  former  services  and 
friendship ;  so  I  will  give  you  a  choice  of  three 
fates.  Will  you  be  executed  here  on  this  island 
near  by  ?  or  will  you  be  put  ashore  and  left  on  the 
mainland  ?  or  will  you  return  to  England  a  prisoner, 
there  to  duly  answer  your  deeds  before  the  lords 
of  the  queen's  council  ? " 

Doughty  remained  silent,  as  if  in  deep  thought. 
Then,  in  a  hesitating  voice,  he  said,  — 

"  May  I  have  until  to-morrow  to  decide  ? " 

The  request  was  granted.  The  assembly  of 
officers  broke  up,  and  Doughty  was  taken  below 
in  irons.  The  next  day  he  was  again  brought 
before  the  commander. 

"  Well,  Doughty,"  said  Drake,  "  which  fate  have 
you  chosen }  '* 

"With  all  my  heart,"  returned  the  condemned 
man,  "  I  do  choose  rather  to  be  executed  on  this 
island,  than  to  be  left  among  savages,  or  to  face 
the  lords  in  England.  But  I  pray  you,  give  me  but 
a  little  time,  that  I  may  once  more  receive  the  holy 
communion  with  you  yourself  before  I  die ;  that  I 
may  not  die  other  than  the  death  of  a  gentle* 
man." 


124  prake: 

This  last  wish  was  readily  granted.  The  next 
morning  the  communion  was  administered  by  Fran- 
cis Fletcher,  the  chaplain  of  the  fleet,  to  Drake  and 
Doughty  together  in  the  captain's  cabin  :  and  after 
the  sacred  rite  had  been  completed,  the  cabin  was 
set  with  a  bounteous  dinner.  The  captain  and  the 
culprit  sat  down  at  the  board,  opposite  each  other, 
quite  as  they  used  to  do  in  the  happier  days  of  their 
friendship.  For  a  little  while  they  tried  to  forget 
the  tragic  event  which  was  about  to  ensue ;  "each 
cheering  up  the  other,  and  taking  their  leave  by 
drinking  to  each  other,  as  if  some  journey  only  had 
been  in  hand." 

The  execution  of  the  unhappy  Doughty  quickly 
followed  on  his  last  feast.  A  block  was  set  up 
on  the  island  near  which  the  "Golden  Hind" 
was  moored;  Doughty  was  brought  forth  with 
his  hands  tied ;  and  after  kneeling  to  make  a 
brief  last  prayer,  with  quiet  courage  placed  his 
head  upon  the  block.  One  of  the  men,  who  had 
been  chosen  as  the  executioner,  swung  high  the 
axe,  and  at  a  single  blow  Doughty' s  head  was 
severed  from  his  body.  Doughty's  remains  were 
buried  on  the  island.  Two  large  stones  were  put 
at  the  head  and  foot  of  the  grave,  upon  one  of 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  I^J 

which  an  inscription  was  rudely  graven  in  Latin, 
with  Drake's  name,  and  the  date  of  his  being  at 
Port  St.  Julian. 

This  melancholy  event  over,  Drake  became  anx- 
ious to  get  away  from  the  scene  where  it  had  been 
enacted.  Following  out  his  purpose  to  reduce  the 
size  of  his  fleet,  he  caused  the  "  Mary,"  the  Portu- 
guese prize,  to  be  emptied  of  her  cargo  and  then 
broken  up.  Three  ships  were  all  that  now  re- 
mained of  the  fleet,  besides  the  small  frame-work 
pinnaces.  Into  these  the  cargo  of  the  "  Mary  "  was 
stored,  while  they  took  in  an  ample  supply  of  wood 
and  water.  On  the  17th  of  August,  having  re- 
mained two  months  at  Port  St.  Julian,  the  fleet 
once  more  set  forth  on  its  southwestward  course. 

Three  days  later  Drake  at  last  sighted  the  Cape 
of  the  Virgins,  which  lies  at  the  entrance  of  the 
Straits  of  Magellan.  The  cape  loomed  majestic- 
ally at  a  distance  of  twelve  miles  over  the  sea. 
Its  high  and  precipitous  gray  cliffs,  against  which 
the  waves  beat  furiously,  looked  grimly  forbidding ; 
but  Drake  exulted  in  the  thought  that  now  finally 
he  was  about  to  brave  the  perilous  passage  from 
which  the  Spaniards  shrank  in  superstitious  terror. 

No  sooner  had  Drake  arrived  off  the  cape,  than 


126  drake: 

he  ordered  his  three  ships  to  strike  their  topsails  in 
honor  of  Queen  Elizabeth.  Cheers  echoed  from 
deck  to  deck ;  then  all  the  voyagers  knelt,  while 
the  chaplains  offered  up  to  Heaven  their  fervid 
prayers  of  thanksgiving. 

Early  on  the  following  morning,  August  20th, 
the  commander  gave  the  signal  to  enter  the  famous 
Straits.  They  looked  forbidding  enough.  As  the 
sailors  peered  ahead,  the  winding  passage  seemed 
too  narrow  for  their  ships  ;  while  the  wind  blew  so 
furiously,  that  it  seemed  inevitable  that  they  would 
be  hurled  upon  the  rocks  on  either  hand.  But  the 
ships,  being  well-handled,  passed  this  small  channel 
without  accidents ;  and  then  they  emerged  into 
what  appeared  to  be  a  bay-like  river,  five  or  six 
miles  broad.  As,  during  the  night,  they  sailed 
across  this  open  body  of  water,  all  at  once  a  lurid 
glare  shot  up  just  ahead  of  them.  For  a  moment 
the  adventurers  trembled  with  a  vague  alarm  ;  but 
soon  they  were  able  to  perceive  that  the  strange 
light  came  from  a  volcanic  island,  like  the  "  Burn- 
ing Island  **  they  had  seen  on  the  way  thither. 

Continuing  to  advance,  the  next  day  the  voy- 
agers were  greatly  struck  with  the  scenery  which 
met  their  view  on  either  side  of  the  Straits.    Beauti- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  127 

ful  islands  rose  from  the  water  in  the  wider  reaches : 
and  landing  upon  some  of  these,  they  were  greatly 
refreshed  by  the  fresh  springs  which  they  found 
in  abundance.  On  both  sides  the  shores  rose  to 
precipitous  and  almost  mountainous  heights;  the 
hills  behind  formed  still  loftier  ranges,  so  high, 
"that  between  them  did  appear  three  regions  of 
clouds.  "  The  remoter  ranges  glistened  with  spark- 
ling cones  of  perpetual  snow.  The  Englishmen 
found  the  Straits  to  be  very  cold.  Each  morning 
there  was  a  heavy  frost,  and  sometimes  violent 
snow  gusts  swept  across  the  ships.  "  The  trees," 
says  Fletcher,  the  chaplain,  "  seemed  to  stoop  with 
the  burden  of  the  weather ;  and  yet  were  green 
continually,  and  many  good  and  sweet  herbs  very 
plentifully  grew  and  increased  beneath  them." 

After  they  had  been  in  the  Straits  four  days,  the 
ships  came  to  anchor  at  a  large  and  fair  island, 
which  not  only  offered  a  secure  harbor,  but  prom- 
ised to  provide  the  adventurers  with  everything 
they  most  needed.  Landing  upon  it,  the  men 
speedily  encountered  a  great  number  of  wild  fowl, 
which  proved,  on  trial,  to  be  very  palatable  eating. 
"  These  fowl,"  says  one  of  the  voyagers,  "  could  not 
fly,  having  but  stub  wings,  without  feathers,  cov- 


128  drake: 

ered  over  with  a  certain  down,  as  was  also  all  their 
body  besides  ;  in  their  heads,  eyes  and  feet,  they 
were  like  a  duck,  but  almost  as  a  goose.  They  bred 
and  lodged  on  land,  and  in  the  day  time  went  down 
to  the  sea  for  food.  They  dug  holes  in  the  ground, 
wherein  they  laid  their  eggs,  and  lodged  themselves, 
and  bred  their  young.  It  would  not  be  possible  to 
find  a  bird  of  their  bigness  which  had  greater 
strength  than  they  ;  for  our  men  putting  cudgels 
into  their  holes  to  force  them  out,  they  would  take 
hold  of  the  cudgels  with  their  bills,  and  would  not 
let  go  their  hold." 

The  discovery  of  these  fowl  was  very  fortu- 
nate for  the  crews,  who  had  not  for  a  long  time 
tasted  so  pleasant  a  dish.  Three  thousand  of  them 
were  soon  dispatched ;  and  those  which  could  not 
be  eaten,  were  cured  and  stored  away  for  future 
use.  The  rest  of  the  voyage  through  the  Straits 
proved  full  of  perils,  alarms,  and  discomforts.  The 
cold  was  at  times  excessive.  Snow  fell,  and  the 
banks  were  crusted  with  ice ;  sometimes  the  whole 
landscape  ap  jeared  shrouded  in  white.  Often,  too, 
the  ships  could  find  no  anchorage,  so  deep  and 
seemingly  unfathomable  were  the  channels  through 
which  they  passed.    Tornadoes  burst  suddenly  upon 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  129 

them,  and  drove  them  to  right  and  left,  and  some- 
times compelled  them  to  retreat  before  the  tem- 
pestuous violence ;  while  the  waters  rose  and 
dashed  with  terrific  force  against  the  sides  of  the 
little  fleet. 

But  all  these  dangers  and  discomforts  were  safely- 
endured  with  sturdy  perseverance  and  unflagging 
courage ;  and  on  the  6th  of  September,  Drake  and 
his  brave  comrades  were  rewarded  by  beholding, 
rising  majestically  above  the  restless  waters,  the 
cape  which,  as  they  knew,  stood  at  the  outlet  from 
the  Straits  into  the  long  looked-for  Pacific. 


I30  DRAKE : 

CHAPTER  IX. 

DRAKE   AT   CAPE   HORN. 

RS^^WRAKE  had  sailed  through  the  Straits  of 
mXJjR  Magellan  in  a  shorter  time  than  the  pas- 
sage had  ever  before  been  accomplished. 
Hitherto,  it  had  taken  the  Spanish  and  Portuguese 
ships  at  least  a  month  to  steer  through  its  winding 
channels  and  amid  its  dangerous  reefs.  In  less 
than  half  that  time  Drake  had  passed  from  the 
Atlantic  to  the  Pacific. 

To  sail  English  ships  in  the  Pacific  waters  had 
been  his  eager  ambition  ;  and  it  was  now  fulfilled. 
But  he  had  also  imagined  it  possible  to  discover  a 
passage  from  sea  to  sea  on  the  northwest  of  the 
American  continent ;  and  he  knew  that  if  he  could 
make  such  a  discovery,  he  would  not  only  cover 
himself  with  glory,  but  would  bring  great  advan- 
tages to  England.  Accordingly,  when  he  found 
himself  in  the  Pacific,  his  first  thought  was  to  skirt 
the  American  coast  throughout  its  length,  and 
penetrate  northward  as  far  as  possible. 

The  voyage  along  the  South  American  shores 


THE  SEA-KING  OF  DEVON.  .I3I 

was  at  first  prosperous  and  rapid.  The  three  ships 
—the  "Golden  Hind,"  the  " Elizabeth,"  and  the 
"Marigold" — were  able  to  keep  near  together, 
and  in  two  days  two  hundred  miles  had  been  trav- 
ersed. But  on  the  third  day,  a  storm  of  wind  so 
violent  overtook  the  little  fleet,  that  it  was  not 
only  diverted  from  its  northerly  course,  but  was 
driven  rapidly  southward  again.  After  a  while,  the 
wind  changed,  and  the  fleet  once  more  advanced ; 
and  for  a  week  all  went  well. 

Then  for  the  second  time  the  elements  broke 
forth  with  renewed  fury.  The  ships  were  hurled 
hither  and  thither;  again  and  again  they  lost 
sight  of  each  other ;  masts  were  torn  from  the 
decks,  and  sails  torn  in  strips  and  shreds.  South- 
ward once  more  the  unfortunate  vessels  were 
driven;  it  was  several  days  before  the  "Golden 
Hind"  could  attempt  to  seek  a  refuge  by  the 
mainland.  When  she  did  so,  the  "Elizabeth" 
alone  followed  her.  The  "Marigold,"  driven  far 
out  to  sea  by  the  terrific  gale,  was  lost  to  sight, 
and  was  never  heard  of  again.  In  no  long  time 
Drake  found  himself  back  at  the  entrance  of  the 
Straits  of  Magellan.  It  seemed  as  if  the  supersti- 
tions which  he  had  heard  before  leaving  England 


133  drake: 

were  about  to  be  realized  ;  and  he  almost  despaired 
of  ever  achieving  his  purpose  of  crossing  the  Pa- 
cific. 

A  new  misfortune  added  to  the  rayless  gloom  of 
his  situation.  The  "  Elizabeth,"  the  only  remain- 
ing companion  of  the  "  Golden  Hind,"  one  morn- 
ing passed  within  the  Straits.  Drake  supposed 
that  she  had  only  gone  a  little  way  for  secure  har- 
borage, and  that,  when  the  storm  subsided,  she 
would  reappear.  Day  after  day  passed,  and  the 
"  Elizabeth  "  did  not  return.  Finally,  Drake  was 
forced  to  conclude  that  she  had  either  been  wrecked 
in  the  tortuous  channels  of  the  strait,  or  that  she 
had  deserted  him.  The  latter  conjecture  was  the 
true  one.  Captain  Winter,  who  commanded  the 
"  Elizabeth,"  had  secretly  resolved  to  abandon  the 
venture,  and  to  leave  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  to  its 
fate.  Against  this  his  crew,  of  stouter  heart  than 
himself,  vehemently  protested:  but  Winter  was 
obdurate.  The  *'  Elizabeth,"  after  resting  a  while 
in  a  pleasant  harbor,  where  the  sailors  regaled 
themselves  on  some  delicious  shell-fish  which  they 
found  near  the  shore,  set  out  to  traverse  the  straits 
eastward ;  and  after  a  long  voyage  across  the  At- 
lantic, reached  England  in  safety  in  the  following 
summer. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  1 33 

This  was  not  the  only  disaster  which  Drake  met 
with  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  Straits.  He 
had  with  the  "  Golden  Hind "  a  small  shallop, 
which  would  hold  eight  men,  and  could  be  used 
for  coasting  and  searching  for  harbors.  On  once 
more  setting  out,  the  ship  was  again  driven  south- 
ward by  the  fury  of  the  storms  which  continued 
to  burst  upon  it  in  quick  succession. 

At  last  he  succeeded  in  entering  the  channels 
between  the  groups  of  islands  which  are  called 
Terra  del  Fuego.  After  a  brief  rest,  he  once  more 
put  to  sea ;  but  still  was  driven  in  a  southerly  di- 
rection. In  one  of  the  tempests  the  shallop,  with 
eight  seamen  in  her,  separated  from  the  "  Golden 
Hind."  These  men  had  but  a  very  scant  supply 
of  provisions  ;  but  while  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  con- 
tinued to  be  carried  ever  southward,  the  shallop 
succeeded  in  regaining  the  straits. 

The  after  adventures  of  the  men  in  the  shallop 
were  thrilling.  They  soon  abandoned  all  hope  of 
ever  rejoining  the  "  Golden  Hind ; "  yet  what  could 
they  do,  with  their  frail  craft,  in  these  tempestuous 
waters  and  savage  regions  ?  In  desperation,  they 
grimly  resolved  that,  if  possible,  they  would  again 
enter  the  straits,  and  trust  to  chance  for  their 


134  DRAKS : 

safety.  After  many  cruel  hardships,  and  by  dint 
of  great  perseverance,  they  succeeded  in  reaching 
the  straits  ;  and,  favored  by  the  weather,  they 
safely  accomplished  its  passage.  In  a  few  weeks 
they  found  themselves  once  more  at  the  welcome 
haven  of  the  Rio  de  la  Plata,  on  the  Atlantic 
coast.  Here  they  put  in,  to  rest,  procure  food,  and 
repair  their  little  vessel. 

One  day,  six  of  the  party  entered  the  woods 
skirted  one  of  the  banks,  hoping  to  procure  some 
game,  while  the  other  two  remained  behind  to 
guard  the  camp  and  the  boat.  The  six  men  had 
not  gone  far  when  they  were  furiously  attacked 
by  a  band  of  natives,  who  fired  a  shower  of  arrows 
at  them.  So  well  directed  was  the  assault,  that 
every  one  of  the  Englishmen  was  wounded.  Four 
of  them  fell  upon  the  ground,  so  seriously  hurt 
that  they  could  not  move ;  and  they  were  speedily 
captured  by  the  natives,  and  taken  away  into  the 
interior.  The  other  two,  though  wounded  and 
bleeding,  managed  to  make  their  way  back  to  their 
companions.  But  the  natives,  not  content  with  their 
first  triumph,  lost  no  time  in  pursuing  these  two 
men.  Scarcely  had  they  reached  the  shore,  when 
the  Indians  poured  out  of  the  woods,  and  stormed 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  135 

the  party  with  their  arrows.  The  Englishmen 
succeeded  in  driving  their  assailants  back;  and 
jumping  into  the  shallop,  hastened  to  an  island 
some  miles  from  the  coast.  But  no  sooner  had 
they  reached  this  refuge,  than  the  two  who  had 
been  wounded,  died. 

Two  men  only  of  the  party  of  eight  now  sur- 
vived. They  were  sadly  considering  what  they 
should  do  next,  when,  on  the  next  morning,  a 
furious  storm  arose,  and  they  were  overwhelmed 
with  despair  to  see  their  shallop  dashed  to  pieces 
on  the  rocks.  They  were  now  imprisoned  on  the 
lonely  island,  with  no  prospect  of  ever  leaving 
it.  They  could  not  hope  that  any  ship  would 
come  that  way  and  rescue  them.  They  were  con- 
vinced that  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  had  foundered  in 
the  southern  billows ;  and  they  seemed  destined 
to  die  a  horrible  death  in  this  remote  and  savage 
solitude. 

They  searched  everywhere  for  springs  of  fresh 
water,  but  could  find  none ;  and,  while  they  managed 
to  secure  crabs,  eels,  and  fruit  for  food,  their  suffer- 
ings from  thirst  were  dreadful,  and  became  more 
unendurable  day  by  day.  At  last,  the  two  wander- 
ers resolved  that  they  could  no  longer  bear  their 


136  drake: 

situation.  They  made  up  their  minds  at  all  ha2> 
ards  to  reach  the  mainland,  or  perish  in  the  attempt. 
There,  the  savages  might  kill  them ;  but  it  was  bet- 
ter to  be  killed  than  to  die  of  the  lingering  and 
excruciating  pangs  of  thirst.  At  least,  if  they 
could  get  to  the  mainland,  they  would  find  fresh 
water ;  and,  whatever  might  happen  to  them  after- 
wards, they  would  enjoy  the  luxury  of  once  more 
quaffing  blessed  draughts  from  a  sparkling  spring. 

One  day,  they  were  rejoiced  to  find  a  long  plank, 
which  had  drifted  upon  the  beach.  It  was  ten 
feet  long,  and  two  wide.  Weak  as  they  were,  the 
men  managed  to  draw  it  up.  They  then  took  some 
sticks,  and  contrived  to  construct  a  very  rude  and 
uncertain  raft.  Upon  this  they  placed  such  small 
store  of  provisions  as  they  could  collect.  They 
kneeled  on  the  sand,  and  implored  God  to  protect 
them  in  the  desperate  venture  they  were  about  to 
undertake;  and  then,  with  the  uncouth  paddles 
they  had  made,  they  got  upon  the  raft,  pushed  it 
off,  and  committed  themselves  to  the  treacherous 
waters. 

They  could  see  the  forests  of  the  mainland  in  the 
dim,  hazy  distance,  but  what  perils  lay  between 
them  and  those  longed-for  shores  !  For  three  days 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  1 37 

and  two  nights  they  rocked  about  on  the  rough 
waves,  sometimes  becoming  so  wearied  with  their 
exertions  that  they  could  only  lie  down,  and  let 
the  poor  frail  raft  drift  where  it  would  ;  but  at  the 
end  of  that  time  they  found  themselves  close  to  the 
beach,  and  had  soon  crawled  exhausted  upon  it. 

*'At  our  first  coming  on  land,  "  says  one  of  them, 
Peter  Carder,  "  we  found  a  little  river  of  sweet  and 
pleasant  water,  where  William  Pitcher,  my  only 
comfort  and  companion,  although  I  dissuaded  him 
to  the  contrary,  overdrank  himself,  being  perished 
before  with  extreme  thirst ;  and  to  my  unspeakable 
grief  and  discomfort,  died  in  half  an  hour  in  my 
presence.  I  buried  him  as  well  as  I  could  in  the 
sand." 

Peter  Carder,  who  thus  described  the  death  of 
his  last  comrade,  was  now  alone  in  this  strange 
and  savage  land.  It  seemed  impossible  that  he 
should  ever  see  the  face  of  a  white  man  again,  or 
could  long  survive  the  rest  of  the  party.  But  he  kept 
up  a  stout  heart ;  and,  despite  the  deadly  ferocity 
of  the  natives,  who  had  killed  six  of  his  comrades 
already,  he  boldly  penetrated  the  country.  After 
many  stirring  adventures,  Peter  reached  the  inte- 
rior of  Brazil,  where  he  was  captured  and  enslaved 


138  drake: 

by  a  Portuguese  colony.  Nine  years  after,  he  suc- 
ceeded in  recovering  his  liberty  and  in  returning 
to  England,  where  he  was  received  by  the  Queen 
herself,  to  whom  he  related  his  singular  career. 

While  the  men  in  the  shallop  were  thus  meeting 
their  fate,  Drake  and  the  "Golden  Hind"  were 
still  drifting  southward.  He  had  at  last  reached 
the  islands  at  the  extreme  south  of  the  South 
American  continent ;  and  here,  near  the  last  of 
the  islands,  the  wind  and  waves  having  subsided,  he 
was  able  to  cast  anchor  in  a  deep  basin,  shel- 
tered by  a  range  of  lofty  cliffs.  Drake  landed 
upon  the  island,  and  rested  with  his  crew.  As 
soon  as  he  had  recovered  somewhat  from  the  ex- 
haustion of  the  voyage,  he  took  it  into  his  head  to 
explore  the  island.  Proceeding  to  its  southern- 
most extremity,  he  became  convinced  that,  beyond, 
there  was  no  further  land,  but  that  the  ocean 
rolled  thence  limitless  to  the  antarctic  pole.  This 
conviction  filled  him  with  exultant  pride.  He  ad- 
vanced to  the  southernmost  cliff,  cast  himself  at 
full  length  on  its  crest,  and  stretched  his  arms  and 
body  out  over  the  water  as  far  as  he  safely  could. 

When  he  returned  to  the  "Golden  Hind,"  one 
of  his  officers  asked  him,  — 


Drake  on  the  extremity  of  Cape  Horn.  — Page  138. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1 39 

"  Captain,  where  have  you  been  ? " 

**  Why,"  replied  Drake,  with  a  proud  smile,  "  I 
have  been  further  south  than  any  man  living.  I 
have  stood  on  the  southernmost  point  of  land  in 
the  world, known  or  likely  to  be  known."  He  had, 
indeed,  stood  on  the  very  extremity  of  Cape  Horn. 

Undaunted  by  his  disasters,  the  sturdy  navigator 
was  more  than  ever  resolved  to  search  for  the 
northwest  passage ;  and  after  naming  the  islands 
the  "  Elizabethides,"  in  loyal  honor  of  his  sover- 
eign, he  once  more  set  sail  northward.  Fortu- 
nately fair  winds  from  the  south  now  waved  him 
on  his  way.  The  stormy  season  seemed  to  have 
come  to  an  end ;  and  Drake  looked  forward  to 
fresh  adventures  with  willing  and  hopeful  heart. 

It  was  the  last  of  October  when  he  departed 
from  Cape  Horn.  In  a  little  less  than  a  month 
he  had  reached  the  coast  of  Chili,  and  was  near 
the  scenes  of  the  conquests  of  Pizarro.  A  harbor 
was  soon  found ;  and  from  his  deck  Drake  could 
espy,  on  the  sloping  hills  in  the  near  distance,  cattle 
and  sheep  grazing,  and  corn  and  potatoes  growing. 
The  natives  came  freely  to  the  shore,  and  received 
the  presents  which  Drake  lavished  upon  them  with 
every  appearance  of  delight  and  gratitude.     Sup- 


140  DRAKE  : 

posing  them  to  be  friendly,  he  took  a  boat,  and, 
with  several  sailors,  made  for  the  shore  for  the  pur- 
pose of  procuring  fresh  water.  Two  of  the  sailors 
jumped  out  of  the  boat,  and  were  walking  along 
the  sands,  when  they  were  suddenly  attacked  from 
an  ambush.  Those  who  remained  in  the  boat,  in- 
cluding Drake,  were  assailed  by  a  shower  of  jave- 
lins, stones,  and  arrows ;  and  before  they  could 
pull  away,  every  man  was  wounded.  Drake  himself 
received  an  arrow  in  his  cheek,  and  a  stone  in  the 
side  of  his  face ;  and  so  close  did  the  Indians  get 
to  the  boat,  that  they  were  able  to  snatch  away 
several  of  the  oars.  It  was  only  by  the  narrowest 
chance  that  the  occupants  of  the  boat  safely 
reached  the  "Golden  Hind." 

The  crew  of  the  ship  were  greatly  enraged  at 
this  unprovoked  assault ;  and  gathering  around 
Drake,  who  stood  on  the  deck  with  bleeding  face, 
they  exclaimed,  — 

"  Let  us  set  upon  them ! " 

"Nay,'*  replied  Drake,  quietly.  "These  poor 
wretches  doubtless  take  us  for  Spaniards ;  and 
since,  if  they  do,  they  would  be  right  in  having 
attacked  us,  we  must  not  punish  them  for  the  of- 
fence/' 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  I4I 

The  crew  were  appeased  by  these  wise  and  mod- 
erate words,  and  submitted  to  their  brave  captain's 
counsels. 

One  day,  not  long  after  this,  Drake  sent  out  a 
boat  to  reconnoitre  the  shore,  which,  in  the  part  of 
the  coast  where  they  now  were,  looked  inviting. 
This  boat  soon  returned,  bringing  with  it  a  fishing 
canoe,  with  a  native  in  it.  This  native,  at  first 
frightened  out  of  his  wits  (for  he  surmised  that  he 
had  fallen  into  the  hands  of  the  relentless  Span- 
iards), was  soon  reassured  on  learning  that  his 
captors  were  Englishmen.  Drake  made  him  sit 
down  on  the  deck  of  the  "Golden  Hind,"  and 
offered  him  refreshments  and  a  few  trifling  pres- 
ents. A  chopping  knife  and  a  piece  of  linen  cloth 
especially  pleased  him;  and  when  Drake  asked 
him  to  go  ashore  with  one  of  the  ship's  boats,  and 
prevail  on  his  countrymen  to  sell  them  some  pro- 
visions, he  promptly  assented.  In  this  way  Drake 
procured  a  goodly  supply  of  eggs  and  fowl ;  and  a 
fat  hog  was  also  brought  on  board.  With  the  re- 
turning boat  came  a  native  of  high  rank,  who,  on 
learning  that  the  voyagers  were  not  Spaniards,  but 
men  who  hated  the  Spaniards,  had  asked  to  be 
taken  to  the  ship.      This  native  proved  to  be 


142  DRAKE : 

a  valuable  friend  to  Drake  and  his  companions. 
After  receiving  the  best  dishes  which  the  "  Golden 
Hind"  afforded,  he  turned  to  Drake  and  said  in 
Spanish : 

"  If  you  wish,  captain,  I  will  gladly  serve  as  your 
guide.  I  will  conduct  you  to  the  rich  port  of  Val- 
paraiso. It  is  not  many  leagues  southward  of  this. 
I  can  tell  you  that  in  that  port  lies  a  great  Spanish 
galleon,  richly  laden  with  treasures.  I  should  be 
glad,  and  so  would  my  countrymen,  to  see  you 
capture  her,  and  seize  her  precious  cargo." 

Drake  heartily  thanked  his  swarthy  friend,  and 
at  once  resolved  to  turn  his  news  to  good  account. 
The  next  day,  the  "Golden  Hind"  spread  all  sail 
and  passed  rapidly  down  the  coast.  On  arriving 
o£E  the  port  of  Valparaiso,  Drake  saw  at  once  that 
the  native  had  told  him  the  truth.  There  lay  the 
big  galleon,  her  Spanish  flag  floating  in  the  breeze, 
and  her  huge  hulk  gently  swaying  in  the  harbor. 
Before  the  Spaniards  were  aware  of  their  peril,  the 
"Golden  Hind"  had  swooped  down  upon  the  ship. 
She  was  captured  almost  without  shedding  a  drop 
of  blood  Drake  and  a  number  of  his  men  boarded 
her,  secured  her  crew  and  searched  for  her  treasure. 
To  his  surprise  and  delight,  he  found  that  she  con- 


THE    SEA-KING    OF    DEVON.  I43 

tained  over  one  hundred  and  twenty  thousand  dol- 
lars in  gold  pieces,  besides  jewels,  goods,  and  about 
two  thousand  large  jars  of  Chili  wine.  These  he 
appropriated  without  the  least  compunction:  and 
having  transferred  his  plunder  to  the  "Golden 
Hind,"  he  left  the  Spanish  ship  where  she  was. 

A  bounteous  and  joyous  feast  on  board  the 
"Golden  Hind"  followed  this  brilliant  capture. 
The  officers  and  men  revelled  in  the  luxuries  which 
they  had  long  been  without,  and  the  sweet  Chilian 
(vine  flowed  like  water. 

Drake  resolved  not  to  leave  Valparaiso  before 
entering  the  town  and  searching  for  more  booty. 
The  people  hurried  out  into  the  country  when 
they  saw  the  Englishmen  landing  from  their 
boats ;  and  in  the  deserted  houses,  and  the  small, 
solitary  church,  which  stood  in  their  midst,  Drake 
found  many  objects  of  gold  and  silver,  besides 
welcome  additions  to  his  supply  of  provisions. 

Drake  then  generously  rewarded  the  noble 
native  who  had  guided  him  to  so  much  good  for- 
tune. He  sent  a  boat  to  put  the  native  on  shore 
at  the  place  where  he  desired  to  land,  and  as  he 
took  his  departure,  Drake  warmly  embraced  him. 
The  native  departed  with  the  most  eager  protesta* 


144  DRAKE : 

tions  of  gratitude  and  friendship  for  his  Enghsh 
benefactors. 

On  continuing  his  voyage  along  the  South  Ameri- 
can  coast  Drake  met  with  many  adventures,  suf- 
fered some  mishaps,  and  had  occasional  strokes  of 
good  fortune.  He  had  not  yet  given  up  all  hope 
of  finding  the  "Marigold,"  and  the  "Elizabeth," 
and  imagined  that  they,  as  well  as  he,  had  sailed 
northward.  As  the  "Golden  Hind"  drew  too 
much  water  to  hug  the  coast,  he  caused  one  of  his 
frame-works  to  be  put  together  into  a  pinnace; 
and  this  kept  near  the  shore,  in  search  of  the  lost 
ships.  While  the  pinnace  was  being  constructed 
near  a  point  of  land  where  the  "  Golden  Hind " 
had  been  anchored  for  the  purpose,  a  party  which 
had  gone  a  little  inland  to  procure  fresh  water, 
was  suddenly  attacked  by  a  body  of  Spanish  cavalry 
and  foot  soldiers.  They  managed  to  escape,  how- 
ever, with  the  loss  of  one  man. 

On  landing  at  a  place  called  Tarapaza,  further 
up  the  coast,  some  of  the  men,  having  gone 
ashore,  suddenly  came  upon  a  Spaniard  lying  sound 
asleep  on  the  banks  of  a  small  stream.  By  his 
side,  they  were  surprised  to  find  thirteen  heavy 
bars  of  solid  silver.     He  and  his  treasure  were  at 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  I4S 

once  captured.  Going  a  little  further  inland,  they 
met  another  Spaniard  and  a  native  boy,  driving 
some  sheep.  Upon  the  back  of  the  sheep  were 
some  heavy  bags,  which,  when  the  Englishmen 
opened  them,  proved  also  to  contain  solid  silver 
bars.  All  this  treasure  was  speedily  conveyed  to 
the  "  Golden  Hind." 

A  few  days  after,  the  voyagers  reached  a  port 
caUed  Arica,  from  which  stretched  out  a  very 
lovely  and  fertile  valley  which  charmed  the  eyes 
of  Drake  and  his  companions.  Two  or  three  small 
Spanish  barks,  whose  crews  were  all  unsuspectingly 
on  shore,  lay  in  the  roadstead ;  and  these  the  Eng- 
lish speedily  emptied  of  all  their  contents  which 
were  worth  taking  away.  The  town  was  a  small 
one,  containing  only  twenty  houses;  "which  we 
would  have  ransacked,"  says  one  of  the  voyagers, 
"  if  our  company  had  been  better  and  more  numer- 
ous ;  but  our  general,  contented  with  the  spoil  of 
the  ships,  put  to  sea,  and  sailed  for  Lima." 

Drake  had  good  reason  for  this  haste.  While  at 
Arica  he  had  met  with  a  very  intelligent  native, 
who,  like  all  the  natives  along  this  coast,  detested 
and  feared  the  Spaniards.  This  man  had  told  him 
that  a  Spanish  galleon,  laden  with  a  most  valuable 


146  DRAKE : 

cargo,  was  passing  slowly  up  the  coast.  To  catch 
up  with  her  and  capture  her  was  now  his  eager 
object.     Calling  his  crew  together  he  said: 

"  My  men,  there  is  a  great  galleon  ahead,  with  a 
vast  treasure.  We  must  overtake  her  and  possess 
ourselves  of  her  booty.  Whichever  man  of  you 
first  espies  her,  shall  receive  from  me  a  heavy  gold 
chain  and  grateful  thanks." 

The  sailors  one  and  all  kept  vigilant  watch.  At 
last,  one  morning,  just  as  Drake  was  going  upon 
deck,  his  brother,  John  Drake,  rushed  breathlessly 
to  him,  and  pointing  to  the  dim  northern  horizon, 
exclaimed  : 

"There,  master,  is  the  Spanish  galleon!" 

Drake  hastened  forward,  and  sure  enough,  there 
were  her  sails,  just  visible  against  the  clear  morn- 
ing sky.  John  Drake  was  promptly  rewarded  with 
the  gold  chain.  The  Spanish  ship  was  progressing 
slowly  along  the  coast.  The  "  Golden  Hind  "  put 
on  all  sail,  and  in  a  few  hours  had  almost  caught 
up  with  her  intended  prize.  The  Spaniards,  never 
once  surmising  that  any  English  ship  could  be 
sailing  in  that  part  of  the  world,  took  the  "  Golden 
Hind"  for  one  of  their  own  craft;  and,  instead  of 
making  haste  to  escape,  slackened  their  leisurely 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  I47 

Speed,  and  signalled  to  the  officers  of  the  "  Golden 
Hind"  to  come  on  board.  When  they  discovered 
their  mistake,  it  was  too  late  to  resist  their  assail- 
ants. Drake,  with  a  strong  body  of  full-armed 
men,  boarded  the  galleon,  seized  her  crew,  placed 
them  under  the  hatches,  and  quietly  took  pos- 
session of  her  rich  stores  of  silver  and  gold. 
Then,  putting  the  Spaniards  ashore,  he  set  the 
galleon,  unarmed,  adrift,  and  she  was  probably 
dashed  to  pieces  among  the  breakers  in  the  next 
storm. 

The  "Golden  Hind"  was  now  stored  with  an 
abundant  treasure,  and  a  more  than  ample  supply 
of  provisions.  Drake  began  to  think  of  returning 
home.  He  had  gained  wealth  for  himself  and  all 
his  companions,  and  had  fulfilled  his  ambition  of 
passing  through  the  Straits  of  Magellan,  and 
sailing  an  English  ship  in  the  waters  of  the 
Pacific.  There  seemed  to  be  nothing  more  to  gain 
by  remaining  in  these  remote  regions.  So  he  re- 
solved that,  as  the  Spaniards,  now  fully  aware  of 
his  presence  on  the  western  coast,  would  take  care 
that  he  should  not  return  homeward  by  the  way  of 
the  straits,  he  would  lose  no  time  in  seeking  a 
way  back  to  England  by  passing  round  the  Ameri- 


148  DRAKE  : 

can  continent  by  the  northwest.  He  little  thought 
how  long  it  would  be  before  he  again  set  foot  on 
his  native  land ;  or  how  many  thrilling  incidents 
and  narrow  escapes  would  happen  before  he  again 
beheld  the  white  cliffs  of  old  England. 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  149 


CHAPTER  X. 

ADVENTURES   WITH  THE   INDIANS. 

INWARD  and  northward,  under  full  sail,  sped 
the  sturdy  ship.  Still  bent  on  plunder 
where  it  could  be  seized,  Drake's  first 
destination  was  the  port  of  Lima,  the  Peruvian  cap- 
ital, which  had  long  been  in  Spanish  hands.  He 
was  elated  and  encouraged  by  his  previous  bright 
fortune  in  making  captures,  and  began  to  think 
that  nothing  could  resist  his  bold  attack. 

He  knew  that  a  messenger  had  started  from 
Valparaiso  by  land,  to  carry  news  of  his  presence 
on  the  coast  to  the  Spaniards  in  Lima.  But  he 
was  sure  that,  being  on  the  water,  he  could  outstrip 
the  messenger,  who  would  be  forced  to  travel 
through  a  savage  country,  with  few  roads  and  amid 
many  perils.  He  succeeded,  indeed,  in  reaching 
Lima  first ;  but  when  he  got  there,  he  found  that 
the  plunder  fell  far  short  of  his  hopes.  There  were 
many  Spanish  vessels  in  port,  and  being  taken  by 
surprise,  they  were  easily  boarded ;  but,  aside  from 


150  DRAKE : 

a  few  cargoes  of  cloth  and  general  merchandize, 
they  proved  to  contain  little  worth  seizing. 

The  Spaniards  at  Lima  at  first  supposed  that 
the  "Golden  Hind"  was  a  Spanish  vessel,  which 
had  been  taken  by  some  Spanish  pirates,  and  was 
engaged  in  piratical  depredations.  The  governor 
therefore  made  all  haste  to  pursue,  and,  if  possible, 
capture  her.  He  never  imagined  it  possible  for  an 
English  vessel  to  pass  the  Straits  of  Magellan. 

While  he  was  making  his  preparations,  however, 
the  messenger  from  Valparaiso  arrived  and  told 
his  story.  The  discovery  that  the  "Golden  Hind" 
was  English  inspired  the  governor  to  redouble  his 
exertions.  He  soon  raised  a  force  of  two  thousand 
horse  and  foot  soldiers,  and  hastened  at  their  head 
to  the  port.  Out  in  the  offing  lay  the  "  Golden 
Hind,"  becalmed  and  unable  to  sail.  Two  Spanish 
ships  were  at  once  made  ready,  and  two  hundred 
soldiers  were  put  on  board  of  them.  As  these 
ships  raised  their  sails  and  glided  out  of  the  har- 
bor, the  capture  of  Drake  seemed  inevitable. 
But  at  this  very  moment  a  welcome  gale  sprang 
up  from  the  south.  The  sails  of  the  "Golden 
Hind  "  bulged  out  and  filled  ;  and  the  pursuers,  to 
their  dismay  and   rage,  saw  her  rapidly  coursing 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  I5I 

northward.  Drake  perceived  that  if  the  Spanish 
ships  caught  up  with  him,  he  would  have  no  chance. 
He  could  not  hope  to  encounter  such  an  array. 
His  only  safety  was  in  flight. 

Hour  after  hour  the  pursuit  went  on.  Sometimes 
the  Spanish  ships  gained  rapidly  on  the  "  Golden 
Hind,"  and  seemed  about  to  press  upon  her  sides. 
Once  or  twice  they  came  near  enough  to  do  her 
some  damage  with  their  shots.  Then  she  would 
slip  away  from  them,  and  leave  them  far  behind. 

Perhaps  she  might,  after  all,  have  fallen  into 
their  hands,  had  not  the  Spanish  governor  neglect- 
ed a  very  necessary  precaution.  Supposing  that 
he  could  capture  the  English  ship  before  she  could 
get  a  league  away  from  port,  he  had  not  thought 
of  storing  his  vessels  with  provisions.  The  pursuit 
lasted  so  long  that  his  soldiers  became  well  nigh 
famished.  If  he  went  on,  starvation  must  in  the 
end  defeat  his  hopes.  So  he  reluctantly  gave  the 
order  to  abandon  the  pursuit  of  the  "  Golden  Hind," 
and  to  return  to  port.  The  governor,  on  again 
reaching  Lima,  did  not  yet  give  up  all  hope  of  tak- 
ing the  English  buccaneer.  He  at  once  caused 
three  more  ships  to  be  equipped,  manned,  and  dis- 
patched  in   pursuit.     But   though  they  made  all 


152  drake: 

haste,  the  Spanish  ships  failed  to  overtake  the 
flying  vessel. 

Drake  soon  found  himself  north  of  the  South 
American  continent,  and  nearing  the  rugged  coast 
of  Nicaragua.  He  continued  to  take  many  prizes  ; 
and,  as  he  had  now  an  abundance  of  riches,  he  only 
selected,  for  plunder,  the  most  valuable  contents 
of  the  vessels  which  he  captured.  He  no  longer 
robbed  them  of  their  stores  of  provisions,  but  sat- 
isfied himself  with  the  gold  and  silver,  the  fine 
silks  and  linen,  which  they  were  found  to  contain. 
Meanwhile  the  little  pinnace  did  good  service 
along  the  coast,  by  bringing  to  the  "  Golden  Hind,'* 
from  time  to  time,  such  luxuries  as  butter,  honey, 
and  fresh  fowl  and  eggs.  On  one  of  the  ships 
which  he  captured,  Drake  was  pleased  to  find  a 
number  of  charts,  which  gave  him  a  more  accurate 
idea  of  the  seas  in  which  he  was  sailing  than  he  had 
before ;  and  these  proved  daily  of  great  service  to 
him. 

Every  now  and  then  he  landed  his  men  and  at- 
tacked the  coastwise  towns ;  and  in  some  of  them 
obtained  valuable  booty.  But  as  he  was  now  in 
search  of  the  northwest  passage  of  which  he 
dreamed,  his  stay  in  each  place  was  very  brief. 


THE   SEA-KING    OF   DEVON.  I53 

It  was  in  the  middle  of  April  that  Drake,  leaving 
the  coast,  stretched  out  to  sea,  determined  now  to 
no  longer  delay  or  interrupt  an  attempt  to  find  the 
northwest  passage.  He  resolved  that  he  would 
not  again  seek  land,  until  by  stress  of  weather  or 
want  of  provisions  or  water,  he  should  find  himself 
forced  to  do  so.  For  more  than  five  weeks  the 
"  Golden  Hind "  sailed  on  to  the  northwestward, 
without  once  coming  in  sight  of  land.  Drake 
imagined  that  the  Pacific  stretched  in  an  un- 
broken sweep  northward  to  the  limit  of  the  North 
American  continent,  where  he  expected  to  find  his 
passage  around  it  to  the  Atlantic  again.  He  did 
not  know  that  the  coast  of  the  continent,  instead 
of  rising  directly  northward,  stretched  off  at  a 
wide  angle  to  the  north-westward.  He  had  there- 
fore directed  his  course  more  and  more  in  a  north- 
erly direction  as  he  proceeded. 

But  on  the  fifth  of  June,  he  was  surprised  to  see 
land  off  at  his  right ;  and  on  changing  his  course, 
and  coming  near,  found  it  to  be,  not  a  large  island, 
as  he  at  first  surmised,  but  the  coast  of  the  main 
land.  The  region  thereabout  was  bleak  and  for- 
bidding. The  coast  was  low  and  open.  The  hills 
which  he  saw  in  the  distance  were  covered  with 


154  drake: 

snow.  Chilly,  dismal  fogs  overspread  the  cheerless 
landscape.  The  winds  were  fierce  and  cutting, 
and  the  intense  cold  caused  keen  suffering  among 
the  crew.  Such  was  the  aspect  of  the  coast  of 
what  we  now  call  California  —  in  these  days  a 
smiling,  beautiful,  fruitful  region  —  in  the  mid- 
summer of  1579.  After  some  time  spent  in 
searching  for  a  harbor,  one  was  found  which  must 
have  been  some  distance  south  of  what  we  call 
the  Golden  Gate,  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  of 
San  Francisco.  Here  was  good  anchorage  and 
fair  shelter ;  and  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  was  moored 
off  a  rock-bound  shore. 

No  sooner  had  she  cast  anchor  than  a  number 
of  Indians,  looking  very  much  as  our  Western  In- 
dians do  nowadays,  flocked  down  and  came  close 
to  the  ship.  They  did  not  seem  to  entertain  the 
least  fear  or  suspicion  of  the  strangers.  Several 
of  the  Indians  went  to  the  ship  in  a  canoe,  and 
without  any  hesitation  drew  up  close  under  her 
sides.  Then  one  of  them,  taller  in  stature  and 
more  gorgeously  arrayed  and  tattooed  than  the 
rest,  got  up  in  the  canoe  and  began  a  long  speech  in 
his  native  language.  He  spoke  with  great  dignity 
and  solemnity.    Drake,  of  course,  could  not  under- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1 55 

Stand  anything  he  said  ;  but  he  rightly  guessed 
that  the  Indian  was  making  him  an  address  of 
welcome,  and  an  offer  of  friendship.  This  was 
confirmed  when,  the  next  day,  the  stately  savage 
returned  to  the  ship,  and  with  much  ceremony, 
deposited  a  bunch  of  black  feathers  at  Drake's 
feet. 

The  Englishmen  soon  found  themselves  on  very 
easy  and  familiar  terms  with  the  Indians.  So  sim- 
ple and  guileless  were  the  manners  of  these  people, 
that  the  adventurers,  in  spite  of  their  experience 
of  the  sly  perfidy  of  the  South  American  aborigines, 
freely  trusted  their  persons  among  them.  They 
observed  with  curiosity  that  the  men,  for  the  most 
part,  went  completely  naked ;  and  made  up  for 
the  want  of  clothing,  by  painting  their  faces  and 
bodies  all  over  with  strange  characters  and  in  bril- 
liant colors,  and  covering  their  heads  with  long 
plumes  of  gorgeous  feathers.  The  squaws  wore 
petticoats  made  of  twisted  rushes,  and  deerskins 
around  their  shoulders.  Among  other  presents 
brought  by  these  simple  natives  to  the  ship,  was  a 
basket  made  of  rushes,  in  which  were  pieces  of 
dried  herb,  which  they  called  **  tabak."  It  proved 
to  be  what  we  know  as  tobacco ;  but  neither  Drake 


156  DRAKE  : 

nor  his  men  knew  the  uses  to  which  tobacco  has 
been  put  by  later  generations.  Drake  was  sur- 
prised to  find  that,  while  these  Indians  were 
lavish  with  their  gifts,  they  for  some  reason  ap- 
peared  unwilling  to  receive  any  presents  from  the 
new  comers. 

Three  days  after  Drake's  arrival  in  this  harbor, 
a  mishap  occurred  which,  if  the  Indians  had  proved 
treacherous,  would  have  resulted  in  the  destruction 
of  the  voyagers.  The  "Golden  Hind'*  sprang  a 
leak.  It  was  necessary  without  delay  to  bring  her 
to  anchor  in  more  shallow  water,  and  nearer  to  the 
shore.  This,  of  course,  put  her  at  the  mercy  of  the 
natives.  Drake  at  once  took  his  measures  to  save 
his  crew  and  cargo,  and  repair  the  damage.  Men 
were  sent  on  shore  to  erect  tents  and  provide  for 
their  defence  by  erecting  a  rude  stone  wall  around 
them.  Fortunately  the  ship  was  so  moored  that 
she  could  not  sink ;  and  the  cargo  and  provisions 
were  safely  landed  and  stored 

While  the  adventurers  were  employed  in  this 
task,  they  suddenly  heard  a  great  clamor  in  the 
brush  near  by ;  and  presently  forth  issued  a  great 
crowd  of  Indians,  uttering  loud  yells,  and  bran- 
dishing their  hatchets  and  their  lances.    The  Eng- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1 57 

Iishmen  were  terror-stricken  ;  for  they  thought  that, 
after  all,  the  Indians  had  turned  traitors,  and  were 
about  to  precipitate  themselves  upon  them.  But 
they  were  soon  reassured.  The  Indians,  when  thef 
had  come  within  a  short  distance  of  the  camp,  sud 
denly  stopped,  and  gathered  close  together  in  i 
semicircle.  Then  they  made  many  eager  gesticula- 
tions, from  which  the  Englishmen  at  once  perceived 
that  their  intentions  were  anything  but  hostile. 
They  seemed,  on  the  contrary,  to  be  struck  with 
awe,  and  assumed  an  attitude  as  if  of  worship  and 
admiration  at  the  marvellous  skill  of  the  strangers. 
Drake  boldly  advanced  to  them,  and  made  them 
signs  to  lay  aside  their  weapons.  They  caught 
his  meaning  at  once ;  and  assuming  a  posture  of 
submission,  laid  all  their  arrows,  hatchets,  and 
lances  on  the  ground  behind  them.  More  and 
more  Indians  kept  coming  to  the  spot,  and  as  they 
came,  laid  aside  their  weapons,  and  gazed  with 
respectful  curiosity  at  the  operations  of  the 
English. 

In  no  long  time  Drake  was  able  to  make  them 
understand  his  motions  and  signs.  He  told  them 
in  this  way  that  the  English  were  not  gods,  as  they 
seemed  to  suppose,  but  men  like  themselves.     He 


158  drake: 

at  last  persuaded  them  to  take  presents  from  him ; 
and  showing  them  some  suits  of  clothes,  instructed 
them  how  to  put  them  on ;  whereupon  they  showed 
many  signs  of  delight.  The  Indians  were  resolved 
not  to  be  outdone  in  generosity,  and  kept  bringing 
into  camp  a  great  variety  of  articles  of  curious 
workmanship.  Among  them  were  huge  bunches 
of  feathers,  skilfully  bound  together  with  strings 
made  of  rushes,  finely  woven  network,  quivers 
adorned  with  bright-colored  feathers,  and  many 
rare  and  beautiful  skins. 

Then  they  invited  Drake  and  his  comrades  to  go 
and  see  their  habitations  ;  an  invitation  which  was 
eagerly  accepted.  The  English  found  that  their 
copper-colored  friends  dwelt  in  a  kind  of  holes, 
dug  in  the  earth,  and  surmounted  by  curious 
wooden  spire-like  roofs.  The  roofs  were  covered 
with  turf  so  as  to  protect  the  inmates  from  rain. 
The  dwellings  had  but  a  single  opening,  which  served 
both  for  a  door  and  a  chimney  ;  to  enter  it,  one 
had  to  creep  in  on  his  hands  and  knees.  Their 
beds  consisted  of  rushes  spread  upon  the  bare 
ground  ;  and  they  built  their  fires  in  the  centre  of 
their  huts,  lying  in  a  circle  around  it.  The  adven- 
turers were  amused  to  observe  with  what  submis- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  IJ9 

sion  and  obedience  the  squaws  served  their  hus- 
bands.  The  men  were  indolent,  but  the  women 
were  active  and  skilful  in  their  domestic  duties. 

Many  of  the  doings  and  customs  of  the  Indians 
were  a  source  of  amusement  to  Drake  and  his  men. 
One  morning,  a  large  crowd  of  them  appeared  on 
the  summit  of  a  hill  which  overlooked  the  English 
camp.  A  tall  and  fantastically  dressed  Indian 
stood  forward  in  front  of  the  rest,  and  stretching 
his  arms  towards  the  camp,  began  a  long,  solemn 
oration.  His  voice  was  almost  a  roar,  so  loud  was 
it ;  and  as  he  spoke  he  made  many  violent  ges- 
tures. He  talked  so  fast,  moreover,  that  he  had  to 
stop  very  often  to  catch  his  breath.  As  soon  as 
he  had  finished,  the  rest  began  to  bow  their  bodies 
almost  to  the  ground,  uttering  at  the  same  time 
a  loud  and  prolonged  "  Oh ! "  Then,  carefully  de- 
positing their  weapons  on  the  crest  of  the  hill,  the 
men  slowly  descended  it,  while  the  women  and  chil- 
dren remained  behind. 

As  they  reached  the  camp,  the  Englishmen  per- 
ceived that  each  one  of  them  had  in  his  hand  a 
present ;  and  these  gifts  they  laid  at  the  feet  of 
the  strangers  with  every  token  of  the  profoundest 
reverence.    While  this  was  being  done,  the  women 


l6o  DRAKE : 

on  top  of  the  hill  began  a  series  of  the  most  sin- 
gular antics.  They  writhed  about,  and  clutched 
their  long  black  hair ;  they  cried  and  shrieked  pite- 
ously;  they  scratched  their  dark  cheeks  till  the 
blood  streamed  on  their  breasts ;  they  tore  off  the 
skins  which  covered  their  shoulders ;  and  casting 
themselves  suddenly  on  the  ground,  furiously  lashed 
themselves  about  among  the  stones  and  briars. 

Drake  soon  discovered  that  all  this  commotion 
was  intended  as  an  act  of  worship.  The  Indians, 
in  spite  of  all  he  had  told  them,  still  believed  that 
the  English  were  gods,  and  took  this  violent  way 
of  testifying  their  faith.  When  they  had  ceased 
their  cries  and  contortions,  Drake  called  upon  all 
his  company  to  kneel  in  prayer;  "and  by  signs 
in  lifting  up  our  eyes  and  hands  to  heaven,"  says 
one  of  the  voyagers,  "  we  signified  unto  them  that 
that  God  whom  we  did  serve,  and  whom  they  ought 
to  worship,  was  above.  In  the  time  of  which  pray- 
ers, singing  of  psalms,  and  reading  of  certain  chap- 
ters of  the  Bible,  they  sat  very  attentively ;  and  at 
the  end  of  every  pause,  with  one  voice  still  cried, 
*  Oh ! '  greatly  rejoicing  in  our  exercises.  They 
took  such  pleasure  in  our  singing  of  psalms,  that 
whensoever  they  resorted  to  us  their  first  request 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  l6l 

was  commonly  this,  *  Gnaah ! '  by  which  they  en- 
treated that  we  would  sing." 

Not  long  after  these  events,  the  voyagers  re- 
ceived a  visit  from  the  king  of  this  tribe,  who 
dwelt  some  distance  in  the  interior.  The  king 
had  at  first  feared  to  go  to  the  English  camp,  lest 
they  should  capture  him  and  plunder  his  dominions. 
But  his  fears  were  allayed  by  the  friendly  treatment 
of  his  subjects  ;  and  he  descended  the  hill  in  great 
state,  and  surrounded  by  a  long  train  of  his  princi- 
pal men. 

Foremost  in  this  motley  procession  marched 
a  very  tall  Indian  who  solemnly  bore  the  royal 
mace,  which  was  rudely  carved  in  black  wood, 
and  was  four  or  five  feet  long.  On  the  mace  were 
hung  two  curious-looking  crowns  and  three  long 
chains.  The  crowns  were  of  knit-work,  in  which 
were  wrought  feathers  fantastically  arranged.  The 
chains  were  fashioned  from  bone,  and  were  made 
in  small  links.  Just  behind  this  Indian,  who 
seemed  to  be  a  sort  of  marshal,  came  the  copper- 
colored  monarch  himself,  wearing  upon  his  head  a 
knitted  cap,  and  on  his  shoulder  a  long,  glistening 
skin,  which  extended  to  his  waist.  Around  him 
moved    his    body-guard,   consisting    of    tall    and 


1 62  DRAKE  : 

brawny  Indians,  wearing  vari-colored  skins,  and 
bearing  weapons  in  their  hands  ;  while  their  heads 
fairly  bristled  with  white,  red,  and  deep-blue 
feathers.  After  the  guard,  flocked  a  host  of  In- 
dians of  the  commoner  sort,  many  of  them  being 
completely  naked,  and  their  long,  straight,  black 
hair  being  gathered  in  a  thick  bunch  at  the  back 
of  the  head.  The  faces  of  this  quaint  multitude 
shone  with  paint  of  every  color,  daubed  on  in  the 
most  grotesque  and  uncouth  lines  and  figures. 
The  women  carried  round  baskets,  full  of  roots 
and  herbs. 

Drake  took  the  precaution  to  order  his  men 
to  arm  themselvej>,  lest  by  any  chance  foul  play 
might  be  intended.  He  caused  them  to  stand  in 
close  ranks,  and  to  await  the  coming  of  the  king. 
As  the  dark  potentate  descended  the  hill,  he  and 
all  his  attendants  made  a  profound  bow.  Then  he 
turned  and  muttered  something  to  his  marshal, 
who  repeated  the  unintelligible  words  in  a  loud 
voice  and  with  many  gestures.  The  marshal 
ended  this  harangue  with  a  weird  song,  which  he 
bellowed  forth  at  the  top  of  his  lungs ;  at  the 
same  time  prancing  around  with  many  strange 
antics.     Pretty  soon  the  entire  multitude  of  In- 


THE  SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  163 

dians  began  to  dance,  in  that  manner  approaching 
Drake  and  his  comrades ;  and,  being  invited  by 
Drake's  signs,  they  fearlessly  entered  the  enclosure. 
On  being  seated  within,  the  Indian  king  pro- 
ceeded, with  a  long  oration,  to  offer  Drake  the 
friendship  of  his  kingdom,  and  even  declared  that 
the  Indians  should  become  the  vassals  of  the  Eng- 
lish. He  said  that  the  Englishmen's  God  should 
be  his  God  also.  Then  rising,  he  began  to  caper 
and  dance  around  Drake,  and  the  other  Indians 
followed  his  example.  The  king  put  a  crown 
upon  Drake's  head,  and  threw  one  of  his  heavy 
chains  around  his  neck.  This  strange  ceremony 
over,  the  royal  party  left  the  camp  ;  and  as,  in  the 
fast-deepening  twilight,  they  swarmed  up  the  hill, 
they  began  once  more  to  shriek  and  groan,  and 
utter  loud  and  piercing  yells,  until  their  hoarse 
voices  became  faint  in  the  distance. 


164  DRAKE : 


CHAPTER  XL 

DRAKE   CROSSES   THE   PACIFIC. 

I  RAKE'S  stay  among  these  North  Amer- 
ican Indians,  who  inhabited  what  we 
call  California,  was  full  of  pleasant  and 
interesting  events.  The  more  he  saw  of  this 
simple,  savage  folk,  the  more  he  liked  their 
ways  and  character.  They  freely  came  to  the 
English  with  all  their  troubles,  for  they  believed 
the  strangers  to  be  all-knowing.  In  illness,  they 
repaired  to  the  camp  to  be  cured,  and  begged 
that  the  Englishmen  would  touch  or  blow  upon 
their  diseased  parts,  having  all  faith  that  this 
would  restore  them  to  health  again.  But  the  Eng- 
lishmen disabused  them  of  this  idea,  and  showed 
them  that  lotions  and  plasters  were  much  more 
effective. 

After  a  while,  not  a  day  passed  that  more  or  less 
Indians  were  not  hanging  about  the  camp ;  and  on 
every  third  day  they  came  in  a  multitude,  bringing 
their  quaint  gifts  and  performing  their  ceremonies 
of  reverence.    Often  they  joined  the  adventurers  in 


THE  SEA-KING  OF  DEVON.  165 

their  meals,  taking  especial  delight  in  the  cooked 
fish  and  clams  which  daily  supplied  the  table  of 
the  camp. 

The  Englishmen  narrowly  observed  their  habits 
and  customs ;  and  one  of  them  thus  set  down 
what  he  noted  concerning  their  characteristics : 
*'  They  are  a  people,"  he  wrote,  "  of  a  tractable, 
free  and  loving  nature,  without  guile  or  treachery. 
Their  bows  and  arrows  (their  principal  weapons, 
and  almost  all  their  wealth)  they  use  very  skilfully  ; 
but  yet  do  no  very  great  harm  with  them,  being  by 
reason  of  their  weakness  more  fit  for  children  than 
for  men  ;  for  they  send  the  arrows  neither  far  off, 
nor  with  any  great  force.  Yet  the  men  are  com- 
monly so  strong  of  body,  that  that  which  two  or 
three  of  our  men  could  hardly  bear,  one  of  them 
would  take  upon  his  back,  and  without  trouble 
take  it  easily  away,  up  hill  and  down  hill  an  English 
mile  together.  They  are  also  exceedingly  swift  in 
running,  and  of  long  continuance;  and  are  so 
accustomed  to  it  that  they  seldom  walk,  but  for 
the  most  part  run.  One  thing  we  observed  in 
them  with  admiration :  that,  if  at  any  time  they 
chanced  to  see  a  fish  so  near  the  shore  that  they 
might  reach  the  place  without  swimming,  they 
would  never,  or  very  seldom,  miss  catching  it." 


1 66  DRAKE : 

The  same  voyager  described  the  manner  in 
which  the  Indians  lived,  and  the  features  of  the 
country  in  that  vicinity.  '*  Our  general,"  he  says, 
"with  his  gentlemen  and  many  of  his  company, 
made  a  journey  up  into  the  land  to  see  the  man- 
ner of  their  dwellings,  and  to  be  better  acquainted 
with  the  nature  and  commodities  of  the  country. 
Their  houses  were  many  of  them  in  one  place, 
making  several  villages  here  and  there.  The  coun- 
try inland  we  found  to  be  very  different  from  the 
shore ;  a  goodly  country  with  a  fruitful  soil,  stored 
with  many  blessings  fit  for  the  use  of  man.  Infinite 
was  the  multitude  of  large  and  fat  deer  which  we 
saw  by  thousands  in  herds ;  besides  a  multitude  of 
a  strange  kind  of  conies,  by  far  exceeding  the  deer 
in  number.  The  heads  and  bodies  of  these  conies 
were  but  small ;  their  tails,  like  the  tail  of  a  rat, 
very  long ;  and  their  feet  like  the  paws  of  a  mole. 
Under  their  chins  on  either  side  they  had  bags, 
into  which  they  gathered  their  meat,  that  they 
might  with  it  feed  their  young.  The  people  ate 
the  bodies  of  these  conies,  and  made  great  account 
of  their  skins.  The  king's  holiday  coat  was  made 
of  one  of  them." 

Toward  the  latter  part  of  July,  Drake,  having 


THE    SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  167 

repaired  the  "Golden  Hind"  and  restored  its 
cargo,  began  to  think  of  once  more  setting  sail. 
But  before  taking  his  departure  from  the  American 
coast,  he  wished  to  take  possession  of  it  in  Queen 
Elizabeth'^  name,  and  to  leave  some  memento  of 
his  stay  there.  He  accordingly  caused  a  large 
brass  plate  to  be  engraven  with  the  queen's  name, 
and  with  a  declaration  that  he  had  taken  posses- 
sion of  the  coast  and  that  it  was  an  appanage  of 
the  English  crown.  The  date  of  his  sojourn  was 
added  to  the  plate ;  and  a  hole  was  cut  in  it, 
in  which  a  sixpence,  bearing  the  queen's  pic- 
ture and  coat-of-arms,  was  fixed  as  in  a  frame. 
This  plate  was  securely  nailed  to  a  high,  stout 
post,  not  far  from  the  place  where  the  English 
had  first  landed  on  the  coast. 

When  the  Indians  heard  that  their  new-found 
friends  were  about  to  leave  them,  their  grief  be- 
trayed itself  in  many  wild  and  touching  demon- 
strations. They  seemed  to  lose  all  the  mirth 
and  activity  which  had  marked  their  intercourse 
with  the  Englishmen;  and  wandered  about  the 
camp  sighing  with  heavy  hearts,  moaning,  groaning, 
shedding  tears  and  wringing  their  hands.  By  many 
eager  signs,  they  implored  Drake  and  his  compan- 


l68  DRAKE  : 

ions  to  bear  them  in  mind,  and  told  them  how  re. 
joiced  they  would  be  to  see  the  Englishmen  on 
their  shores  again.  Then  they  prepared  a  sacri- 
fice, which  consisted  of  burning  heaps  of  feathers 
and  long  chains  made  of  bone.  But  the  English- 
men, who  looked  upon  this  as  idolatrous,  tried  to 
dissuade  them  from  continuing  it.  The  Indians  at 
first  refused  to  do  so ;  but  when  the  Englishmen 
began  to  pray  and  sing  psalms,  the  Indians  de- 
serted their  sacrificial  fires,  which  they  allowed  to 
go  out ;  and  beginning  to  imitate  the  Englishmen, 
clasped  their  hands,  and  rolled  their  eyes  up  heav- 
enward, as  they  saw  them  do. 

On  the  23d  of  July,  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  weighed 
anchor  and  slowly  glided  out  of  the  harbor.  The 
Indians  were  gathered  in  a  dense  body  on  the 
hill-top,  presenting  a  strange  and  fantastic  sight 
with  their  skins  and  feathers  and  glaringly  painted 
bodies.  They  built  bonfires  in  all  directions,  in 
token  of  farewell ;  and  soon  the  hill  seemed  almost 
like  a  great  blazing  furnace.  Drake  and  his  offi- 
cers, as  they  receded  from  the  bay,  stood  on  deck, 
and  waved  their  hats  until  the  hill,  with  its  multi- 
tude and  its  fires,  disappeared  from  view. 

For  a  few  days  the  ship  skirted  the  coast  in  a 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  1 69 

northerly  direction.  Drake  still  hoped  to  reach  the 
northwest  passage  of  which  he  had  dreamed.  But 
he  found,  to  his  chagrin,  that  the  further  he  pro- 
gressed, the  more  bleak  and  intensely  cold  became 
the  weather.  Indeed,  the  cold  was  so  extreme, 
and  the  heavy  winds  were  so  cutting,  that  it  was 
fast  becoming  impossible  to  go  further  northward. 

With  a  sorrowful  heart,  he  at  last  abandoned 
the  idea  of  seeking  for  a  northwest  passage ;  and 
now  considered  what  he  should  do.  To  return 
by  way  of  South  America  and  the  Straits  of 
Magellan  would  be  rash,  and  perhaps  fatal.  The 
Spaniards  were  all  apprized  of  his  presence  in  the 
Pacific,  and  were  undoubtedly  watching  sharply 
for  him.  He  could  not  hope  to  reach  the  Straits 
without  being  pursued  and  attacked  by  an  over- 
whelming force  of  his  bitter  enemies.  If  the 
Spaniards  captured  him,  they  would  give  him  no 
quarter. 

The  only  other  route  back  to  Europe  lay  across 
the  vast  Pacific,  through  the  Asiatic  seas  and 
islands,  and  around  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope. 
Happily  Drake  had  carefully  studied  the  accounts 
of  the  famous  voyage  of  Magellan  around  the 
world.     He  had  with  him  these  narratives,  and 


I  70  DRAKE : 

the  rude  charts  which  showed  the  course  which 
Magellan  had  taken.  Now  for  the  first  time  it 
flashed  across  the  dauntless  navigator's  mind,  that 
he,  too,  might  encompass  the  globe,  and  that  the 
"Golden  Hind"  might  be  the  first  English  ship 
to  traverse  the  entire  circumference  of  the  Earth ! 

But  to  leave  the  American  coast  altogether,  and 
to  launch  out  upon  the  ocean,  without  hope  of 
seeing  land  until  the  islands  off  the  coast  of  Asia 
were  reached,  was  an  undertaking  which  required 
more  ample  preparation  than  Drake  had  made  at 
his  last  sojourning  place.  He  therefore  resolved, 
before  setting  forth,  to  make  for  a  group  of  islands 
quite  near  the  coast,  which  he  saw  at  some  dis- 
tance away,  and  to  put  in  stores  of  provisions 
which  would  last  during  the  long  and  uncertain 
voyage  he  had  now  made  up  his  mind  to  under- 
take. This  done,  the  "  Golden  Hind,"  about  the 
first  of  August,  turned  her  course  westward,  in  the 
direction  of  the  Asiatic  seas. 

The  voyage  across  the  Pacific  proved  quick  and' 
prosperous.  The  ocean  for  once  justified  its  gen- 
tle name ;  for  Drake  and  his  comrades  were  as- 
sailed by  but  few  storms,  and  these  were  mild  and 
brief.     The  ship  was  sixty-eight  days  out  of  sight  of 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  I /I 

land.     On  the  last  day  of  September  the  welcome 
sight  of  islands  at  last  met  their  view. 

No  sooner  had  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  approached 
near  the  green  sloping  shores  of  these  islands  than 
Drake,  who  was  gazing  eagerly  over  the  side,  per- 
ceived a  large  number  of  curious-looking  canoes 
swarming  over  the  water.  Presently  he  saw  that 
these  canoes  were  approaching  the  ship ;  and  ere 
long  several  of  them  were  close  alongside.  He  then 
noticed  that  the  boats  were  made  of  a  tree  hol- 
lowed so  smoothly  that  they  shone  with  a  gloss  in- 
side and  out.  The  prows  and  sterns  were  high 
and  semi-circular,  and  were  hung  with  strings  of 
many-shaped  shells.  The  men  in  the  canoes  had, 
it  appeared,  brought  out  fish,  potatoes,  cocoanuts, 
and  fruits,  to  sell  to  the  voyagers.  It  was  evident 
that  they  were  quite  used  to  Europeans  ;  for  they 
showed  no  fear,  and  their  first  thought  was  to 
make  a  good  trade.  But  they  soon  proved  very 
different  in  their  natures  from  the  North  Ameri- 
can Indians.  They  were  ugly  looking  fellows,  and 
the  Englishmen  observed  that  "  the  lower  part  of 
their  ears  were  cut  round,  and  hung  down  very 
low  upon  their  cheeks,  wherein  they  hung  things  of 
a  considerable  weight.     The  nails  on  the  fingers  o£ 


1 72  DRAKE : 

some  of  them  were  at  least  an  inch  long,  and  their 
teeth  were  as  black  as  pitch." 

While  the  natives  traded  with  the  new-comers, 
they  began  to  urge  Drake  to  bring  the  "  Golden 
Hind  "  nearer  to  the  shore.  Drake,  however,  sus- 
pecting their  good  faith,  refused  to  do  so ;  and  the 
natives,  having  finished  their  trading,  returned  to 
the  islands.  The  next  day  another  fleet  of  canoes 
came  out  to  the  ship  with  more  provisions.  But 
these,  after  receiving  some  of  the  cloth  and  other 
articles  which  Drake  offered  them  in  exchange 
for  their  commodities,  refused  to  give  anything 
in  return ;  and  at  last  rowed  away,  angry  because 
the  Englishmen  finally  refused  to  trade  with  them 
any  longer. 

Their  true  character  now  betrayed  itself.  After 
they  had  pulled  away  a  short  distance,  Drake  saw 
a  number  of  them  suddenly  rise  in  their  canoes. 
In  another  moment  a  shower  of  stones  rattled  on 
the  deck  and  against  the  sides  of  the  ship.  They 
had  brought  these  stones  in  the  bottom  of  their 
canoes,  intending,  if  they  were  not  pleased,  to  make 
this  attack.  The  crew,  indignant  at  this  treacher- 
ous conduct,  besought  Drake  to  fire  a  volley  among 
them.     But    Drake   had   read  how  Magellan  had 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1/3 

met  his  fate  by  treating  the  natives  of  these  Asi- 
atic islands  with  imprudent  severity.  He  therefore 
ordered  that  one  of  the  cannon  should  be  dis- 
charged, not  at  the  canoes,  but  over  the  heads  of 
the  natives,  that  they  might  be  frightened,  but  not 
hurt.  This  expedient  had  the  desired  effect.  The 
natives,  scared  out  of  their  wits  by  the  deafening 
explosion,  leaped  frantically  out  of  their  canoes, 
and  diving  under  their  keels,  kept  them  in  the 
place  where  they  were  until  the  "  Golden  Hind " 
had  moved  some  distance  away.  Then  they  clam- 
bered into  their  canoes  again,  and  made  for  the 
shore  in  all  haste.  The  "  Golden  Hind  "  now  pro 
ceeded  on  her  way,  daily  passing  among  the  islands 
which  cluster  thickly  in  those  waters,  and  occa- 
sionally stopping  off  their  shores  and  bartering  with 
their  inhabitants.  In  this  way  she  made,  first,  the 
island  of  Mindanao,  then  Talao,  and  the  Philippine 
Islands.  Drake  was  careful  not  to  approach  too 
nearly  those  islands  in  which  he  suspected  any 
Portuguese  to  be ;  but  sought  as  well  as  he  could 
the  islands  whose  natives  were  hostile  to  the  Por- 
tuguese. 

On  the  3d  of  November  he  came  at  last  in  sight 
of  the  famous  Moluccas,  where  some  of  Magellan's 


174  DRAKE  : 

most  thrilling  adventures  had  taken  place.  Here, 
above  all,  it  was  necessary  to  beware  of  the  Por- 
tuguese ;  for  they  had  settlements  in  more  than 
one  of  the  Moluccas.  Happily,  Drake  received 
due  warning  of  the  danger  he  would  run  if  he  put 
in  at  the  large  island  of  Tidore,  where  he  at  first 
thought  of  making  harbor. 

As  he  was  directing  his  course  towards  this 
island,  he  was  accosted  by  a  canoe  which  had  sud- 
denly pushed  out  from  a  little  island  along  whose 
shores  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  was  coasting.  In  the 
canoe  came  a  native  of  rank,  who  signalled  that 
he  wished  to  board  the  ship.  On  mounting  to  the 
deck,  —  which  he  did  without  any  signs  of  fear,  — 
he  announced  himself  as  the  governor  of  the  island 
from  which  he  had  just  come,  and  told  Drake  that 
its  people  were  the  subjects  of  the  powerful  King  of 
Terenate.  With  many  expressive  gestures,  he 
warned  Drake  by  no  means  to  put  in  at  Tidore, 
where  the  Portuguese  would  certainly  give  him 
foul  play,  but  to  go  to  Terenate,  the  sovereign  of 
which  would  welcome  him  with  all  honor  and  hos- 
pitality. The  governor  added  that  he  himself 
would  go  that  very  night  to  Terenate,  and  carry  to 
the  king  the  news  of  Drake's  arrival.     The  king, 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1/5 

he  said,  was  a  bitter  foe  of  the  Portuguese,  and 
would  receive  their  enemies  as  his  good  friends. 

Drake  was  convinced  that  the  governor  spoke 
in  perfect  good  faith ;  and,  knowing  well  the 
jealousy  and  ill-will  which  the  Portuguese  bore 
the  English,  made  up  his  mind  promptly  to  follow 
the  governor's  advice.  The  course  of  the  "Golden 
Hind"  was  therefore  diverted  from  Tidore,  and 
directed  toward  the  island  of  Terenate.  About 
dawn  the  next  morning  she  came  to  anchor  a 
short  distance  from  the  shore  of  that  island; 
and  Drake  sent  a  messenger  in  a  boat,  to  apprize 
the  potentate  of  his  arrival,  and  to  present  him,  as 
a  token  of  good  will,  with  a  rich  velvet  cloak. 
Meanwhile  the  native  governor,  true  to  his  prom- 
ise, had  gone  to  Terenate,  and  had  told  the  \mg 
that  Drake  was  coming,  and  that  he  belonged  to 
the  mighty  realm  of  England.  The  messenger 
had  scarcely  set  his  foot  on  land,  when  he  met  the 
governor  and  a  number  of  the  king's  nobles  and 
councillors,  going  down  to  the  shore.  They  were 
on  their  way  to  deliver  a  friendly  message  from 
the  king  to  Drake.  They  told  the  messenger  that 
the  king  was  willing  that  the  English  should 
traffic  with  his  subjects  as  freely  as  they  pleased ; 


176  drake: 

and  that  he  would  himself  soon  visit  the  ship  in 
token  of  his  friendship  and  confidence.  Then  the 
governor  gave  the  messenger  one  of  the  king's 
rings,  to  be  carried  to  Drake. 

The  messenger  asked  the  royal  party  to  conduct 
him  to  the  king's  presence,  to  which  they  willingly 
assented ;  and  when  he  had  reached  the  royal 
dwelling,  the  swarthy  monarch  received  him  with 
many  cordial  signs  of  welcome.  Early  the  next 
morning  —  the  messenger  having  meanwhile  re- 
mained with  the  natives  in  their  village  over  night 
—  the  King  of  Terenate  paid  his  visit  to  the 
"Golden  Hind."  He  went  in  great  state  and 
ceremony,  attended  by  a  fleet  of  barges  and  ca- 
noes. In  advance  of  the  royal  barge  itself,  floated 
three  large  canoes,  the  prows  and  sterns  of  which 
curved  fantastically  upward,  and  were  planed  so  that 
they  appeared  smooth  and  polished.  In  these 
were  seated  a  number  of  the  highest  personages  of 
the  island  kingdom,  attired  in  the  quaint  cos- 
tumes of  their  rank.  They  wore  cloaks  of  fine 
white  cloth,  and  some  of  them  looked  grave  and 
reverend  with  their  matted  white  locks,  and  flowing, 
snowy  beards.  Over  their  heads  was  spread  a 
canopy  formed  of  broad  mats,  which  was  upheld 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  I// 

by  slender  posts  of  reeds.  These  nobles  sat  acr 
cording  to  their  rank,  the  highest  in  rank  occu- 
pying the  places  nearest  the  bow. 

"The  rest  of  the  men,"  says  one  of  the  voy- 
agers, "were  soldiers,  who  stood  in  comely  order 
round  about  on  both  sides ;  on  the  outside  of 
whom  sat  the  rowers  in  galleries,  which  were 
three  on  each  side  the  entire  length  of  the  canoes, 
built  one  above  the  other.  In  each  of  these  gal- 
leries was  an  equal  number  of  benches,  whereon 
the  rowers  sat,  about  eighty  in  each  canoe.  In 
the  forepart  of  each  canoe  sat  two  men,  the  one 
holding  a  tablet,  the  other  a  piece  of  brass,  whereon 
they  both  struck  at  once ;  and  observing  a  due  time 
and  reasonable  space  between  each  stroke,  by  the 
sound  thereof  directed  the  rowers  to  keep  their 
stroke  with  their  oars.  The  rowers  ended  each 
stroke  with  a  song,  and  thus  gave  warning  to 
the  others  to  strike  again  ;  and  so  the  canoes  sped 
over  the  waves  with  marvellous  swiftness.  Neither 
were  these  canoes  unfurnished  with  warlike  muni- 
tions. They  had  each  of  them  at  least  one  small 
cast  piece,  about  a  yard  in  length,  mounted  upon 
a  stock  which  was  set  upright;  besides  which, 
every  man  except  the  rowers  had  his  sword,  target 


178  DRAKE : 

and  dagger,  and  some  of  them  other  weapons,  such 
as  lances,  bows,  arrows,  and  many  darts." 

When  this  formidable  array  reached  the  "  Golden 
Hind,"  the  barges  slowly  rowed  completely  around 
her,  one  behind  the  other  ;  and  as  they  glided  along, 
the  dark-featured  and  white-bearded  nobles  arose 
from  their  seats,  with  solemn  countenances,  and 
bowed  almost  down  to  the  seats.  Presently  one 
of  the  canoes  stopped,  and  Drake's  messenger 
mounted  from  it  on  board  the  ship.  He  ad- 
vanced to  Drake,  who  was  standing  on  deck  at- 
tired in  his  best  suit,  and  surrounded  by  his  chief 
officers,  and  said  that  he  had  been  told  to  an- 
nounce that  the  King  of  Terenate  was  at  hand. 
At  this  moment,  the  royal  barge  was  seen  fast  ap- 
proaching. Surrounding  the  royal  personage  was 
a  group  of  his  highest  nobles,  more  conspicuously 
dressed  than  those  who  had  come  before. 

Drake  observed  the  king  with  great  curiosity. 
When  he  arose  in  his  barge  to  salute  the  strangers, 
he  appeared  very  tall  and  quite  corpulent,  but 
strong  and  compact  of  body.  His  face  wore  a  dig- 
nified yet  gracious  expression;  his  heavy  beard 
flowed  far  down  on  his  breast.  The  English- 
men noticed  that  when  he  rose,  all  the  rest  of 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1 79 

the  occupants  of  the  barge  kneeled  down,  and  re- 
mained in  that  posture  until  the  king  had  resumed 
his  seat. 

As  the  royal  barge  came  alongside  the  "  Golden 
Hind,"  it  was  welcomed  by  quickly  succeeding  vol- 
leys from  the  cannon,  and  the  loud  blowing  of 
trumpets  and  clamor  of  cymbals,  while  the  little 
band  of  musicians  on  the  deck  struck  up  some 
lively  airs.  The  dusky  monarch,  as  soon  as  he 
heard  the  music,  bent  over  with  a  pleased  expres- 
sion, and  listened  attentively  till  the  band  ceased. 
Then  he  manifested  his  delight  by  grimaces  and 
the  clapping  of  his  hands  ;  and  begged  that  the 
musicians  might  come  nearer.  So  they  got  into 
a  small  boat,  and  going  to  the  royal  barge,  joined 
it :  and  then,  rowing  round  the  ship,  at  the  same 
time  towing  the  barge  behind  them,  the  musicians 
continued  to  play  their  choicest  airs,  to  the  amuse- 
ment and  delight  of  all  the  assembled  natives. 
When  this  gay  performance  was  over,  the  king 
gave  Drake  to  understand  that,  with  the  barges  and 
canoes,  he  would  tow  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  into  a 
better  anchorage,  nearer  the  shore  of  the  island. 
Drake  assenting,  the  boats  were  attached  to  the 
ship,  and  slowly  guided  her  into  a  little  bay,  where 


l80  DRAKE : 

she  could  come  to  anchor  in  good  shelter  and  amid 
pleasant  surroundings. 

The  king  and  his  courtiers  and  soldiers  now 
bade  the  EngUshmen  adieu  with  many  friendly 
demonstrations,  the  dusky  monarch  promising  to 
return  on  the  morrow  and  to  go  on  board  the 
"Golden  Hind."  Meanwhile  Drake  and  his  com- 
rades seized  the  opportunity  to  replenish  their  sup- 
ply of  provisions  by  trading  with  the  natives,  who 
now  gathered  along  the  shore  with  such  products 
as  they  had  to  sell.  They  brought  a  large  quan- 
tity of  rice  (the  favorite  food  with  the  dwellers 
in  those  climes),  hens,  sugar-cane,  sugar,  figs,  co- 
coanuts,  plantains,  cloves,  and  sago  meal.  All  these 
things  were  most  welcome  to  the  voyagers,  who 
found  that  the  natives  were  equally  pleased  with 
the  cloth  and  trinkets  which  they  were  offered  in 
exchange. 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  l8l 

CHAPTER  XII. 

DRAKE   IN   THE  ASIATIC  SEAS. 

T  the  appointed  time  on  the  following  day, 
Drake  was  on  the  look-out  for  his  royal 
guest.  Much  to  his  surprise,  the  king 
failed  to  make  his  appearance.  After  waiting  a 
long  time,  Drake  saw  a  canoe  approaching.  It 
proved  to  contain,  not  the  king,  but  his  brother. 
This  worthy,  on  coming  alongside,  made  an  apol- 
ogy for  the  king's  failure  to  keep  his  promise,  and 
on  the  king's  part  entreated  Drake  to  go  ashore 
and  visit  him  instead.  For  the  first  time,  Drake 
began  to  suspect  that  the  ruler  of  Terenate  might 
not  be  as  friendly  to  the  EngHshmen  as  he  had 
appeared.  He  prudently  refused  to  accept  the 
king's  invitation ;  but,  unwilling  to  needlessly 
offend  him,  he  sent  several  of  his  officers  ashore 
with  a  kind  message.  The  officers  landed,  and, 
guided  by  the  king's  brother,  soon  came  in  sight 
of  the  large  but  rudely  constructed  building  which 
served  as  the  royal  palace.  They  were  soon  met 
by  some  of  the  nobles,  who  conducted  them  to  the 


I 82  drake: 

palace,  around  which  they  perceived,  with  some 
misgivings,  a  large  multitude  of  the  natives  assem- 
bled. But  the  natives  manifested  no  disposition 
to  harm  them ;  and  they  soon  lost  their  appre- 
hension when  they  saw  with  what  deference  and 
distinction  they  were  welcomed  by  the  swarthy 
multitude. 

On  coming  near  the  rude  palace,  they  observed 
that  it  was  built  in  the  form  of  a  square,  the  sides 
being  open,  and  the  roof  supported  by  many 
slender  reeds.  Around  about  the  courtyard  were 
ranged  seats ;  and  at  one  side  stood  the  royal 
chair  of  state,  with  a  canopy  of  brilliantly-colored 
cloth  overhanging  it.  Within  the  space  between 
the  seats  was  gathered  a  stately  array  of  the  chief 
men  of  Terenate.  The  king's  councillors,  in  their 
long,  white  cloaks,  were  grouped  in  the  centre  of 
the  square  ;  in  the  background,  a  large  company  of 
young  men  of  noble  rank,  "  comely  in  person  and 
attire,"  were  gathered ;  while  just  outside,  by  the 
entrance,  stood  four  old  men,  with  long-flowing 
white  beards,  wearing  red  gowns  which  swept  the 
ground,  and  having  capacious  turbans  on  their 
heads.  These  proved  to  be  foreign  merchants, 
who  had  come  to  Terenate  for  the  purposes  of 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1 83 

trade.  Besides  these  groups,  the  Englishmen  saw, 
in  the  crowd,  several  Turks,  an  Italian,  and  a 
Spaniard  who  had  escaped  from  the  Portuguese, 
and  was  now  serving  in  the  army  of  the  swarthy 
king. 

Scarcely  had  they  time  to  notice  these  things, 
when  the  king  himself,  attended  by  eight  or  ten 
of  his  courtiers,  and  walking  beneath  a  rich 
canopy  embossed  with  gold,  entered  the  building. 
The  Englishmen  made  him  a  low  obeisance,  which 
he  returned  with  a  pleasant  smile,  taking  his  seat 
on  the  chair  of  state.  The  monarch  was  "  of  low 
voice,  temperate  in  speech,  of  kingly  demeanor, 
and  a  Moor  by  nation."  His  guests  observed  that 
his  attire  was  far  more  sumptuous  than  that  of 
any  of  his  court ;  "  from  the  waist  to  the  ground 
was  all  cloth  of  gold,  very  rich ;  his  legs  were 
bare,  but  on  his  feet  were  red  leather  shoes;  in 
the  gear  of  his  head  were  wreathed  divers  rings 
of  plated  gold,  an  inch  or  more  in  breadth,  which 
made  a  fair  and  princely  show,  somewhat  resem- 
bling a  crown  in  form.  About  his  neck  he  had  a 
chain  of  perfect  gold ;  the  links  were  large,  and 
one  fold  double.  On  his  left  hand  were  a  diamond, 
an  emerald,  a  ruby,  and  a  turquoise  —  four  very 


184  DRAKE  : 

fair  and  perfect  jewels ;  on  his  right  hand,  in  one 
ring,  a  very  large  turquoise,  and  in  another  ring 
many  diamonds  of  a  smaller  size.  As  he  thus  sat 
in  his  chair  of  state,  a  page  stood  at  his  right  hand 
with  a  costly  fan,  richly  embroidered  with  sap- 
phires, with  which,  it  being  very  hot,  he  fanned 
and  thus  refreshed  the  king." 

Drake's  messengers  approached  the  potentate 
and  delivered  their  message;  and  they  soon  per- 
ceived that  the  king  either  did  not  wish  or  did  not 
dare  to  molest  them.  He  received  them  with  a 
smile,  and  replied  graciously  to  the  message  with 
which  they  had  been  entrusted. 

They  then  retired  from  the  royal  presence,  and 
were  regaled  in  homely  but  cordial  fashion  by 
some  of  the  chief  men.  Before  taking  their  de- 
parture from  the  castle,  they  were  able  to  observe 
it  closely.  They  saw  that  it  was  not  strongly  de- 
fended, having  but  two  small  cannon,  which  the 
islanders  had  taken  from  the  Portuguese;  nor 
were  these  mounted  for  use.  They  learned  that 
this  building  had  been  erected  by  the  Portu- 
guese when  they  had  possession  of  the  island.  It 
appeared  that  the  Portuguese  had  conquered  the 
island  some  years  before,  by  a  ferocious  assault,  in 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1 85 

which  many  of  the  chief  nobles  had  been  slaugh- 
tered, and  many  houses  destroyed.  The  king,  the 
father  of  the  reigning  monarch,  had  been  mur- 
dered ;  and  the  Portuguese  had  lorded  it  over  the 
conquered  race  with  cruel  tyranny.  The  princes 
had  been  made  prisoners,  and  had  been  in  like  man- 
ner doomed  to  death.  But  the  natives  rose  in  their 
wrath  one  day,  and  drove  the  tyrants  from  their 
soil.  In  this  revolt  they  were  joined  by  swarms  of 
natives  from  the  many  islands  round  about,  which 
were  under  the  dominion  of  the  King  of  Terenate. 
The  Portuguese  had  been  taken  so  completely  by 
surprise  that  they  had  fled  precipitately,  leaving 
their  goods,  ammunition,  and  other  effects  behind 
them.  They  had  landed  at  the  large  neighboring 
island  of  Tidore,  where  they  still  were  at  the  time 
of  Drake's  visit.  The  King  of  Terenate  now  ruled 
over  nearly  a  hundred  islands  in  these  seas,  and 
was  at  this  very  moment  preparing  an  expedition 
against  the  Portuguese  in  Tidore. 

The  Englishmen  noted  with  curiosity  that  the 
islanders  were  Mohammedans,  and  were  very  ab- 
stemious in  their  habits.  They  often  passed  the 
entire  day  without  eating  a  morsel ;  making  up  for 
this  fast  by  taking  three  hearty  meals  during  the 
night. 


I 86  DRAKE : 

Several  days  after  the  return  of  this  embassy  to 
the  "Golden  Hind,"  a  boat  came  from  the  island 
to  the  ship,  bringing  in  it  a  man  who  expressed  a 
very  ardent  desire  to  talk  with  the  commander. 
Permission  was  at  once  given  to  the  new-comer  to 
mount  on  board  the  "Golden  Hind."  Drake,  who 
had,  of  course,  expected  to  see  only  the  ordinary 
idander,  was  greatly  surprised  to  behold,  bending 
before  him  in  graceful  salutation,  a  tall,  dignified 
personage,  whose  European  dress  and  courtly  bear- 
ing showed  not  the  faintest  kinship  to  the  people 
of  Terenate. 

Indeed,  the  stranger's  yellow  skin,  long,  narrow 
almond-shaped  eyes,  and  gleaming  white  teeth,  as 
well  as  his  more  cultivated  and  stately  manners, 
proved  him  to  be  of  quite  a  different  race  and 
clime  from  the  swarthy  denizens  of  these  Southern 
seas.  This  striking  person  had  brought  with  him 
several  richly-apparelled  attendants,  and  an  inter- 
preter who,  strange  to  say,  could  speak  and  under- 
stand English.  Drake  begged  his  visitor  to  sit 
beside  him  on  the  deck,  which  the  stranger  at 
once  acceded  to  with  much  ease  of  manner.  He 
then  proceeded  to  tell  an  interesting  story  of  him- 
self, through  his  interpreter. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1 8/ 

It  seemed  that  he  was  in  reality  a  Chinaman,  of 
princely  rank  and  blood.  He  was  a  relative  of  the 
Chinese  king  Bonog.  Not  long  before,  he  had 
committed  a  crime  which,  in  China,  was  punishable 
with  death.  But  his  relative,  the  king,  took  pity 
on  him,  and  told  him  that  his  life  would  be  spared 
on  one  condition.  He  must  depart  from  China 
without  delay,  and  should  travel  far  and  wide.  If, 
in  his  travels,  he  should  gather  any  valuable  intel- 
ligence of  which  the  king  had  never  before  heard, 
and  should  return  and  impart  it  to  the  king,  he 
should  receive  a  full  pardon  for  his  offence.  But 
if  he  again  set  foot  in  China  without  fulfilling  this 
condition,  his  life  would  be  at  once  forfeited. 

The  Chinaman  added  that  he  had  heard  from 
the  people  in  Terenate  of  Drake's  arrival,  and  of 
his  wonderful  voyage  across  the  vast  seas ;  and 
that,  if  he  could  carry  back  an  account  of  this 
voyage  to  the  King  of  China,  he  was  sure  the  news 
would  be  of  sufficient  novelty  and  importance,  to 
secure  his  liberty. 

Drake  was  amused  at  the  seriousness  and  so- 
lemnity of  his  almond-eyed  guest ;  and  being  con- 
vinced of  his  entire  sincerity,  willingly  complied 
with  his  desire.     As  the  commander  described  his 


1 88  DRAKE : 

many  adventures,  mishaps  and  discoveries,  his 
perils  of  shipwreck,  his  captures  of  treasure,  his  in- 
tercourse with  the  barbarous  natives  of  many  and 
itrange  lands,  his  fights  with  the  Spaniards,  the 
Chinaman  listened  with  eyes  and  mouth  wide  open  ; 
every  now  and  then  lifting  his  hands,  and  making 
an  exclamation  of  amazement.  He  had  never 
heard  so  thrilling  a  story  of  the  sea;  and  when 
Drake  told  him,  moreover,  of  the  might  and  power 
of  England  and  the  greatness  of  Queen  Elizabeth, 
the  Chinaman  eagerly  expressed  his  admiration. 
Every  word  which  fell  from  Drake's  lips  evidently 
impressed  itself  upon  the  Chinaman's  mind.  When 
the  tale  was  done,  he  clapped  his  hands,  and  ex- 
claimed with  delight  that  it  was  so  new  and  so 
wonderful,  that  he  was  sure,  by  relating  it  to 
his  king,  of  receiving  a  prompt  pardon  for  his 
crime. 

The  Chinaman  now  looked  upon  Drake  with 
awe  as  the  greatest  hero  he  had  ever  seen,  and 
began  to  urge  him  to  visit  China  before  returning 
home.  He  told  Drake  how  ancient,  powerful  and 
wealthy  the  vast  realm  of  China  was ;  of  how  many 
great  provinces  and  swarming  cities  it  could  boast : 
of  its  magnificent  temples  and  its  mighty  arma* 


THE  SEA-KING  OF  DEVON.  1 89 

ments.  He  described  the  guns  and  cannon  of 
which  the  Chinese  were  possessed,  and  how  they 
had  used  brass  cannon  there  for  at  least  two  thou- 
sand years,  so  exact  in  their  aim  that  they  would 
hit  a  small  coin  at  a  long  distance.  The  China- 
man offered  to  go  with  Drake  and  conduct  him  to 
the  king,  and  show  him  all  the  marvels  of  his  rich 
and  populous  empire. 

Drake  was  at  first  much  tempted  to  yield  to  his 
visitor's  entreaties.  He  had  heard  of  the  vast 
wealth  and  civilization  of  the  Chinese,  and  he 
knew  that  to  carry  to  England  an  account  of 
his  visit  there  would  give  him  increased  honor 
and  fame.  But,  on  second  thoughts,  he  decided 
that  he  must  resist  the  alluring  prospect.  He  had 
already  been  away  from  home  many  months.  He 
had  accomplished  his  audacious  purpose  of  sailing 
an  English  ship  in  the  Pacific,  and  of  encountering 
the  hated  Spaniards  in  waters  they  had  long  boast- 
ed as  exclusively  their  own.  His  ship  bore  a 
goodly  treasure  ;  and  he  had  successfully  overcome 
every  obstacle,  so  far,  to  his  passage  completely 
around  the  globe.  His  companions,  too,  were  be- 
ginning to  sigh  for  the  rest  and  comfort  of  home. 
They  longed  once  more  to  behold  their  families 


I 90  DRAKE : 

and  friends,  and  to  enjoy  at  ease  the  gains  they 
had  secured. 

The  Chinaman,  therefore,  was  obliged  to  take 
leave  of  Drake  with  a  somewhat  disappointed 
heart.  But  he  went  off  rejoicing  that  at  least  the 
story  of  Drake's  adventures  would  secure  him  a 
safe  return  to  China. 

Having  supplied  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  with  fresh 
stores  of  provisions,  Drake  at  last  set  sail  from 
the  harbor  of  Terenate  on  the  9th  of  November. 
That  harbor  had  not  proved  a  suitable  one  for 
making  the  repairs  which  the  ship  now  sorely 
needed.  So  Drake  proceeded  in  search  of  an  unin- 
habited island,  where  he  might  anchor  and  com- 
plete his  repairs  without  fear  of  disturbance.  A 
few  days'  sail  brought  him  to  just  such  an  island 
as  he  was  seeking. 

Here  the  men  went  on  shore  and  pitched  their 
tents,  intrenching  them  so  that  they  might  be  se- 
cure from  a  surprise,  for  they  had  espied  a  number 
of  suspicious-looking  natives  on  a  larger  island,  a 
short  distance  off.  The  cargo  of  the  "Golden 
Hind  "  was  taken  out  and  deposited  in  the  tents, 
and  a  smith's  forge  was  set  up  near  the  shore.  As 
the  coal  they  had  brought  with  them  had  long  be- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  19! 

fore  been  exhausted,  they  were  forced  to  use  char- 
coal for  the  forge.  While  the  hulk  of  the  ship  was 
being  repaired,  the  large  casks  which  were  used  to 
hold  the  fresh  water,  were  taken  on  shore  and 
strongly  re-hooped.  Some  of  the  men  resorted  to 
a  neighboring  island  for  a  supply  of  water,  and  the 
casks  having  been  repaired,  were  restored  to  the 
ship  and  filled. 

The  island  proved  to  be  so  pleasant,  and  the  rest 
afforded  by  being  on  shore  was  so  grateful,  that 
Drake  could  not  find  it  in  his  heart  to  hurry  his 
weary  companions  away  to  sea  again.  Hence, 
the  adventurers  remained  some  days  upon  the 
island ;  and  wandering  freely  over  its  fields  and 
amid  its  smiling  valleys,  they  saw  many  things 
which  interested  them,  and  acquired  new  vigor  and 
spirits  for  their  rough  homeward  voyage.  The 
island  was  covered  with  noble  forests,  amid  whose 
branches,  in  the  dark  night,  the  Englishmen  were 
surprised  to  see  myriads  of  fire-flies  gleaming  and 
flashing.  They  also  saw  —  what  was  quite  strange 
to  them — many  large  bats,  which,  one  of  them  says, 
"were  as  big  as  hens,  and  flew  with  marvellous 
swiftness.  But  their  flight  was  very  short ;  and 
when  they  lit,  they  hung  only  by  the  bows,  with 
their  backs  downward." 


192  DRAKE : 

They  also  found  a  species  of  enormous  land 
crabs,  which  proved  very  nice  to  the  taste,  "one 
of  which  was  sufficient  to  satisfy  four  hungry  men 
at  a  dinner.  They  are  utter  strangers  to  the  sea, 
living  always  on  the  land,  where  they  dig  huge 
caves  under  the  roots  of  big  trees,  and  lodge  them- 
selves there  together  in  companies."  Several 
weeks  spent  on  this  lovely  island  served  to  restore 
health,  vigor,  and  spirits  to  the  weather-beaten 
voyagers;  and  on  Dec.  12  Drake  seized  advantage 
of  a  favorable  breeze,  and  once  more  set  out  on  his 
westward  course.  Often  the  "  Golden  Hind  " 
became  so  entangled  in  the  many  islands  and 
treacherous  shoals,  that  she  was  forced  to  put  in 
at  such  convenient  harbors  as  she  found.  "  In  all 
our  passage  from  England,"  says  one  of  the  voy- 
agers, "  we  never  had  more  trouble  in  keeping 
ourselves  afloat,  and  from  sticking  on  the  shoals." 

At  last,  it  seemed  as  if  they  had  emerged  from 
this  perilous  labyrinth,  and  a  good  wind  sped  them 
southwestward ;  when,  one  night,  while  the  "  Gold- 
en Hind"  was  gliding  under  full  sails,  suddenly 
the  men  on  board  felt  a  violent  shock  and  shiver. 
All  hands  were  on  deck  in  a  moment.  Drake  at 
once  perceived  that  his  good  ship  had  struck  on  a 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  I93 

jagged  shelving  rock.  It  seemed  as  if  they  were 
doomed  to  an  immediate  shipwreck.  The  lanterns 
betrayed  that  the  ship  was  in  a  most  dangerous 
position :  it  seemed  quite  impossible  that  she  could 
ever  be  got  off  the  reef.  The  crew  were  in  terror 
and  despair,  and  with  one  accord  fell  on  their 
knees  on  the  deck,  and  began  to  pray  fervently ; 
expecting  every  moment  that  the  "  Golden  Hind  " 
would  go  to  pieces,  and  that  they  would  find 
themselves  struggling  amid  the  angry  breakers. 

Drake,  however,  kept  up  a  stout  heart.  Instead 
of  bewailing  what  seemed  the  impending  doom, 
he  coolly  gave  orders  here  and  there,  and  himself 
went  from  end  to  end  of  the  vessel,  to  judge  of  her 
situation  as  accurately  as  possible. 

**  To  the  pumps,  my  men,"  he  cried,  cheerily, 
"  to  the  pumps  ! " 

The  men  sprang  to  obey  the  order  with  a  will. 
They  perceived,  with  reviving  hope,  that  as  yet  the 
ship  showed  no  signs  of  breaking  up.  As  they 
plied  the  pumps  with  desperate  vigor,  Drake  went 
below  to  see  if  any  dangerous  leaks  had  been 
sprung  by  the  collision.  Returning  to  the  deck 
with  a  light  step,  he  shouted, 

"  Courage,  men !  There  is  no  leak ;  we  may  yet 
be  saved  1" 


194  DRAKE : 

He  then  passed  along  to  the  stern,  and  climbed 
over  into  one  of  the  boats  which  had  just  been 
lowered.  Proceeding  a  little  way  from  the  ship, 
he  began  to  take  soundings ;  so  that,  if  an  anchor 
could  be  fixed,  the  ship  might  be  gradually  drawn 
from  the  rock.  But  a  few  yards  off  he  found, 
much  to  his  disappointment,  that  he  could  not 
touch  bottom,  and  that  there  was  no  chance  to 
fasten  an  anchor.  He  was  forced  to  return  to 
the  ship  and  to  await  the  coming  of  daylight. 
The  night  passed  in  miserable  anxiety.  Every 
lurch,  every  gale  of  wind,  seemed  about  to  prove 
the  destruction  of  all  on  board.  The  men  watched 
and  prayed,  and  more  than  once  gave  themselves 
up  to  despairing  lamentations. 

Drake  kept  his  post  with  grim  and  silent  cour- 
age. He  never  allowed  a  word  or  sound  of  fear 
or  grief  to  escape  him.  He  never  lost  hope.  As 
the  long  hours  dragged  their  weary  length,  he 
waited  patiently  for  the  dawn.  At  last  —  it 
seemed  a  month  —  the  dim  gray  light  spread  over 
the  scene,  and  soon  glowed  with  the  yellow  tinge 
of  the  rising  sun.  Just  now  the  tide  was  ebbing 
fast,  and  tb  ^  ship  was  left  in  only  six  feet  of  water ; 
while,  so  neavily  was  she  laden,  that  it  required 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  1 95 

at  least  thirteen  feet  to  float  her.  It  seemed 
that  nothing  could  save  her ;  that  as  soon  as  the 
waters  had  fully  receded,  she  must  topple  over  and 
be  dashed  to  splinters.  But  at  this  critical  junc- 
ture, the  elements  themselves  came  to  the  rescue 
of  the  imperilled  voyagers.  A  stiff  and  steady 
breeze  came  up  and  blew  strongly  against  that 
side  of  the  ship  towards  which  she  would  other- 
wise have  lurched  over;  and  this  breeze,  never 
once  slackening,  held  her  upright  in  her  position 
on  the  rock.  A  second  search  for  a  bottom  on 
which  to  drag  the  anchor  proved  as  unavailing  as 
the  first. 

Drake  now  summoned  his  men  in  a  group  on 
deck.  Calling  the  chaplain,  he  asked  him  to  offer 
up  an  earnest  prayer  for  their  safety.  When  the 
men  rose  from  this  act  of  devotion,  Drake  said : 

"  Now  my  men,  one  last,  mighty  effort  to  save 
ourselves !  Go  some  of  you  to  the  hold  ;  take  some 
of  the  bags  of  meal,  and  overboard  with  them. 
Others  of  you,  unfasten  the  guns,  and  pitch  them 
into  the  sea.  Yet  others,  take  our  store  of  cloves, 
and  give  them  to  the  fishes." 

No  sooner  was  the  order  given  than  the  men 
obeyed.     Over  went  the  bags  of  meal,  eight  of  the 


196  DRAKE  : 

cannon,  and  three  tons  of  cloves.  But  even  this 
lightening  of  the  cargo  did  not  avail.  The  ship 
stuck  fast.  But,  happily,  no  leak  was  yet  sprung. 
Drake  had  now  to  decide  whether  he  would  aban- 
don the  "  Golden  Hind  "  to  her  fate,  and,  taking 
to  the  boats  with  his  companions,  trust  to  the 
dangers  of  the  sea  and  of  savages,  or  stay  by 
her  to  the  last.  He  sternly  resolved  that  it  was 
better  to  perish  where  they  were,  than  to  run  the 
risk  of  such  miseries  as  would  surely  await  them 
if  they  took  to  the  boats.  To  stay  by  the  ship  was 
not  only  to  risk  destruction  by  drowning,  but  death 
by  starvation ;  for  the  sacrifice  of  the  meal  had 
sadly  reduced  their  store  of  provisions,  and  they 
could  not  hope  to  live  many  days  upon  what  was 
left. 

When  they  were  in  the  most  bitter  despair,  sud- 
denly an  event  occurred  which  effected  their  deliver- 
ance. The  "  Golden  Hind  "  had  stuck  in  the  cleft  of 
a  rock,  on  her  larboard  side.  Just  as  the  tide  had 
gone  out,  the  gale  which  held  her  upright  fell  to 
almost  a  dead  calm.  The  ship  being  no  longer 
held  up  by  the  wind,  gave  a  heave,  and  reeled  over 
to  her  side.  At  this  moment,  when  she  appeared 
on  the  very  point  of  going  to  pieces,  the  voyagers. 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  I97 

to  their  amazement  and  unutterable  joy,  found  that 
she  was  floating  quietly  in  deep  water ! 

The  shock  of  lurching  over  had  loosened  her 
keel,  and  she  had  slipped  out  of  the  cleft  into  the 
depths  just  beyond,  in  the  nick  of  time  to  save  her 
from  utter  shipwreck.  Although  they  had  escaped 
this  terrible  danger,  and  were  able  to  proceed  once 
more  on  their  way,  the  voyagers  were  not  yet  done 
with  the  perils  of  the  sea.  For  nearly  a  month 
they  continued  to  be  tossed  about  amid  shoals  and 
reefs,  and  to  these  dangers  were  added  those  of 
the  violent  storms  which,  every  few  days,  assailed 
them.  At  last,  however,  they  were  relieved  to  find 
themselves  beyond  this  entangled  region ;  and  it 
was  with  great  delight  that  they  anchored  at  the 
beautiful  and  fruitful  island  of  Booton.  There 
Drake  and  his  companions  were  regaled  with  lem- 
ons, cucumbers  and  cocoanuts,  and  were  able  to 
put  in  stores  of  ginger,  pepper,  nutmegs  and  sago. 
They  found  the  inhabitants  of  the  island  very  mild 
and  friendly,  "  of  handsome  body  and  comely  stat- 
ure, of  civil  demeanor,  very  just  in  their  dealings, 
and  courteous  to  strangers."  It  was  very  refresh- 
ing to  find  such  a  place  and  such  a  people,  after 
the  hardships  through  which  they  had  passed. 


198  DRAKE : 

These  natives  appeared  very  glad  to  see  the  Eng^ 
lishmen,  and  cheerfully  ready  to  relieve  all  their 
needs  and  make  them  comfortable.  The  men 
went  naked,  except  that  they  wore  a  band,  or  belt, 
about  the  middle,  and  a  covering  on  the  head ; 
while  one  and  all  wore  some  kind  of  ear-ring.  As 
for  the  women,  they  wore  a  sort  of  a  gown  from 
their  waists  to  the  ground,  and  on  their  naked 
arms  they  displayed  curious  bracelets  of  bone,  horn, 
and  brass.  Some  of  the  women  had  as  many  as 
nine  bracelets  on  each  arm. 

It  was  while  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  was  in  this  re- 
gion that  Drake  had  to  perform  a  painful  but  nec- 
essary task.  The  chaplain  of  the  ship,  Francis 
Fletcher,  had  been  guilty  of  several  serious  of- 
fences, and  had  betrayed  a  malicious  ill-feeling 
against  his  commander.  Drake,  resolved  to  main- 
tain discipline,  even  in  the  case  of  a  clergyman, 
one  morning  summoned  Fletcher  before  him.  He 
ordered  the  chaplain  to  be  fastened  by  one  of  his 
legs  to  a  staple  in  the  hatches  of  the  forecastle. 
Then  he  summoned  the  entire  crew,  who  gathered 
around  with  wondering  eyes.  Sitting  on  a  chest 
with  his  legs  crossed,  Drake  pointed  to  Fletcher 
in   his  humiliating  position,  and  declared  to   his 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  I99 

company,  that  he  was  about  to  excommunicate  the 
chaplain.  Then,  addressing  Fletcher  in  a  solemn 
voice,  Drake  said,  "Francis  Fletcher,  I  do  here 
excommunicate  thee  out  of  the  Church  of  God, 
and  from  all  the  benefits  and  graces  thereof ;  and 
I  do  denounce  thee  to  the  devil  and  all  his  angels. 
I  charge  thee,  on  pain  of  death,  not  to  come  before 
the  mast ;  for  if  thou  dost,  thou  shalt  be  hanged." 

Drake  then  caused  a  small  label  to  be  fastened 
io  Fletcher's  right  arm,  on  which  were  written  these 
stinging  words : 

"Francis  Fletcher,  the  falsest  knave  that  liv- 
eth." 

Fletcher,  with  pale  face  and  drooping  head,  was 
then  led  away. 


200  DRAKE 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

AROUND   THE   GLOBE. 


FTER  leaving  Booton,  where  the  advent- 
urers had  met  with  so  pleasant  a  wel- 
come, and  had  so  fully  refreshed  them- 
selves, the  "Golden  Hind,"  on  the  12th  of  March, 
came  in  sight  of  the  great  island  of  Java,  then,  as 
now,  noted  for  its  beauty  and  fertility,  the  mild- 
ness of  its  climate,  and  the  bounty  of  its  produc- 
tions. She  anchored  in  the  harbor  of  what  ap- 
peared to  be  a  very  thriving  and  prosperous  native 
town  ;  and  there  took  in  water,  and  sent  a  boat 
ashore  to  find  out  if  the  people  were  disposed  to 
traffic  with  the  new-comers.  The  next  morning, 
finding  that  the  natives,  like  those  of  Booton, 
were  amiably  disposed,  and  quite  willing  to  enter 
into  friendly  relations  with  the  English,  Drake 
paved  the  way  for  this  by  sending  to  the  ruling 
prince  a  liberal  present  of  silk,  linen  and  woollen 
fabrics.  The  prince  promptly  responded  by  re- 
turning a  boatful  of  rice,  cocoanuts,  and  fowl,  which 
proved  most  welcome.     On  the  day  after,  em* 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  201 

boldened  by  the  prince's  evident  good  will,  Drake 
himself  ventured  on  shore  with  his  little  band  of 
musicians,  and  a  picked  company  of  his  men.  He 
proceeded  to  the  prince's  house,  and  being  cordially 
greeted,  caused  his  musicians  to  play  some  lively 
airs.  With  this  the  natives,  who  gathered  around 
to  listen,  were  greatly  delighted  ;  and  were  still 
more  so,  when  Drake  ordered  his  soldiers  to  show 
off  their  skill  with  their  swords,  pikes,  and  bows. 

It  appeared  that  the  entire  island  was  under  the 
dominion  of  one  king,  but  that  it  was  divided  into 
four  provinces,  which  were  governed  by  princes  or 
rajahs,  each  of  whom  was  independent  of  the  others. 
Strange  to  say,  these  four  princes,  so  far  from 
always  quarrelling  and  making  war  upon  each 
other,  as  semi-barbarous  potentates  elsewhere  did, 
lived  on  terms  of  entire  mutual  peace  and  friend- 
ship. They  never  encroached  upon  each  other's 
rights,  but  often  visited  on  the  most  cordial  terms, 
and  when  attacked  from  without,  eagerly  joined 
their  armies  to  repel  the  invasion. 

These  princes  soon  heard  of  Drake's  arrival; 
and  a  few  days  after,  three  of  them  came  on  board 
the  '*  Golden  Hind,"  bringing  provisions  and  other 
presents,  and  examining  with  much  curiosity  the 


202  DRAKE  : 

structure  of  the  ship,  and  its  means  of  defence 
They  announced  to  Drake  that  Raia  Donan,  the 
king  of  the  whole  island,  their  common  master, 
would  soon  come  to  see  him ;  and  Drake  made 
preparations  to  receive  this  chief  potentate  with 
all  the  honors  due  to  his  importance.  Meanwhile, 
not  a  day  passed  that  the  three  princes  did  not 
make  their  appearance  on  the  "  Golden  Hind," 
where  they  were  lavishly  entertained  with  the  best 
that  the  good  ship  afforded. 

The  great  king,  Raia  Donan,  at  last  arrived, 
attended  by  a  numerous  escort,  and  followed  by  his 
three  subject  princes.  He  proceeded  to  the  ship 
in  a  handsome  barge  ;  and  when  he  ascended,  with 
his  company,  to  the  deck,  Drake  invited  him  to  a 
seat  in  the  middle  of  the  ship.  There  he  sat,  sur- 
rounded by  his  princes  and  courtiers,  while  Drake 
ordered  the  musicians  to  discourse  English  music 
for  his  royal  guests'  amusement.  The  king  was  a 
venerable,  mild-featured  man,  with  a  flowing  white 
beard,  and  an  enormous  white  turban  on  his  head. 
When  the  musicians  had  finished,  the  king  and 
princes  manifested  their  pleasure  by  many  viva- 
cious signs  ;  then  the  king  ordered  his  own  musi- 
cians, who  had  come  with  him  on  board,  to  strike 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  303 

up.  They  made  such  weird,  unheard-of  sounds, 
that  the  Englishmen  were  very  much  diverted. 
"  It  was  a  music  of  a  very  strange  kind,'*  says  one 
of  them,  "  yet  the  sound  was  pleasant  and  delight- 
ful." After  these  recreations,  the  king  caused  a 
huge  ox  to  be  brought,  which  he  presented  to 
Drake,  who  acknowledged  the  gift  with  a  present 
of  costly  silks. 

Drake  then  led  the  king  through  every  part  of 
the  "Golden  Hind."  He  showed  him  where  and 
how  the  provisions  and  treasures  were  stored,  his 
armory  of  weapons,  his  cannon  and  the  way  in 
which  they  were  managed,  the  musical  instruments, 
and  all  the  trappings  and  conveniences  of  the 
cabins. 

After  the  departure  of  Raia  Donan  and  his  ret- 
inue, the  men  went  to  work  with  a  will,  trimming 
and  washing  the  ship.  Meanwhile,  the  traffic  with 
the  natives  went  prosperously  on.  An  abundance 
of  fowl,  cocoanuts,  plantains,  goats,  and  other 
victuals,  was  laid  in,  and  plenty  of  fresh  water  sup- 
plied to  the  casks.  Drake  found  the  people,  as  well 
as  the  rulers  of  Java,  very  pleasing  and  attractive. 
They  were  evidently  of  affectionate,  frank,  and 
honest  dispositions ;  at  the  same  time  they  were 


204  drake: 

stalwart  in  figure,  bold  and  warlike  in  temper,  and 
intelligent  far  beyond  the  natives  of  the  islands  he 
had  hitherto  visited.  Their  principal  weapons  and 
armor  were  swords,  daggers,  and  bucklers ;  their 
swords,  especially,  being  very  skilfully  tempered, 
with  finely  adorned  handles.  The  Javans  went 
naked  to  their  middles,  whence  flowed  to  their  feet 
a  brightly-colored  silk  gown. 

They  had  one  custom  which  inspired  Drake's  ad- 
miration. In  each  of  the  villages  there  stood  a 
kind  of  public  hall,  where  all  the  inhabitants  were 
wont  to  meet  twice  every  day,  and  take  their  meals 
in  common.  These  daily  feasts  were  full  of  gay 
good  cheer;  the  people  chatting  vivaciously  as 
they  ate,  and  acting  towards  each  other  in  the 
most  familiar  and  friendly  way.  Each  one  con- 
tributed something  —  either  fruit,  or  rice,  or  roast 
fowl,  or  cocoanuts  —  to  the  common  table ;  which, 
raised  about  three  feet  from  the  ground,  was 
always  crowded  with  a  merry  company. 

"  They  boiled  their  rice,"  says  one  of  the  voy- 
agers, ^'  in  an  earthern  pot,  made  in  the  form  of  a 
sugar  loaf,  being  full  of  holes  like  the  pots  with 
which  we  water  our  gardens.  It  was  open  at  the 
larger  end,   and   they  put  their  rice  in  it  dry. 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  20$ 

Meanwhile,  they  had  ready  another  great  earthen 
pot,  set  fast  in  a  furnace,  full  of  boiling  water,  in 
which  they  put  their  pot  of  rice,  so  that  the  rice, 
swelling,  became  soft  at  first,  and  by  swelling 
stopped  the  holes  in  the  pot,  and  allowed  no  more 
water  to  enter.  The  more  it  was  boiled,  the  harder 
and  firmer  in  substance  it  became ;  so  that  in  the 
end  it  was  a  good  and  firm  bread,  of  which  with 
oil,  butter,  sugar,  and  other  spices,  they  made 
divers  sorts  of  dishes  very  pleasant  of  taste  and 
nourishing  to  nature." 

Departing  from  Java,  Drake  made  straight  for 
the  Cape  of  Good  Hope ;  and  reached  that  point 
on  the  15th  of  June,  having  touched  at  no  place, 
and  met  with  no  mishap  on  the  way.  He  had 
always  heard  of  the  terrible  dangers  which  threat- 
ened the  ships  which  doubled  the  Cape.  The 
Portuguese  had  pictured  them  in  the  darkest  colors, 
in  order  to  deter  rival  fleets  from  attempting  the 
task.  But  Drake  disdained  their  tales,  as  much  as 
he  had  done  the  warnings  of  the  Spanish  as  to  the 
Straits  of  Magellan.  On  approaching  the  Cape, 
he  put  forth  all  his  skill  as  a  hardy  and  veteran 
navigator ;  and  although  the  weather  was  most 
tempestuous  at  times,  on  the  day  that  the  "  Golden 


206  DRAKE : 

Hind  "  rounded  the  cape  the  sea  was  smooth  and 
the  sky  bright.  "  It  was,"  the  adventurers  declared, 
"  the  most  stately  thing  and  the  goodliest  Cape 
seen  in  the  circumference  of  the  whole  earth ;  ** 
and  proved  to  them  that  in  their  description  of  its 
perils  the  Portuguese  were  "  most  false." 

Drake  resisted  the  temptation  to  put  in  near  the 
Cape  of  Good  Hope.  Happily,  the  provisions  and 
water  stored  at  Java  held  out  well ;  and  the  little 
ship,  tempest-tossed  as  she  was,  stood  the  stress  of 
the  voyage  most  sturdily.  Without  pausing  on 
the  South  African  coast,  Drake  steered  his  course 
directly  for  Sierra  Leone,  off  the  coast  of  Guinea ; 
a  region  with  which  he  had  long  been  familiar. 
Casting  anchor  there  at  the  wide  mouth  of  a  river, 
the  men  landed  to  procure  water  and  fish  food. 
They  found,  to  their  delight,  a  prodigious  abun- 
dance of  delicious  oysters,  upon  which  they  feasted 
with  eager  relish.  In  the  valley,  too,  they  gathered 
a  quantity  of  lemons,  which,  after  their  long  sea 
voyage,  proved  most  grateful  and  refreshing. 

Setting  out  from  Sierra  Leone  about  the  first  of 
August,  the  "  Golden  Hind  "  made  good  speed  and 
prosperous  way  to  the  Canary  Islands,  which  was 
her  next  halting  place.     The  weather-worn  advent- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  20/ 

urers  began  to  feel  that  they  were  at  last  nearing 
old  England ;  and,  as  they  sailed  northward,  grew 
more  and  more  impatient  to  reach  their  final 
destination.  They  no  longer  wished  to  linger  in 
the  havens  and  on  the  islands  where  they  put  in  : 
and  their  stay  at  the  Canary  Islands  was  very  brief. 
Proceeding  thence  on  the  226.  of  August,  the 
"  Golden  Hind,"  amid  fair  weather  and  favorable 
breezes,  ploughed  on  northward.  Soon  the  northern 
edge  of  Africa  was  passed ;  the  sunny  hills  of 
Spain  appeared  and  faded  in  the  distance ;  the 
boisterous  Bay  of  Biscay  was  safely  crossed ;  and 
then  the  gray  chalk-cliffs  of  England  appeared  in 
sight. 

It  was  on  the  early  morning  of  the  26th  of  Sep- 
tember, 1580,  that  the  "  Golden  Hind,"  after  a  voy- 
age extending  over  nearly  three  years,  swung  into 
that  same  Plymouth  harbor,  whence  she  had  set 
out.  The  voyagers  thought  that  the  day  of  their 
arrival  was  a  Sunday,  and  were  at  first  much  sur- 
prised to  find  that  it  was  really  Monday.  Drake 
called  to  mind  that  the  same  mystery  as  to  the  day 
had  occurred  to  Magellan's  crew,  on  their  return 
from  the  first  voyage  around  the  world.  As  yet, 
men  had  not  discovered  the  reason  of  the  loss  of 


208  DRAKE : 

twenty-four  hours  in  sailing  westward  throu^  the 
entire  circumference  of  the  earth. 

It  may  well  be  imagined  that  the  arrival  of  the 
heroic  Drake  and  his  fellow-adventurers  was  wel- 
comed with  great  joy  and  enthusiasm  throughout 
England.  He  was  now  the  most  famous  of  living 
English  navigators.  The  tale  of  his  exploits, 
perils,  and  discoveries  thrilled  the  heart  of  a  people 
proud  of  their  prowess  and  seamanship.  He  had, 
the  first  Englishman,  encompassed  the  entire  globe. 
He  had  defied  danger  in  almost  every  form.  He 
had  dealt  terrible  blows  upon  the  Spanish  foes  of 
his  native  land.  He  had  seen  many  strange 
places  and  peoples.  He  had  made  numerous  im- 
portant discoveries.  He  had  brought  home  ample 
and  precious  treasure.  He  had  returned  rich,  a 
conqueror,  and  an  illustrious  pioneer. 

No  sooner  was  the  ''  Golden  Hind  "  moored  in 
the  roadstead  of  Plymouth,  than  the  first  thought 
of  the  voyagers  was  to  render  up  their  gratitude  in 
prayer  to  God.  They  were  thankful  to  God,  as 
one  of  them  says,  "  for  seeing  His  wonders  in  the 
deep,  discovering  so  many  admirable  things,  going 
through  so  many  strange  adventures,  escaping  out 
of  so  many  dangers,  and  overcoming  so  many  diffi* 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  209 

culties  in  thus  our  encompassing  of  this  nether 
globe,  and  passing  round  about  the  world." 

It  is  no  wonder  that  noisy  crowds  welcomed  them 
with  cheers  and  greetings  as  they  at  last  set  foot 
again  on  English  soil.  The  cannon  boomed  from 
all  the  ships  which  were  clustered  in  the  harbor ; 
and  the  flags  and  pennons  floated  joyously  at  their 
mast-heads.  The  weather-beaten  men  scattered 
speedily  to  their  homes  ;  and  Drake  once  more  em- 
braced his  family  and  friends. 

He  did  not,  however,  linger  long  at  Plymouth. 
The  news  of  his  coming  had  quickly  spread,  and 
had  reached  London  and  the  royal  court.  Every- 
where the  rejoicings  were  great  and  enthusiastic, 
and  nowhere  more  so  than  among  the  chief  ad- 
visers of  Queen  Elizabeth.  Drake  went  to  Lon- 
don, and  was  at  once  surrounded  by  a  host  of 
admirers.  Great  nobles  and  haughty  courtiers 
honored  him,  and  lavished  their  praises  upon  him. 
Everywhere  he  went,  he  was  cheered,  pointed  out, 
and  stared  at  as  the  hero  of  the  voyage  around  the 
world.  Poets  wrote  odes  in  celebration  of  his 
achievements,  and  he  tasted  all  the  sweets  of  high 
renown. 

There  were  some,  however,  who,  even  amid  all 


2IO  drake: 

this  chorus  of  adulation,  murmured  against  the 
way  in  which  Drake  had  acquired  his  treasures, 
and  denounced  him,  though  not  very  loudly,  as 
nothing  better  than  a  pirate.  This  was  perfectly 
true ;  his  career  had  been  that  of  a  ruthless  corsair 
and  buccaneer.  He  had  seized  gold  and  appro- 
priated it  purely  by  reason  of  superior  force.  But 
in  those  days  such  acts  were  not  sternly  censured. 
People  thought  rather  of  the  glory  and  power  which 
Drake  had  won  for  England,  than  of  the  piratical 
means  he  had  employed  to  amass  wealth.  Nor 
were  they  sorry  that  he  should  have  robbed  the 
ships,  and  taken  to  himself  the  golden  gains,  of  the 
detested  Spaniards. 

It  was  not  long  after  Drake's  arrival  in  London 
that  he  was  received  at  the  royal  court.  Eliza- 
beth welcomed  him  with  warm  words  of  praise,  and 
listened  with  deep  interest  to  his  bluntly-spoken 
tale.  But  at  first  the  maiden  queen  was  reluctant 
to  bestow  upon  the  tough  old  navigator  the  honors 
which  his  countrymen  thought  he  deserved.  She 
had  been  inclined  to  listen  to  the  few  courtiers 
who  looked  upon  him  as  a  pirate.  Besides,  with 
her  usual  caution,  she  feared  that  an  open  token 
of  her  favor  would  at  once  bring  about  a  war  with 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  211 

Spain.  This  she  wished  if  possible  to  avoid,  and  at 
all  events  she  was  not  yet  prepared  for  such  a  con- 
flict. The  Spanish  king,  indeed,  was  already  clamor- 
ing with  angry  words  against  the  way  in  which  Drake 
had  robbed  and  destroyed  his  ships  on  the  South 
American  coast.  It  was  necessary  for  Elizabeth 
to  play  a  sly  game  ;  to  pretend  that  she  disapproved 
of  Drake's  conduct,  until  all  was  ready  to  meet 
Spain  in  battle  on  equal  terms.  She  therefore 
ordered  that  the  treasure  he  had  brought  home 
should  be  seized  by  her  officers,  and  kept  until  the 
time  came  when  it  might  be  safely  restored  to  its 
captors. 

In  a  few  months  after  the  arrival  of  the 
"  Golden  Hind,"  the  queen  resolved  that  she  would 
no  longer  defer  paying  Drake  the  tribute  which 
she  believed  to  be  his  due.  The  "  Golden  Hind  " 
had  now  been  brought  round  to  Deptford,  and 
moored  in  a  safe  anchorage  in  a  creek.  One  morn- 
ing, the  queen  sent  word  to  Drake  that  she  would 
ere  long  pay  him  a  visit  in  state  on  board  his  ship. 
Drake  was  filled  with  proud  delight  at  this  an- 
nouncement. Though  himself  a  plain,  rough  man, 
he  was  exceedingly  fond  of  show.  He  liked  to  see 
and  take  part  in  magnificent  displays.      Accord- 


212  DRAKE : 

ingly,  he  caused  every  lavish  preparation  to  be 
made  for  the  worthy  reception  of  the  queen  on  the 
"  Golden  Hind."  The  storm-tossed  little  ship  was 
repaired,  polished  up,  and  rigged  out  with  every 
device  which  her  commander  could  invent.  A 
splendid  banquet,  with  every  ornament  and  pal- 
atable luxury  which  wealth  could  command,  was 
got  ready ;  and  Drake  himself  procured  a  rich  new 
velvet  suit,  in  which  to  appear  before  the  sovereign 
as  her  host. 

On  the  appointed  day  —  the  14th  of  April  — 
Elizabeth  set  out  with  a  gorgeous  cortege  from 
London  for  Deptford.  As  she  progressed  through 
the  smiling  country,  just  arrayed  in  its  bright  ap- 
parel of  spring,  vast  concourses  of  people,  cluster- 
ing by  the  roadside,  greeted  her  with  their  loyal 
applause.  At  one  place,  as  the  royal  cavalcade 
was  crossing  an  ancient  bridge,  so  great  was  the 
crowd  that,  a  moment  after  the  queen  herself  had 
reached  the  further  side,  the  bridge  suddenly  gave 
way.  In  a  moment  there  was  a  terrified  confusion. 
Several  hundred  people  had  fallen  into  the  stream 
below,  and  were  frantically  struggling  to  reach 
either  shore.  Fortunately,  however,  not  a  single 
person  was  drowned,  nor  did  any  receive  so  much 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  213 

as  a  serious  hurt.  Elizabeth  said,  with  a  smile, 
that  this  was  all  owing  to  Drake's  good  luck. 

Drake  received  the  queen  with  all  due  honor 
on  board  the  **  Golden  Hind,"  and  led  the  way  to 
the  banquet  table,  where  he  sat  by  Elizabeth's  side. 
Right  cheerily  did  the  company  of  courtiers  and 
voyagers  feast  that  day  ;  and  many  were  the  witty 
sayings  and  bursts  of  laughter  which  circled  round 
the  bounteous  board.  When  all  the  good  things 
had  been  fully  enjoyed,  and  the  half -empty  dishes 
had  been  removed,  the  queen  turned  to  Drake,  and 
amid  the  silence  of  the  company,  thus  addressed 
him  :  "  Francis  Drake,  we  entrusted  a  sword  to  thy 
keeping  till  we  demanded  it  of  thee  again.  We 
now  command  thee  to  deliver  it  up,  in  the  manner 
in  which  thou  didst  receive  it  from  our  hands." 

Drake  rose  from  his  chair,  and  unbuckling  the 
sword  (which  he  had  always  worn),  and  kneeling, 
held  it  out  in  its  scabbard  to  the  queen. 

Elizabeth  took  it,  looked  at  it  with  keen  eyes,  and 
then  slowly  drew  the  weapon  from  the  scabbard. 
Turning  again  to  Drake  knd  pointing  to  the  sword, 
she  said,  — 

"This  sword,  Drake,  might  still  serve  thee 
though   thou  hast   carried  it  around  the    globe. 


214  drake: 

But  ere  we  return  it  to  thee,  it  must  render  us  a 
service." 

Taking  a  step  backward,  with  head  erect  and 
her  slight  form  drawn  up  to  its  full  height,  the 
queen  slowly  raised  the  sword.  Drake  was  still 
kneeling,  with  uncovered  head,  at  her  feet.  Gently 
and  with  solemn  dignity  she  lightly  tapped  the 
sword  on  Drake's  shoulder;  and  in  a  clear  voice, 
said,  — 

**Rise,  Sir  Francis  Drake." 

At  this,  all  the  company  loudly  clapped  their 
hands,  and  manifested  their  pleasure.  Drake,  with 
blushing  features,  rose,  now  a  knight  of  England, 
and  was  at  once  surrounded  by  his  delighted 
friends. 

Having  thus  conferred  a  high  and  signal  honor 
on  her  host.  Queen  Elizabeth  soon  after  took  her 
departure  for  London,  while  the  new  knight  re- 
mained to  join  in  the  revels  which  that  night  were 
held  on  board  the  *'  Golden  Hind." 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  21$ 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

SEA-BATTLES   IN   THE  WEST  INDIES. 

jRAKE  was  now  not  only  a  man  of  rank, 
but  rich,  famous,  with  great  influence  over 
the  men  of  his  time,  and  immensely  pop- 
ular with  his  countrymen.  He  had  become  one  of 
the  conspicuous  figures  of  his  age  ;  and  henceforth 
his  history  was  to  be  closely  connected  with  that  of 
England.  Honors  flowed  upon  him  without  stint. 
Queen  Elizabeth  ordered  that  the  good  ship 
"  Golden  Hind "  should  be  carefully  preserved  at 
Deptford  as  a  relic  of  Drake's  wonderful  voyage ; 
and  when,  after  the  passage  of  years,  the  ship  went 
to  decay,  she  was  broken  up,  and  from  her  sound 
est  plank  a  chair  was  made,  and  deposited  at  the 
University  of  Oxford.  There  it  is  still  to  be  seen. 
Long  after,  the  poet  Cowley  thus  celebrated  the 
exploits  of  the  historic  craft : 

**  The  stars  above  will  make  thee  known, 
If  man  were  silent  here ; 
The  Sun  himself  cannot  forget 
His  fellow-traveller." 


2l6  DRAKE : 

Many  stories  about  Drake  circulated  from  mouth 
to  mouth  through  England.  There  were  many  ig- 
norant folks  who  attributed  to  the  intrepid  voyager 
the  powers  of  magic.  It  was  said  that  Drake  had 
only  circumnavigated  the  globe  by  the  aid  of  mi- 
raculous arts.  There  was  a  story  that  Drake's  wife 
(whom  he  had  married  before  setting  forth  on  his 
long  voyage)  at  last  despaired  of  his  ever  returning 
to  England.  She  was  young,  wealthy,  and  child- 
less ;  and,  after  many  months  had  passed  without 
a  word  of  news  from  her  sailor  husband,  she  was 
said  to  have  yielded  her  consent  to  a  new  suitor  for 
her  hand.  The  day  of  her  wedding  came ;  and  the 
supposed  widow,  arraying  herself  for  the  second 
time  as  a  bride,  repaired  to  church  to  be  married 
to  her  new  husband.  But,  as  the  story  went,  one 
of  Drake's  obedient  sprites  carried  him  the  news : 
whereupon  he  loaded  a  cannon,  and,  firing  straight 
through  the  earth,  sent  the  ball  whizzing  through 
the  church,  just  as  the  rites  were  about  to  begin. 

"That  comes  from  Drake!"  cried  the  bride  in 
alarm. 

"  From  Drake  it  cannot  be,"  replied  the  groom. 

"  Yes,"  she  replied ;  "  and,  as  he  lives,  there  must 
be  neither  troth  nor  ring  between  thee  and  me." 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  217 

Such  powers  did  the  superstition  of  the  common 
people  give  to  the  great  explorer,  whose  achieve- 
ments seemed  to  them  quite  as  amazing  as  the 
supposed  miracles  of  magic. 

Drake  was  destined  to  return  home  just  in  time 
to  witness  the  outbreak  of  the  long-delayed  hos- 
tilities between  England  and  Spain.  His  fate  for- 
bade him  rest,  or  the  indolent  enjoyment  of  his 
wealth.  Very  soon  after  the  events  narrated  in 
the  preceding  chapter,  Queen  Elizabeth  made  a 
treaty  with  the  Dutch,  who  had  revolted  against 
their  Spanish  rulers,  and  thus  brought  England 
into  plainly  hostile  collision  with  King  Philip. 
War  could  not  now  be  far  off;  and  both  nations 
began  active  preparations  for  the  rapidly  approach- 
ing struggle. 

It  was  Drake's  fortune  to  take  the  lead  in  an 
expedition  which  turned  out  to  be  the  first  blow 
struck  in  the  war.  His  prowess  and  seamanship 
had  been  amply  proved,  and  the  queen  hastened  to 
avail  herself  of  his  services.  A  fleet  was  speedily 
collected  for  the  purpose  of  openly  assailing  the 
Spanish  colonies  in  the  American  waters.  Twenty- 
five  good-sized  ships,  of  which  two  were  royal 
men-of-war,  constituted  the  armament ;  and  these 


2l3  DRAKS: 

were  supplied  with  twenty-three  hundred  soldiers 
and  sailors.  Drake  was  appointed  admiral  of  the 
fleet ;  and  under  him  were  sea-warriors  as  noted  as 
Martin  Frobisher,  Francis  Knollys,  and  Christopher 
Carlile.  When  the  fleet  was  about  to  set  sail,  the 
gallant  Sir  Philip  Sidney,  the  most  graceful,  brave, 
and  chivalrous  cavalier  of  Queen  Elizabeth's  court, 
and  a  warm  friend  of  Drake,  became  very  eager  to 
accompany  it  on  its  perilous  venture.  But  Queen 
Elizabeth,  as  ever  imperious  and  despotic,  sternly 
forbade  him,  at  the  same  time  paying  Sir  Philip 
Sidney  a  splendid  compliment. 

**  I  will  not,"  she  declared,  "  risk  the  loss  of  the 
jewel  of  my  time.*' 

On  the  14th  of  September,  1585,  Drake's  fleet 
set  sail  from  the  Thames,  and  at  first  pursued  its 
course  toward  the  coast  of  Spain.  But  Drake 
could  find  no  pretext  for  making  a  direct  attack 
upon  Philip's  kingdom,  and  soon  turned  southward, 
and  sailed  for  the  Cape  de  Verde  islands.  Arriving 
there,  Drake  lost  no  time  in  making  an  attack. 
Under  cover  of  the  night,  he  landed  with  one 
thousand  men,  took  the  town  of  St.  Jago,  and  pro- 
ceeded to  sack  it.  The  booty  obtained  proved  of 
little  value.  He  advanced  into  the  interior,  where  he 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  319 

Stormed  and  captured  a  large  town.  Now  for  the 
first  time  the  Portuguese,  who  had  held  these 
towns,  rallied  and  hung  with  a  large  force  about 
the  invaders.  Drake  caused  St.  Domingo  to  be 
burned,  and  then,  returning  with  his  men  to  the 
ships,  set  sail  without  delay  for  the  West  Indies, 
which  were  his  chief  destination. 

The  Atlantic  was  crossed  without  accident,  and 
the  fleet,  keeping  close  together,  at  last  approached 
the  rich  and  populous  Spanish  settlement  of  St. 
Domingo,  on  the  island  of  that  name.  Drake  at 
once  resolved  that  this  should  be  his  first  point  of 
attack  upon  the  possessions  of  the  arrogant  power 
which  was  now  defying  England  in  Europe.  An- 
choring his  fleet  off  the  town,  he  held  a  council  of 
war  with  the  captains  on  board  the  flag-ship.  It 
was  resolved  that  a  large  force  should  be  landed 
under  cover  of  the  darkness  on  one  side  of  the  town, 
while  the  fleet  approached  near  enough  on  the 
other  to  bombard  it  with  their  cannon.  This  plan 
was  promptly  put  in  execution.  Just  before  dawn 
on  New  Year's  day,  1586,  several  companies  of 
soldiers  took  to  the  boats,  and  effected  a  landing 
without  obstacle  at  a  point  ten  miles  west  of  St, 
Domingo.     They  quietly  formed  on  the  shore,  and 


220  drake: 

dividing  into  two  battalions,  advanced  upon  the 
town.  Above  it  loomed  the  grim  and  well-guarded 
castle,  bristling  with  its  cannon,  and  supplied  with 
a  Spanish  garrison.  When  they  had  come  within 
a  short  distance,  the  English  battalions  separated, 
and  made  a  rush  for  the  two  gates  on  that  side. 
Before  the  garrison  in  the  castle  could  be  aroused, 
or  its  guns  manned,  the  two  gates  had  been  burst 
open,  and  the  English,  swords  in  hand,  were 
advancing  rapidly  to  the  heart  of  the  town. 

Meanwhile  the  fleet  drew  near  and  opened  its 
fire  upon  the  castle  from  the  other  side.  But  as 
the  event  proved,  the  aid  of  the  ships  was  not 
needed  by  the  gallant  English  bands  who  had  made 
the  land  assault.  The  two  battalions  joined  each 
other  in  the  market  place ;  and  by  this  time  a 
complete  panic  had  seized  the  Spanish  defenders 
of  St.  Domingo.  They  scampered  out  of  the  town 
as  fast  as  their  legs  could  carry  them ;  while  the 
castle  garrison,  seeing  the  enemy  entrenched  and 
barricaded  in  the  market  place,  made  haste  to 
abandon  their  post,  and  hurried  away  in  boats  to 
the  other  end  of  the  island.  The  English  in  the 
market  place  at  once  erected  an  impromptu  fort, 
and  made  ready  to  repel  an  attack;  but  none  was 
made  upon  them. 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  22t 

The  next  day  they  were  reinforced  from  the 
ships,  the  admiral  himself  going  ashore  with  a  fresh 
company.  The  market  place  was  converted  into  a 
fortress  so  strong,  that  the  Spaniards  decided  that 
it  was  useless  to  attempt  to  recapture  the  town. 

Drake's  purpose  now  was  to  secure  a  heavy  ran- 
som from  the  Spaniards;  so,  while  he  held  the 
town  in  his  iron  grip,  he  sent  to  the  Spanish  camp 
outside  to  inform  them  of  the  terms  upon  which 
he  would  retire.  The  Spaniards  for  a  long  time 
refused  to  pay  the  ransom  which  he  imperiously 
demanded.  Then  Drake  ordered  his  men  to  plun- 
der the  town,  and  after  having  collected  all  that 
they  could  find  worth  preserving,  to  set  fire  to  its 
buildings.  These  were  for  the  most  part  lofty  and 
imposing  edifices  of  stone ;  and  the  work  of  destroy- 
ing them  was  a  slow  one.  Finally  the  Spaniards, 
who  saw  with  despair  the  gradual  destruction  of 
their  proud  little  town  proceeding  day  by  day, 
yielded  to  Drake's  severe  demand.  They  sent 
him  the  ransom  of  twenty-five  thousand  ducats ; 
whereupon  he  withdrew  his  soldiers  to  the  ships, 
and  soon  after  took  his  departure. 

An  anecdote  of  Drake's  sojourn  at  St.  Domingo, 
which  strikingly  shows  the  stem  energy  of  his 


222  DRAKE : 

character,  is  thus  told :  "  A  negro  boy,  sent  b]f 
Drake  with  a  flag  of  truce  to  the  leading  people 
while  the  negotiation  for  ransom  was  going  on, 
was  met  by  some  Spanish  officers,  who  furiously 
struck  at  him,  and  afterward  pierced  him  through 
with  a  horseman's  spear.  Dreadfully  wounded  as 
he  was,  the  poor  boy  tried  to  crawl  back  to  his 
master ;  and,  while  relating  the  cruel  treatment  he 
had  received,  fell  down  and  expired  at  Drake's  feet. 
The  insult  offered  to  his  flag  of  truce,  and  the  bar- 
barous treatment  of  the  lad,  roused  the  admiral  to 
the  highest  pitch  of  indignation.  He  commanded 
the  provost-marshal,  with  a  guard,  to  carry  two  un- 
fortunate monks,  who  had  been  made  prisoners,  to 
the  place  where  his  flag  was  violated,  there  to  be 
hanged.  Another  prisoner  shared  the  same  fate : 
and  a  message  was  sent  to  the  Spaniards,  announ- 
cing that  until  the  persons  guilty  of  this  breach  of 
the  law  of  nations  were  given  up,  two  Spanish 
prisoners  should  suffer  daily.  The  next  day  the 
offenders  were  sent  in ;  and  to  make  their  merited 
punishment  the  more  ignominious  and  exemplary, 
their  own  countrymen  were  forced  to  become  their 
executioners. " 

Sailing  from  St.  Domingo,  the  fleet  proceeded 


THE  SEA-KING   OF  DEVON.  223 

to  another  opulent  Spanish  settlement,  the  town  ol 
Cartagena.  This  place  proved  to  be  more  stronglj 
defended  than  St.  Domingo.  The  Spanish  com- 
mander, Alonzo  Bravo,  was  a  soldier  of  experience 
and  desperate  courage.  He  resolved  to  hold  out 
against  his  assailants  to  the  last.  But  the  attack 
on  the  citadel  in  which  Bravo  was  posted  with  his 
garrison  was  made,  as  at  St.  Domingo,  both  by 
land  and  water.  On  the  land  side.  Captain  Carlile 
led  a  stormy  force  against  the  ramparts  of  the 
doomed  town ;  while  Drake  brought  the  fleet  close 
to  the  citadel  in  the  harbor.  The  struggle  was  hot 
and  long-continued.  But  the  English  proved  too 
much  for  the  defenders  of  the  town.  Carlile  soon 
succeeded  in  effecting  an  entrance  ;  but  Bravo  so 
desperately  stood  his  ground,  that  he  only  yielded 
when  he  found  himself  a  prisoner.  Drake  took 
complete  possession  of  the  town,  and  quartered  his 
soldiers  in  the  best  houses.  These  were  plundered 
without  compunction,  while  a  portion  of  the  town 
was  ruthlessly  burned. 

Meanwhile  a  calamity  overtook  the  Englishmen 
which  caused  them  to  depart  as  suddenly  from 
Cartagena  as  they  had  come.  Many  of  the  men 
were  attacked  by  a  dangerous  fever,  called  the 


i24  DRAKS: 

"calenture."  It  was  a  most  violent  distemper, 
which,  at  its  height,  plunged  the  victims  into  a 
furious  delirium,  in  the  midst  of  which  they  often  ex- 
pired. When  the  fever  left  the  sufferer,  he  became 
weak  and  idiotic,  having  lost  his  memory  and  often 
his  reason.  Day  by  day  Drake  saw  his  faithful 
followers  dying  of  this  fearful  malady,  and  ere  long 
its  victims  numbered  several  hundred.  He  there- 
fore greatly  reduced  the  amount  of  the  ransom  he 
had  demanded  of  the  Spaniards  ;  and  accepting 
eleven  thousand  ducats,  made  haste  to  depart  from 
a  place  where  so  heavy  a  misfortune  had  befallen 
him. 

At  first  he  thought  of  crossing  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico  and  attacking  Nombre  de  Dios,  which  he 
had  pillaged  years  before.  But  he  finally  resolved 
to  abandon  this  design,  and  to  set  sail  for  the 
Florida  coast.  Many  Spanish  settlements  were 
now  planted  on  this  southernmost  point  of  the 
North  American  shores,  and  presented  a  tempting 
object  of  attack.  Drake  soon  reached  the  oldest 
of  these  settlements,  at  St.  Augustine ;  and  he  did 
not  hesitate  to  sack  and  burn  both  this  town  and 
St.  Helena.  Then  his  fleet  advanced  northward 
along  the  coast  as  far  as  Virginia.     Here  Drake,  to 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  22$ 

his  great  delight,  discovered  the  survivors  of  the 
EngHsh  colony,  under  Lane,  which  had  been 
planted  in  Virginia  by  Ralegh  the  year  before. 
He  promptly  rescued  these  unfortunate  men,  giving 
them  comfortable  quarters  on  his  own  ship. 

Drake's  fleet  returned  to  England  in  the  mid- 
summer of  1586.  He  brought  home  with  him,  as 
prizes  and  treasures,  no  less  than  two  hundred 
brass  and  forty  iron  cannon,  captured  from  the 
Spaniards ;  and  at  least  three  hundred  thousand 
dollars  in  money.  Of  this  large  sum,  which  was 
then  worth  more  than  double  what  a  similar  sum 
would  be  worth  in  our  own  day,  one  third  was 
divided  among  the  common  soldiers  and  sailors, 
and  the  rest  among  the  superior  officers  of  the 
fleet. 

The  arrival  home  of  Drake  just  at  this  time 
was  especially  fortunate  for  England  and  for  him- 
self. He  found  both  the  court  and  the  country  in 
a  great  state  of  excitement  and  preparation.  News 
had  come  that  King  Philip  of  Spain  was  getting 
ready  a  powerful  fleet,  with  which  to  invade  Eng- 
land and  forever  destroy  her  naval  prowess. 
Queen  Elizabeth  was  much  disturbed  at  this  intel- 
ligence ;  and  English  pluck  and  patriotism  wert 


236  DRAKE  : 

fully  aroused  in  the  determination  to  avert  the  im 
pending  blow  of  her  arrogant  enemy.  The  mar- 
chants  of  London  had  been  among  the  first  to  take 
measures  with  this  object  in  view.  When  Drake 
returned  he  found  that  these  merchants  had,  at 
their  own  expense,  purchased  and  completely  fitted 
up  a  fleet  of  six  vessels.  This  fleet  was  not,  of 
course,  equal  to  an  encounter  with  Philip's  great 
armament.  It  was  intended  merely  to  harass  the 
Spaniards.  Drake  was  promptly  chosen  as  its 
commander ;  and  he  thus  no  sooner  found  himself 
ashore  once  more,  than  he  was  called  upon  to 
undertake  a  fresh  venture,  more  exciting  and  more 
perilous  than  that  which  he  had  just  concluded. 

But  he  promptly  accepted  the  new  duty  thus  im- 
posed upon  him.  Queen  EUzabeth  added  four 
ships  to  those  equipped  by  the  London  merchants, 
and  Drake  thus  set  forth  in  command  of  a  fleet  of 
ten  sturdy  vessels.  His  first  destination  was  the 
busy  Spanish  port  of  Cadiz.  The  voyage  thither 
was  so  rapidly  made,  that  the  first  hint  which  the 
Spaniards  had  of  the  sailing  of  the  fleet,  was  its 
appearance  off  Cadiz  harbor.  Philip's  great  fleet 
was  as  yet  in  no  condition  for  warfare,  even  in  de- 
fence.    Drake  gallantly  led  his  fleet  straight  in 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  22/ 

among  the  Spanish  shipping  in  the  harbor.  Right 
and  left  he  fiercely  attacked  not  only  the  merchant- 
men, but  the  men-of-war  which  were  waiting  to 
take  part  in  Philip's  proposed  invasion  of  England. 
The  Spanish  ships  fought  bravely  and  desperately ; 
but  they  had  been  taken  by  surprise,  and  could  not 
cope  with  their  furious  assailant.  The  people  of 
the  city  could  only  look  on  helpless,  and  witness 
with  despair  the  burning  and  sinking  of  the  lordly 
galleons  of  which  they  had  been  so  proud.  In  a 
day  and  two  nights  no  less  than  ten  thousand 
tons'  burden  of  Spanish  shipping  had  been  de- 
stroyed by  Drake's  fleet ;  and  thus  a  blow  had  been 
dealt  at  the  naval  strength  of  Spain,  which  ren- 
dered King  Philip  powerless  for  a  whole  year  to 
put  his  plan  of  invasion  into  effect. 

Drake's  object  had  now  been  accomplished. 
But  he  was  by  no  means  satisfied  with  having  dealt 
so  fell  a  blow  upon  the  Spanish  enemy.  His  fleet 
was  intact,  and  his  men  were  flushed  with  victory, 
and  eager  for  fresh  exploits.  His  old  instincts  of 
plunder  and  gain  were  rekindled.  He  thought  of 
the  public-spirited  merchants  of  London ;  and 
made  up  his  mind  that  he  would  try  a  stroke  which 
might  reward  them  for  their  generosity  in  raising 


228  DRAKE ! 

the  fleet.  He  had  heard  that  a  richly-laden  Portu- 
guese galleon,  the  "  St.  Philip,"  was  just  now  on 
its  way  to  the  Azore  islands.  The  Portuguese 
were  at  this  time  the  close  friends  and  allies  of 
Spain,  and  had  always  been  hostile  to  and  jealous 
of  England's  prowess  on  the  sea.  So  Drake  re- 
solved that  he  would  direct  his  course  to  the 
Azores,  and  if  possible  capture  the  brilliant  prize. 

The  voyage  to  the  islands  was  a  slow  and 
stormy  one.  The  crews  suffered  greatly  for  want  of 
water  and  provisions.  Once  or  twice  the  tempests 
rose  to  such  furious  heights  that  the  men  began 
to  lose  their  spirit,  and  to  clamor  to  return  home. 
But  Drake  never  quailed  before  the  prospect  of 
starvation,  or  the  wrath  of  the  elements.  He 
promptly  suppressed  the  murmurs  of  discontent, 
and  kept  grimly  on  his  way.  Not  long  after  the 
arrival  of  the  fleet,  amid  many  privations,  at  the 
Azores,  sure  enough  the  "  St.  Philip "  hove  in 
sight.  To  surround  and  capture  her  was  not  a  very 
difficult  task  ;  and  Drake  had  the  satisfaction  of 
finding  that  her  cargo  was  quite  as  precious  as  he 
had  been  led  to  expect.  She  proved,  indeed,  the 
richest  prize  he  had  ever  taken.  He  exultingly 
declared  that  the  very  name  of  the  galleon  —  which 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  229 

was  also  that  of  the  Spanish  king  —  was  an  augury 
of  the  coming  triumph  of  England. 

With  the  "  St.  Philip "  in  tow  the  fleet  now 
returned  home,  and  was  received,  on  its  arrival, 
with  every  demonstration  of  popular  joy.  Drake 
was  welcomed  with  fresh  honors  at  the  royal  court, 
and  the  London  merchants  were  rejoiced  to  receive 
back,  from  the  prize,  a  portion  of  the  sums  they 
had  spent  in  fitting  out  the  fleet.  Drake  boasted 
proudly  that  he  had  **  burned  the  Spanish  king's 
beard." 

The  rage  of  King  Philip,  indeed,  at  the  blows 
which  he  had  received  from  the  intrepid  navigator, 
passed  all  bounds.  He  sent  an  arrogant  message 
to  the  English  queen  by  his  ambassador,  which,  as 
was  the  custom  of  the  age,  was  conveyed  in  a 
Latin  verse.    Translated,  the  message  ran  thus ;  — 

•'These  to  you  are  our  commands : 
Send  no  help  to  the  Netherlands. 
Of  the  treasure  took  by  Drake, 
Restitution  you  must  make. 
And  these  abbeys  build  anew, 
Which  your  fathers  overthrew." 

The  brave  Elizabeth  sent  back  a  reply  quite  as 
proud  and  spirited. 

Drake  now  tasted,  for  a  few  months,  the  sweets 


230  DRAKE : 

of  repose.  He  retired  to  Plymouth  where,  with  his 
wife  and  friends,  he  enjoyed  his  hard  earned  wealth 
and  fame.  He  took  an  active  interest  in  the  affairs 
of  the  thriving  town ;  and  among  other  benefits 
which  he  conferred  upon  it,  he  introduced  water  into 
its  streets,  at  a  large  expense,  from  springs  eight 
miles  away. 

But  a  time  soon  came  when  his  country  more 
than  ever  needed  his  grim  energy  and  his  valiant 
arm ;  and  he  eagerly  set  forth  again  in  answer  to 
her  summons. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  23 1 

CHAPTER    XV. 

THE   SPANISH   ARMADA. 

|LTHOUGH  Drake's  exploits  at  Cadiz  had 
seriously  crippled  the  Spanish  navy,  and 
had  postponed  Philip's  cherished  project 
of  invading  England,  they  had  not  rendered  him 
wholly  powerless.  Within  a  year,  the  ravages 
upon  his  fleet  had  been  repaired ;  and  while  Drake 
was  taking  his  ease  with  his  friends  at  Plymouth, 
he  heard  tidings,  every  now  and  then,  of  the  for- 
midable preparations  which  were  being  made  by 
the  Spanish  king.  The  time  was  fast  approaching 
when  Philip  would  be  ready  to  put  his  arrogant 
plan  into  execution.  The  English  were  meanwhile 
busy  collecting  and  fitting  up  their  ships  of  war, 
and  strengthening  the  defences  of  the  coast. 
Drake  knew  that  when  the  moment  of  conflict 
came,  his  services  would  be  demanded  by  the 
queen ;  and  he  held  himself  always  ready  to  re- 
spond to  the  royal  summons. 

One  day  a  message  came  to  Drake  to  proceed 
in  all  haste  to  London.     On  his  arrival  there,  he 


232  DRAKE : 

found  all  the  principal  admirals  and  naval  officers 
assembled.  Startling  news  had  arrived.  It  was 
declared  that  the  Spanish  fleet  had  already  sailed, 
and  was  under  full  sail  for  the  English  Channel. 
This  fleet,  it  was  said,  consisted  of  no  less  than  one 
hundred  and  fifty  men-of-war;  of  these,  twelve 
were  named  after  the  twelve  apostles.  The  Duke 
of  Medina  Sidonia  commanded  as  grand  admiral. 
Among  his  vice-admirals  were  several  sea-warriors 
of  great  renown ;  of  these,  the  most  conspicuous 
was  Martin  Recalde,  who  was  second  in  command. 
The  famous  soldier,  Alexander  Farnese,  Duke  of 
Parma,  was  said  to  be  at  the  head  of  thirty  thousand 
men  at  Bruges,  in  Flanders,  ready  to  co-operate  at 
the  right  moment  with  the  Spanish  fleet  against 
England. 

The  first  step  taken  by  Queen  Elizabeth  was  to 
despatch  Lord  Henry  Seymour  with  a  fleet  of 
forty  sail  to  the  Flemish  coast,  to  hold  the  Duke 
of  Parma  in  check.  Lord  Howard  of  Effingham 
was  appointed  admiral  of  the  main  English  fleet,  and 
Drake  was  chosen  as  his  second  in  command.  The 
other  vice-admirals  were  Sir  John  Hawkins  and  Sir 
Martin  Frobisher. 

These  four  naval  heroes  now  repaired  to  Plym« 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  233 

outh,  which  had  been  selected  as  the  rendezvous 
of  the  fleet.  In  Plymouth  harbor  the  scene  was  a 
lively  and  bustling  one.  Day  after  day  the  stately 
men-of-war  glided  one  by  one  into  the  roadstead ; 
while  the  harbor  was  full  of  smaller  craft,  plying 
to  and  fro,  and  crossing  and  recrossing  each  other's 
tracks.  The  plan  was  to  await  the  Spanish  fleet 
at  Plymouth,  and  while  it  was  passing  up  the 
Channel,  fall  furiously  upon  its  flanks  and  rear  with 
the  English  ships. 

The  four  famous  commanders  were  close  friends. 
While  waiting  for  the  moment  of  conflict,  and 
supervising  the  assemblage  and  equipment  of  the 
fleet,  they  employed  many  leisure  hours  in  the 
sturdy  recreations  of  the  time. 

One  day  they  were  engaged  in  an  exciting  game 
of  bowls,  on  Plymouth  Hoe.  The  party  was  a 
large  one,  consisting  of  Lord  Howard,  Drake, 
Frobisher,  Hawkins,  Sir  Richard  Grenville,  Sir 
Walter  Ralegh,  and  the  mayor  of  Plymouth.  Just 
as  the  rough  pastime  was  at  its  height,  a  man  came 
hastening  upon  the  ground.  It  proved  to  be  the 
captain  of  a  Scotch  privateer,  named  Fleming. 
His  face  was  red  with  running,  and  he  was  so 
breathless  that  at  first  he  could  scarcely  speak.  The 


li 


234  DRAKE  : 

bowlers  stopped,  and  gathering  around  him,  asked 
him  what  tidings  he  brought. 

"The  Spanish  fleet,"  he  replied  between  his 
gasps,  "  is  e'en  now  off  the  Cornish  coast.  I  have 
just  come  from  thence  in  my  cruiser,  and  saw  them 
plainly,  flags  flying,  with  my  own  eyes." 

At  this  alarming  news.  Lord  Howard  and  Haw- 
kins began  to  hurry  out  of  the  field  in  the  direction 
of  the  harbor.     But  Drake  called  to  them  to  stop. 

"  Nay,  gentlemen,"  said  he,  "  let  us  go  on  with 
the  game.  There's  plenty  of  time  to  finish  it,  and 
to  beat  the  Spaniards  afterward." 

Howard  and  Hawkins  returned,  and  sure  enough 
the  game  went  steadily  on  until  it  was  finished. 
When  it  had  been  lost  and  won,  the  admirals  re- 
paired to  the  fleet  and  gave  orders  to  make 
immediate  preparations  for  the  proposed  attack. 
It  was  at  four  o'clock  on  the  afternoon  of  July  19, 
1588,  that  Fleming  brought  the  news  of  the  arrival 
of  the  Spanish  Armada.  By  noon  the  next  day 
Howard's  fleet  was  manned,  ranged  in  line,  and 
ready  to  sally  forth.  Just  at  that  hour,  the  stately 
procession  o£  the  great  Spanish  galleons  hove  in 
sight,  floating  slowly  and  proudly  up  the  Channel 
in  the  form  of  a  crescent,  and  stretching  over  si 
space  of  seven  miles. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  23$ 

It  was  a  sight  to  daunt  the  bravest  soul;  but 
the  stout  English  sea-warriors  were  only  impatient 
and  eager  for  the  fray.  The  armada  was  allowed 
to  pass  Plymouth  harbor  unmolested,  and  to  sail 
some  distance  further  eastward.  The  next  morning, 
however, —  the  21st  of  July,  —  Howard  resolved  to 
begin  his  assault.  He  first  sent  forwapd  a  pinnace, 
called  the  "  Defiance,"  to  worry  the  rear  of  the 
armada.  No  sooner  had  the  shots  from  the  "  De- 
fiance "  been  heard,  than  Drake  boldly  sallied  forth 
in  the  "  Revenge,"  and  furiously  attacked  the 
Spanish  squadron  commanded  by  Recalde.  This 
squadron  had  lagged  behind  the  rest  of  the  armada ; 
and  being  thus  furiously  set  upon  by  Drake,  hast- 
ened to  rejoin  the  main  Spanish  fleet.  While 
Drake  was  not  yet  prepared  to  attack  the  entire  ar- 
mada, he  did  not  remain  inactive.  An  incident 
which  occurred  just  as  the  sun  was  setting,  gave 
him  a  chance  of  showing  his  prowess,  which  he 
promptly  seized. 

A  large  Spanish  ship,  with  a  considerable  treas- 
ure on  board,  took  fire  ;  whether  by  accident  or 
from  the  English  shots  was  never  known.  So 
valuable  was  her  cargo  that  the  Spaniards  were 
unwilling  to  abandon  her  without  trying,  at  least, 


236  DRAKE  : 

to  secure  it.  So  a  big  galleon,  commanded  by  a 
famous  grandee  named  Don  Pedro  de  Valdez, 
with  whom  were  fifty  Spaniards  of  high  rank,  bore 
down  on  the  burning  ship  to  rescue  the  treasure 
from  the  flames.  The  fire  had  not  yet  got  be- 
yond the  control  of  Don  Pedro's  exertions ;  and  in 
a  few  minutes,  he  was  relieved  to  find  it  quite 
extinguished.  But  it  happened  that  Drake  was 
lurking  not  far  off  in  the  "  Revenge."  When,  there- 
fore, he  saw  the  galleon  turn  and  hasten  to  the 
succor  of  the  burning  ship,  he  suddenly  turned 
and  swooped  down  upon  her.  A  fierce  and  vig- 
orous attack  soon  reduced  Don  Pedro  to  the  neces- 
sity of  a  surrender.  Drake  at  once  boarded  the 
galleon,  and  his  soldiers  made  prisoners  of  all  its 
occupants.  As  Drake  stood  on  deck,  giving  his 
orders,  the  proud  Don  Pedro  approached  him,  and 
bending,  politely  kissed  his  hand. 

"  We  had  resolved,"  said  he,  "  to  die  in  battle ; 
and  we  would  have  done  so,  had  we  not  had  the 
good  fortune  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  so  gentle  and 
courteous  a  warrior,  who  is  generous  to  a  van- 
quished foe.  It  is  doubtful,  sir,  whether  your  ene- 
mies have  greater  cause  to  admire  and  love  you 
for  your  valiant  and  prosperous  exploits,  or  to  dread 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  237 

you  for  your  wisdom  and  good  fortune.  Surely, 
you  are  favored  alike  by  Mars,  the  god  of  war,  and 
by  Neptune,  the  god  of  the  sea." 

This  courtly  speech  softened  Drake's  heart.  He 
gave  orders  that  each  of  the  captives,  and  especially 
Don  Pedro,  should  be  treated  with  all  respect  and 
kindness.  The  galleon,  with  the  prisoners,  were 
sent  into  Dartmouth  harbor.  Don  Pedro  and  his 
companions  remained  in  England  for  two  years; 
at  the  end  of  which  time  Drake  received  over  fifteen 
thousand  dollars  for  their  ransom.  On  the  galleon 
he  captured  fifty-five  thousand  ducats,  which  he 
promptly  divided  among  his  crew.  This  was  the 
only  booty  of  large  value  taken  from  the  Spaniards 
during  this  memorable  conflict. 

The  morning  after  this  exploit  the  English  fleet, 
and  the  innumerable  smaller  craft  which  had  been 
lying  in  wait  in  the  Dover  and  Sussex  harbors, 
poured  forth  in  a  forest  of  sail  into  the  Channel, 
and  bore  down  upon  the  lofty  galleons  of  Spain. 
On  every  side  the  armada  was  worried  and  assailed 
by  little  vessels,  while  at  the  same  time,  on  its 
flanks  and  rear,  the  heavy  shots  from  the  cannon 
of  the  English  men-of-war  made  fearful  havoc. 
The  persistent  assaults  of  the  small  craft,  indeed, 


238  DRAKE  : 

were  as  if  "  a  whale  were  attacked  by  the  harpoons 
of  a  flotilla  of  boats."  The  conflict  went  on  in 
great  confusion,  but  without  rest  or  parley,  day  by 
day  and  night  by  night.  The  English  never  once 
slackened  their  pursuit,  or  the  fury  of  their  blows 
upon  the  invading  fleet.  The  men-of-war  kept 
sternly  forward  ;  the  smaller  craft  clung  to  the  gal- 
leons like  countless  leeches  :  the  admirals,  refusing 
to  take  repose,  remained  constantly  on  deck,  to 
inspire  their  men  and  to  direct  the  whirlwind  of 
ceaseless  battle.  The  English  soldiers  and  sailors 
fought  like  lions  ;  while,  from  the  first,  the  luck- 
less Spaniards  seemed  to  feel  the  shadow  of  coming 
defeat. 

At  last,  on  the  night  of  July  28th,  when  the 
armada  had  been  slowly  but  steadily  driven  through 
the  Channel  and  to  the  entrance  of  the  German 
ocean,  a  stratagem  devised  by  the  English  com- 
pleted its  discomfiture.  Eight  boats,  packed  with 
combustible  materials,  were  set^jon  fir.e,  and  were 
driven  by  a  favorable  wind  into  the  very  midst  of 
the  Spanish  galleons.  A  scene  of  confusion, 
terror,  and  despair  quickly  followed.  The  Span- 
iards made  all  haste  to  cut  their  cables  and  to 
allow  their  ships  to  drift  towards  the  perilous  coast ; 


r 


THE   SEA-KING   OF    DEVON.  239 

but  in  some  cases  this  was  done  too  late.  Galleon 
after  galleon  became  a  mass  of  glaring  and  roaring 
flame,  which  cast  its  lurid  reflection  far  over  the 
night-darkened  waters.  The  frantic  separation  of 
the  galleons  from  each  other  proved  Drake's  op- 
portunity, which  he  was  quick  to  seize.  At  once 
bearing  down  upon  the  scene  with  his  squadron^ 
which  he  himself  led  on  the  "  Revenge,"  he  boarded 
and  captured  twelve  of  the  stately  ships.  With 
these  in  tow  he  retired  and  rejoined  the  rest  of  the 
English  fleet.  This  was  the  last,  as  it  was  the  \  r^ 
most  heroic  exploit  which  attended  the  overwhelm-  '  ^ 
ing  victory  of  the  English  over  the  "  Invincible 
Armada." 

The  almost  entire  destruction  of  the  armada  by 
tempest,  after  it  had  been  riddled  by  English  shot 
and  diminished  by  Drake's  bold  capture,  speedily 
succeeded  the  latter  event.  Of  the  one  hundred 
and  fifty  ships  with  which  the  Duke  of  Medina 
Sidonia  had  sailed  from  Spain,  only  sixty  returned. 
These  were  more  or  less  disabled.  King  Philip, 
when  he  heard  of  the  calamities  of  his  proud  fleet, 
bitterly  exclaimed, "  I  did  not  send  them  to  fight 
against  winds  and  waves  ! " 

This  brilliant  victory  of  the  English  carried  the 


I 


240  DRAKE : 

fame  of  Elizabeth  and  her  naval  heroes  to  the 
highest  point.  The  years  which  followed,  as  the 
historian  Froude  says,  "were  years  of  splendor 
and  triumph.  The  flag  of  England  became  su- 
preme on  the  seas  ;  English  commerce  penetrated 
to  the  farthest  corners  of  the  Old  World,  and 
English  colonies  rooted  themselves  on  the  shores 
of  the  New.  The  national  intellect,  strung  by  the 
excitement  of  sixty  years,  took  shape  in  a  litera- 
ture which  is  an  eternal  possession  of  mankind." 

It  is  interesting  to  think  that  had  it  not  been 
for  the  defeat  of  the  "  Invincible  Armada,"  the 
Pilgrims  might  never  have  landed  at  Plymouth, 
or  John  Smith's  colony  at  Jamestown.  Our 
shores  might,  instead,  have  been  settled  by  Spanish 
cavaliers  and  freebooters,  and  then  the  destinies 
of  our  continent  might  have  been  turned  into  far 
different  channels.  And  it  was  to  Drake's  valor 
and  skill,  more  than  to  any  other  commander,  that 
this  momentous  triumph  was  due,  so  important  in  ; 
its  remote  as  well  as  in  its  immediate  results.  It 
made  England,  and  not  Spain,  the  pioneer  of  the 
new  world's  civilization. 

It  is  no  wonder  that  Drake  and  the  other  heroes 
of  this  great  sea-battle  were  overwhelmed  with  hon- 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  24I 

ers  and  adulation.  Brilliant  banquets  were  held  in 
the  palace,  and  for  awhile  all  London  gave  itself 
over  to  the  joyous  celebrations  of  the  event.  Busi* 
ness  was  suspended,  and  the  people  devoted  them- 
selves to  the  pastimes  of  a  long  holiday.  The 
queen  and  her  courtiers  went  freely  to  and  fro,  to 
be  everywhere  greeted  with  the  lusty  applause  of 
multitudes,  and  to  receive  the  gratifying  evidences 
of  a  revived  loyalty.  Elizabeth  ordered  that  pray- 
ers of  thanksgiving  should  be  offered  up  in  every 
church  in  her  realm  for  the  noble  victory ;  and 
went  herself  one  day,  in  great  state,  surrounded  by 
a  dazzling  cortege  of  nobles  and  warriors,  to  the 
cathedral  of  St.  Paul's,  to  be  present  at  the  thanks- 
giving service. 

But  however  complete  the  discomfiture  of  the 
Spaniards  for  the  time,  Elizabeth  and  her  advisers 
knew  that  it  would  not  be  wise  to  rest  content  with 
this  triumph.  The  people  clamored  to  follow  it  up 
by  an  attack  upon  the  arrogant  power  which  had  so 
rashly  defied  England's  prowess  in  her  native  waters. 
Spain  herself  must  be  assailed  on  her  own  soil. 
The  queen,  who  had  as  stout  and  warlike  a  soul  as 
any  of  her  generals  or  admirals,  quickly  responded 
to  this  loud  popular  appeal.     Scarcely  had  the 


242  DRAKE  : 

English  fleet  been  once  more  anchored  in  the 
docks,  than  preparations  were  begun  to  send  forth 
another  expedition.  As  soon  as  this  was  known, 
sailors  and  soldiers  flocked  from  every  direction, 
eager  to  have  a  share  in  its  ventures  and  its  glory. 
No  less  than  twenty  thousand  offered  their  arms  and 
lives  to  the  cause  ;  and  before  many  months  the 
expedition  was  ready  for  departure. 

All  eyes  were  turned  to  one  man  as  its  admiral. 
Drake  alone  possessed  the  genius  and  the  ex- 
perience to  successfully  cope  with  the  still  power- 
ful foe  on  his  own  ground.  He  was  placed  in 
command  of  the  fleet ;  Sir  John  Norris  went  with 
him  as  the  general  of  the  land  forces  ;  and  among 
the  gallant  knights  who  joined  Drake's  standard 
with  impetuous  ardor  was  the  young  Earl  of  Essex, 
then  the  favorite  of  the  queen.  Drake's  aim  was 
to  strike  at  Spain  through  her  ally  and  neighbor, 
Portugal.  It  happened  that  a  pretender  to  the 
throne  of  Portugal,  named  Don  Antonio  of  Crato, 
had  long  been  living  as  an  exile  in  England.  His 
pretensions  supplied  a  good  pretext  for  attacking 
the  Portuguese.  Elizabeth  espoused  his  cause, 
and  gave  out  that  the  object  of  Drake's  expedition 
was  to  place  him  on  the  throne  which  he  claimed. 


THE  SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  243 

Accordingly,  Don  Antonio  went  with  Drake  on 
the  flag-ship. 

On  the  5th  of  April,  1589,  the  fleet  sailed  from 
Plymouth.  But  it  had  scarcely  got  into  the  open 
sea  before  a  quarrel  arose  between  Drake  and 
Norris.  The  result  of  this  quarrel,  which  con- 
tinued throughout  the  voyage,  was  to  greatly  lessen 
the  success  of  Drake's  operations.  On  anchoring 
off  Corunna,  Drake  wished  to  attack  that  seaport ; 
but  Norris  so  strenuously  opposed  this,  that  Drake 
was  forced  to  yield.  The  fleet  then  put  in  at 
Peniche.  There  the  soldiers  under  Norris  and 
Essex  were  landed,  and  marched  on  Lisbon,  the 
Portuguese  capital,  while  the  ships  bore  down 
along  the  coast  upon  the  same  point.  The  troops 
reached  the  city  first.  Norris  had  been  deceived 
in  believing  that  the  people  would  rise  in  favor  of 
Don  Antonio,  and  would  welcome  the  English. 
He  now  found  himself  confronted  by  a  hostile 
population,  and  saw  the  Portuguese  guns  frowning 
down  upon  him  from  the  seven  hills  of  Lisbon. 
His  force  was  too  small  to  assault  a  place  so 
strongly  defended  ;  and  before  Drake  could  arrive 
off  the  harbor  with  the  fleet,  Norris  was  forced  to 
retreat  from  the  town. 


244  DRAKE : 

Meanwhile,  Drake,  who  had  intended  to  lead 
the  fleet  up  the  river  Tagus,  on  whose  banks 
Lisbon  stands,  found  it  impossible  to  do  this,  the 
mouth  of  the  river  being  guarded  by  the  castle  of 
St.  Julian.  He  therefore  seized  Cascaez,  a  small 
town  at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  and  while  there 
captured  a  squadron  of  Portuguese  ships  laden 
with  corn.  This  was  the  only  important  result 
of  this  ill-fated  expedition.  The  troops  soon  after 
embarked,  and  after  a  brief  and  unfortunate  cruise 
to  the  Azores,  during  which  much  sickness  pre- 
vailed on  the  ships,  and  several  violent  storms 
assailed  them,  Drake  returned  crestfallen  to  Eng- 
land. 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  24$ 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

drake's  last  voyage. 

P  to  this  disastrous  voyage,  Drake's  career 
had  been  one  of  unbroken  success  and  vic- 
tory. The  failure  to  capture  Lisbon  was 
the  first  check  to  his  brilHant  fortunes.  He  was 
now  over  fifty  years  of  age ;  his  rough  and  turbu- 
lent life  had  made  him  an  old  man  before  his  time. 
From  this  turning-point,  too,  he  was  destined  to 
meet  with  nothing  but  disappointment.  The  last 
years  of  this  great  hero  of  the  seas  were  destined 
to  be  spent  amid  the  gloom  of  defeat  and  abortive 
ventures. 

On  his  arrival  in  England,  Drake  encountered 
savage  attacks  from  his  enemies.  No  man  of  his 
fame,  achievements  and  influence  could  hope  to 
escape  jealousy  and  calumny.  His  foes  at  court 
seized  upon  the  ill-success  of  his  expedition  to  Port- 
ugal as  a  pretext  for  the  most  malignant  charges 
against  him.  It  was  said  that  his  pretensions  to 
naval  prowess  were  hollow ;  that  he  had  never 


246  DRAK£ : 

achieved  what  he  had  boasted  of  having  done ;  that 
he  was  not  loyal  to  the  queen. 

Drake  indignantly  demanded  to  be  heard  before 
the  royal  council.  When,  gray  and  bronzed,  with 
kindling  eyes  and  haughty  mien,  he  appeared  at 
the  council  board  around  which  sat  the  most  re- 
nowned statesmen  of  England,  he  instantly  won 
the  respect  of  all ;  and  when,  with  direct  and  sim- 
ple eloquence,  he  defended  his  conduct  from  the 
foul  aspersions  which  had  been  cast  upon  it,  and 
showed  that  the  divided  command  between  him 
and  Norris  was  the  main  cause  of  the  failure  of  the 
Lisbon  expedition,  he  was  acquitted  by  the  coun- 
cil with  one  voice  of  the  charges  brought  against 
him,  and  dismissed  with  untarnished  honor.  He 
was  still  received  with  distinction  at  the  court  of 
Elizabeth,  which  was  now  at  the  zenith  of  its  pros- 
perity and  splendor ;  and  shared  for  a  while  with 
hearty  zest  the  elegant  pleasures  of  its  gay  and 
witty  cavaliers.  Then,  tiring  of  the  show^xxtrava- 
gance  and  hollowness  of  existence  amid  the  throng 
of  courtiers,  the  old  hero  retired  to  his  beloved 
Plymouth,  thinking  to  spend  his  declining  years 
with  wife  and  friends,  and  in  the  midst  of  the 
maritime  bustle  of  the  busy  port. 


THE  SEA-KING  OF  DEVON.  247 

Drake  had  always  been  greatly  beloved  at  Plym- 
outh. The  people  of  the  town,  who  regarded  him  as 
one  of  themselves,  had  been  very  proud  of  his  mar- 
vellous exploits  on  the  sea.  They  had  witnessed  his 
kindness  to  his  parents  and  brothers.  They  had 
themselves  benefited  by  his  generosity  in  many 
ways,  and  especially  in  introducing,  at  his  own  ex- 
pense, water  into  the  town.  They  had  crowded 
the  quays  whenever  an  expedition,  in  which  he  had 
a  command,  set  forth  from  their  pretty  harbor ;  and 
had  bade  him  "  God  speed  '*  when,  with  the  other 
great  naval  captains,  he  had  set  forth  to  grapple 
with  the  "  Invincible  Armada." 

It  may  well  be  believed,  therefore,  that  on  his 
return  to  settle  down  in  their  midst,  he  was  wel- 
comed with  universal  warmth  and  was  treated  with 
pre-eminent  honor.  He  showed  that  he  was  grate- 
ful for  this  affection  by  many  fresh  acts  of  public 
benefaction.  Among  other  deeds  of  this  kind,  he 
established,  with  his  kinsman.  Sir  John  Hawkins, 
what  was  called  the  "  Chest  of  Chatham ;  "  which 
was  a  generous  provision  for  the  relief  of  aged  and 
invalid  sailors.  In  1593  Drake  was  chosen  by 
Plymouth  as  a  member  of  the  House  of  Commons ; 
and  once  more,  for  a  short  while,  found  himself 


248  DRAKE : 

in  the  midst  of  the  busy  world  of  London  agaia 
To  sit  in  Parliament  was  not  wholly  new  to  him, 
for  once  before  he  had  been  a  member  for  a  brief 
period.  But  the  turmoil  and  arts  of  politics  did 
not  suit  his  blunt,  honest  temperament ;  and  he 
did  not  attempt  to  achieve  renown  on  this  arena. 

Though  old  and  weary,  his  ambitious  and  vent- 
uresome spirit  was  not  yet  broken.  After  a  short 
while  he  chafed  under  the  uncongenial  pursuits  of 
political  life,  and  grew  weary  of  his  indolent  exist- 
ence at  Plymouth.  Once  more  the  yearning  for 
the  sea  and  the  intoxication  of  conflict  took  pos- 
session of  him.  The  war  with  Spain  had  not  yet 
come  to  an  end.  It  still  went  on,  for  the  most 
part  on  the  ocean.  Drake  saw  with  impatience 
one  fleet  after  another  sail  away  from  Plymouth 
harbor  in  pursuit  of  conquest  and  plunder.  At 
last  he  could  brook  his  indolence  no  longer.  He 
went  to  London  and  once  more  offered  his  services 
to  Elizabeth.  In  spite  of  his  discomfiture  at  Lis- 
bon, he  was  still  looked  upon  as  the  bravest  and 
most  skilful  sea-warrior  of  the  age ;  and  his  offer 
to  re-enter  upon  his  old  avocation  was  eagerly  ac- 
cepted. 

The  fire  of  Drake's  hatred  of  the  Spaniards  still 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  249 

burned  fiercely  in  his  breast.  He  could  not  bear 
to  see  the  war  against  them  languishing,  or  to  hear 
of  the  occasional  victories  which  they  won  over 
Elizabeth's  squadrons. 

With  all  his  old  zeal  and  energy,  therefore,  he 
set  about  raising  a  fleet  for  a  fresh  expedition. 
He  drew  generously  on  his  ample  fortune  for  this 
purpose.  He  joined  his  ancient  comrade,  Sir 
John  Hawkins,  in  his  plans,  and  it  was  agreed  that 
Sir  John,  being  the  elder  in  years  and  experience, 
should  take  equal  command  in  the  fleet.  No  pains 
were  spared  to  make  this  fleet  as  formidable  as 
possible.  Queen  Elizabeth  supplied  six  stout 
men-of-war ;  and  twenty-one  more  were  purchased, 
equipped,  and  provisioned  by  Hawkins  and  Drake. 
A  force  of  twenty-five  hundred  men,  many  of 
them  veterans  in  military  and  naval  warfare,  was 
collected ;  and  the  ships  were  provided  with  an 
abundant  supply  of  cannon,  arms  and  ammunition. 
Drake  proposed  that  the  expedition  should  be 
directed  against  the  West  Indies  and  the  Spanish 
settlements  in  Central  America.  He  thus  chose  a 
ground  of  attack  with  which  he  had  become  famil- 
iar by  several  previous  voyages  and  campaigns. 
With  the  fleet  was  to  go  an  able  general  named 


\ 


250  DRAKE : 

Sir  Thomas  Baskerville,  to  take  command  of  th« 
land  force. 

The  fleet  was  ready  to  sail  in  the  early  summer 
of  1595.  But  just  as  Hawkins  and  Drake  were 
about  to  set  forth,  it  was  reported  that  Spain 
was  on  the  point  of  despatching  another  powerful 
fleet  to  invade  England.  They  were  therefore 
delayed  in  order  to  take  part  in  the  defence  of  the 
coast,  should  the  rumor  prove  true.  But  after 
weeks  had  passed,  and  no  new  Armada  made  its 
appearance,  the  admirals  at  last  resolved  that  there 
was  no  reason  for  waiting  any  longer.  On  the 
28th  day  of  August,  1595,  the  stately  fleet  of 
twenty-seven  sail,  booming  with  its  guns,  flying 
its  standards  and  pennons,  and  spreading  all  its  new 
snow-white  canvass,  slowly  filed  out  of  Plymouth 
harbor,  followed  by  the  acclamations  of  the  peo- 
ple. 

As  Drake  stood  on  the  deck  of  his  ship,  he 
looked  long  and  earnestly  at  the  fast-fading  cliffs 
of  his  native  Devon.  Perhaps,  as  with  sad  eyes 
he  scanned  the  familiar  scenes,  he  had  a  feeling 
that  he  should  never  behold  them  again.  It  was, 
indeed,  the  last  time  that  his  gaze  would  rest  upon 
the  fair  landscape  of  England. 


TUX   SEA-KING   OF   DSVON.  2$  I 

The  fleet  was  divided  into  two  squadrons,  com- 
manded by  Drake  and  Hawkins  respectively.  It 
had  not  proceeded  far  before  Drake  perceived 
into  what  an  error  he  had  fallen  in  sailing  with  a 
divided  command.  This  had  already  been  the 
cause  of  his  first  failure  at  Lisbon ;  and  now  he 
had  committed  the  same  mistake  which  he  had 
done  before.  He  and  Hawkins  had  been  life-long 
friends  and  comrades ;  but  both  were  proud  men, 
unused  to  being  commanded  by  others,  and  not 
easy  to  yield  to  opinions  contrary  to  their  own. 
A  few  days  after  sailing,  the  chief  officers  of  the 
fleet  met  in  council  on  board  of  the  "Garland," 
which  was  the  flag-ship.  Drake  complained  that 
he  had  three  hundred  more  men  in  his  squadron 
than  there  were  in  the  other ;  and  demanded  that 
a  portion  of  them  should  be  transferred  to  the 
ships  under  Hawkins.  To  this  Hawkins  objected  ; 
whereupon  an  angry  quarrel  ensued  between  the 
two  admirals,  in  the  presence  of  all  their  officers. 
The  bad  blood  thus  aroused  brought  confusion 
and  weakness  into  the  councils  of  the  fleet,  and 
was  destined  to  mar  its  success  in  more  ways  than 
one. 

About  a  week  after  the  altercation  of  the  ad- 


252  DRAKE  : 

mirals,  another  council  of  the  officers  was  sum* 
moned  on  board  the  "Defiance/*  the  ship 
commanded  by  Drake.  While  the  ultimate  desti- 
nation of  the  fleet  was  the  West  Indies,  Drake 
desired  that  it  should  first  diverge  to  the  Cana- 
ries ;  for  it  had  been  reported  that  a  rich  Spanish 
galleon  was  lying  off  those  islands,  which  was  well 
worth  the  trouble  of  capturing.  Once  more  the 
two  admirals  bitterly  disagreed.  Hawkins  insisted 
that  the  fleet  should  sail  directly  for  the  West 
Indies.  The  quarrel  might  have  ended  in  the  sep- 
aration of  the  squadrons,  had  not  the  general,  Sir 
Thomas  Baskerville,  interposed  and  pacified  the 
angry  old  sea-dogs.  He  succeeded  in  making 
them  shake  hands  ;  and  the  next  day  the  admirals, 
with  Baskerville,  dined  with  great  good  nature  and 
festivity  on  board  the  *'  Garland." 

Drake's  wishes  prevailed.  The  fleet  directed  its 
course  to  the  Canaries,  which  were  reached  about 
a  month  after  the  departure  from  Plymouth.  An- 
choring off  one  of  the  larger  islands,  the  Englishmen 
found  it  to  be  strongly  defended  and  prepared  for 
their  assault.  Drake  ordered  his  pinnaces  to  be 
manned  and  sent  forward  to  assail  the  fort ;  but 
when  they  approached  within  its  range,  they  were 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  253 

SO  furiously  overwhelmed  with  the  enemy's  shot  that 
they  were  forced  to  return  to  the  fleet  in  all  haste. 
Drake  would  not  depart,  however,  until  he  had  made 
one  more  attempt  to  capture  the  place.  The  fleet 
sailed  around  the  island,  and  now  anchored  off  the 
southwestern  point  of  the  island,  where  water  was 
taken  in.  But  after  sending  a  force  on  shore  which 
achieved  nothing,  and  was  repulsed  by  guerillas, 
Drake  finally  gave  up  his  attempt  altogether. 

Drake's  last  voyage  across  the  Atlantic  was  a 
rapid  one,  for  it  consumed  exactly  one  month. 
Leaving  the  Canaries  on  the  28th  of  September, 
1595,  the  fleet  sighted  a  small  island  lying  just 
southeast  of  St.  Domingo  on  the  27th  of  October. 
During  the  voyage  Sir  John  Hawkins,  who  was  now 
old  and  worn  by  many  voyages,  fell  ill ;  and  this 
event  softened  the  ill-feeling  between  the  two 
admirals.  It  was  decided  not  to  make  an  attack 
upon  St.  Domingo,  but  to  push  on  to  Guadaloupe. 
While  the  fleet  was  anchored  at  this  island,  one  of 
the  ships,  the  "  Delight,"  which,  with  several  others, 
had  been  separated  from  the  fleet,  arrived  one  morn- 
ing with  startling  news.  A  Spanish  fleet  of  nine 
frigates  had  encountered  the  straying  vessels,  and 
had  captured  the  "Francis,"  one  of  Drake's  squadron. 


254  DRAKE : 

This  news  filled  Drake  with  disappointment 
and  anger ;  and,  in  his  old  impetuous  way,  he 
urged  that  the  whole  fleet  should  forthwith  pro- 
ceed in  pursuit  of  the  Spaniards.  It  was  clear 
that  the  Spaniards  knew  of  the  arrival  of  the 
English  armament,  and  would  very  likely  balk 
Drake's  designs  upon  the  islands  and  colonies. 
But  to  Drake's  rash  proposal  Hawkins  refused  to 
agree ;  and  in  this  he  was  sustained  by  the  other 
officers.  Instead,  therefore,  of  sailing  in  search  of 
the  Spanish  fleet,  the  two  squadrons  lay  for  some 
time  off  Guadaloupe.  This  island  was  barren  and 
cheerless ;  there  were  no  towns  to  plunder,  nor 
were  there  products  to  be  gathered  as  provisions. 
The  time  was  therefore  employed  in  trimming  the 
ships,  mounting  the  cannon,  and  taking  in  a  supply 
of  fresh  water. 

The  next  destination  of  the  fleet  was  the  large 
island  of  Porto  Rico.  On  the  way  a  landing  was 
made  on  one  of  the  Virgin  Islands,  where  the 
forces  of  the  fleet  were  reckoned  up  and  divided 
off  anew  into  companies.  At  this  place  Haw- 
kins's illness  so  rapidly  increased  that  his  compan- 
ions became  greatly  alarmed.  The  ill-fortune  of 
the  expedition  thus  far  had  preyed  upon  his  gal- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  355 

lant  and  ambitious  spirit,  and  had  aggravated  the 
malady  with  which  he  had  long  been  sufEering. 
The  old  hero,  who  was  carefully  tended  on  board 
the  flag-ship,  impatiently  demanded  that  the  fleet 
should  make  all  haste  for  Porto  Rico.  That  island 
was  reached  on  the  nth  of  November.  Hawkins 
revived  his  spirits  on  beholding  this  famous  spot, 
which  he  knew  to  be  a  Spanish  stronghold,  a  depot 
for  treasure,  and  very  fruitful.  But  on  the  next 
day  he  sank  rapidly ;  and  at  three  o'clock  in  the 
afternoon,  surrounded  by  Drake  and  other  officers, 
the  weary  sea-rover  breathed  his  last. 

The  death  of  Hawkins  left  Drake  in  sole  com- 
mand of  the  fleet.  He  bitterly  mourned  the  loss 
of  his  old  kinsman  and  friend ;  for  during  Haw- 
kins' illness  the  quarrel  between  them  had  been 
healed,  and  Drake  had  patiently  yielded  to  Haw- 
kins' wishes  as  to  the  fleet.  But  Drake  had  no 
time  to  waste  in  deploring  this  loss.  The  expedi- 
tion had  thus  far  accomplished  nothing.  It  was 
necessary  to  put  his  plans  into  execution  without 
delay.  Baskerville  succeeded  Hawkins  in  com- 
mand of  the  flag-ship  "Garland;"  and  now  a 
prompt  attack  upon  the  town  of  Porto  Rico  was 
resolved  upon. 


256  DRAKE : 

The  Spanish  on  shore  had  been  aroused  by  the 
appearance  of  the  English  fleet  off  the  harbor. 
Hawkins  had  not  been  dead  three  hours  before 
four  cannon  had  been  planted  directly  opposite 
the  foremost  line  of  Drake's  ships.  It  happened 
that  Drake,  with  Sir  Nicholas  Clifford  and  several 
other  officers  of  high  rank,  were  sitting  at  supper 
on  board  the  *' Defiance,"  the  ship  which  lay  near- 
est the  shore.  While  they  were  thus  regaling  them- 
selves, suddenly  a  cannon-ball  crushed  through 
the  ship's  side,  and  whizzed  across  the  great 
cabin  where  the  officers  were.  It  struck  the 
stool  upon  which  Drake  was  sitting,  and  sent 
him  sprawling  upon  the  floor.  He  escaped  more 
easily  than  some  of  his  companions.  Sir  Nicholas 
Clifford  and  Captain  Brute  Brown  were  fatally 
wounded ;  and  three  other  officers  were  seriously 
hurt. 

Drake  at  once  ordered  the  ships  which  lay  too 
near  the  shore  to  draw  off  out  of  range  of  the 
cannon.  His  blood  was  up,  however,  and  he 
resolved  on  a  desperate  attack  the  next  day.  Be- 
sides the  well-armed  fort  which  rose  in  the  town 
near  the  water's  edge,  five  Spanish  frigates  now 
appeared  to  take  part  in  the  defence  of  the  place. 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  257 

These  vessels  rode  securely  under  the  protection 
of  the  guns  of  the  fort. 

Drake  saw  that  he  could  not  safely  land  his  sol- 
diers under  the  double  fire  of  the  frigates  and  the 
fort ;  so,  on  the  following  night  he  made  a  desper- 
ate attempt  to  set  fire  to  the  frigates.  His  boats 
succeeded  in  burning  one  of  them;  and  the  con- 
flagration, bursting  forth  from  deck  and  mast  amid 
the  blackness  of  midnight,  lit  up  the  scene  with  a 
fierce  and  lurid  glare,  and  lighted  up  the  town, 
the  harbor  and  the  sea  with  a  weird  illumination. 
But  the  other  frigates  resisted  every  attempt  to 
fire  them,  and  at  the  same  time  opened  with  such 
a  deadly  effect  upon  Drake's  smaller  craft  that 
several  of  them,  to  his  intense  chagrin,  sank  be- 
fore his  eyes. 

But  Drake  continued  the  conflict  with  desperate 
valor.  Again  and  again  the  English  ships  ad- 
vanced to  the  attack  upon  the  Spanish  fort  and  fleet, 
but  each  time  were  repulsed  with  heavy  loss.  Not 
only  the  fort,  but  the  shore  below,  bristled  with 
the  Spanish  artillery ;  and  the  Spanish  force  was 
evidently  much  larger  than  the  English.  Night 
closed  upon  the  scene,  and  the  din  of  battle 
ceased ;  still,  Drake  refused  to  confess  that  he  was 


258  DRAKE : 

beaten,  by  withdrawing  his  fleet  and  continuing 
the  voyage.  He  called  a  council  of  his  chief  offi- 
cers, and  asked  each  in  turn  his  advice.  The 
voices  of  nearly  all  were  for  retreat ;  but  two  of 
the  officers.  Rush  and  Maynard,  urged  that  there 
was  still  a  chance  for  victory.  Drake,  ever  more 
ready  to  receive  warlike  counsels  than  to  retreat 
before  even  a  more  powerful  enemy,  resolved  that, 
next  day,  he  would  again  attack  Porto  Rico. 

The  coming  of  dawn,  however,  showed  that  the 
Spaniards  had  made  up  their  minds  to  sacrifice 
everything  to  the  successful  defence  of  the  place. 
As  Drake  ascended  on  deck  and  gazed  toward  the 
harbor,  he  saw  that  the  Spaniards  were  sinking 
some  of  their  frigates  in  its  waters.  Four  large 
ships  were  sunk  one  after  another.  Then  two 
more  were  set  on  fire,  and  amid  the  illumination 
thus  created,  the  Spaniards  in  the  fort  opened  a 
terrific  fire  on  the  English  fleet. 

Drake  now  perceived  that  to  continue  the  attack 
would  be  an  act  not  so  much  of  courage  as  of 
wanton  folly.  With  a  heavy  heart  he  gave  the  or- 
der to  his  vessels  to  retreat.  This  they  could  do 
safely,  for  the  Spanish  frigates  would  have  been 
no  match  for  them  on  the  open  sea.      Slowly  the 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  259 

fleet  sailed  away.  They  soon  turned  an  eastern 
promontory  of  the  island,  and  were  out  of  sight 
of  the  town. 

Four  days  later  the  fleet  anchored  at  the  west- 
ern end  of  the  island,  in  the  smooth  and  pleasant 
bay  of  St.  Jermana.  The  coast  thereabouts  was 
undefended,  and  the  weary  wayfarers  were  able  to 
land  and  wander  about  in  safety.  Here  they  suc- 
ceeded in  getting  fruit,  fish  and  cattle,  which, 
after  their  wanderings  and  privations,  were  most 
refreshing.  The  brief  period  of  rest  during  which 
they  sojourned  at  the  bay  of  St.  Jermana  revived 
their  strength  and  spirits.  But  Drake,  whose 
heart  was  sorely  oppressed  by  his  repulse  at  Porto 
Rico,  soon  became  restless,  and  ordered  his  men 
on  board  again.  The  fleet  then  once  more  set 
forth  in  search  of  plunder  and  conquest. 


260  DRAKE : 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

DEATH    OF    DRAKE. 

OR  awhile  success  attended  the  operations 
of  the  fleet  after  its  departure  from  St. 
Jermana.  Drake  pursued  his  project  of 
devastation  and  plunder  with  all  his  old  untiring 
energy.  On  reaching  Curagoa  he  had  the  misfor- 
tune to  lose  one  of  his  ships,  the  "  Exchange," 
which  sprang  a  leak  and  sank.  But  the  island 
was  fertile,  and  the  crews  regaled  themselves  upon 
the  cattle  and  goats  which  they  found  there  in 
abundance.  The  next  attack  was  made  upon  Rio 
de  la  Hacha,  a  large  and  flourishing  Spanish  settle- 
ment. The  town  was  undefended  ;  but  the  inhab- 
itants, having  heard  of  the  approach  of  the  English 
fleet,  had  made  all  haste  to  collect  their  valuables, 
and  to  carry  and  hide  them  in  the  woods  in  the  in- 
terior. Drake  landed  with  a  company  of  soldiers, 
scoured  the  country  for  twenty  miles  around 
the  town,  and  succeeded  in  discovering  a  large 
part  of.  the  treasure  which  had  been  concealed 


THE   SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  26l 

Quite  a  number  of  prisoners,  both  Spaniards  and 
negroes,  were  taken  at  Rio  de  la  Hacha. 

Leaving  his  fleet  anchored  in  the  harbor  of  this 
place,  Drake  set  out  with  two  hundred  men  in  row- 
boats  to  attack  the  neighboring  town  of  Lancheria, 
where  he  obtained  a  quantity  of  pearls,  besides 
capturing  a  Spanish  caravel  which  proved  to  contain 
money,  wine  and  myrrh.  The  Spanish  governor 
of  this  town,  in  order  to  gain  time  to  convey  its 
treasures  away  in  safety,  sent  to  Drake  proposing 
to  give  a  heavy  ransom.  But  Drake  saw  through 
the  artifice,  and,  though  he  liberated  the  prisoners 
he  had  taken,  he  set  fire  to  the  town  and  the  Span- 
ish boats  and  then  returned  to  his  fleet. 

The  next  day  he  sailed  for  Santa  Martha,  a  very 
picturesque  town  on  the  coast  which  presented  an 
inviting  point  of  attack.  Landing  his  troops  on 
the  shore  below,  he  advanced  upon  the  ramparts, 
which  proved  to  be  weakly  defended.  The  English 
entered  the  town,  meeting  with  no  other  resistance 
than  a  few  shots  from  the  woods  on  either  side. 
But  here,  as  in  so  many  other  places,  the  people 
had  been  forewarned  of  the  approach  of  their  foe, 
and  had  carried  away  everything  of  value.  The 
English  were  at  least  able  to  procure  a  good  store 


262  DRAKE : 

of  provisions  in  this  town,  which,  after  in  vain 
searching  for  treasure,  Drake  ordered  to  be  burned 
to  the  ground. 

Not  very  far  from  Santa  Martha  was  the  great 
depot  of  Nombre  de  Dios,  which  Drake  had  more 
than  once  taken  and  plundered.  It  was  still  an 
emporium  of  Spanish  trade  and  a  store-house  of 
Spanish  treasures.  Drake  had  looked  forward  to 
the  capture  and  pillage  of  Nombre  de  Dios  as  a 
compensation  for  all  his  bitter  disappointments.  It 
was  with  high  hope,  therefore,  that  he  saw  its  spires, 
its  fort,  and  its  walls  appear  in  view  over  the  waters. 
The  morning  after  anchoring  off  the  town  Drake 
landed  his  men,  and  advanced  boldly  under  a  feeble 
fire  from  the  little  fort.  The  Spaniards  in  the  fort 
had  but  one  small  cannon,  which  unluckily  for 
them,  burst  the  first  time  they  attempted  to  fire  it. 
Meanwhile  Drake  and  his  men,  as  they  approached 
the  ramparts,  could  plainly  see  the  people  flying 
terrified  in  all  directions.  Two  or  three  Spaniards 
in  their  fright  ran  directly  toward  the  advancing 
column,  and  were  taken  prisoners.  Drake  ques- 
tioned them  closely ;  and  learned,  greatly  to  his 
chagrin,  that  everything  of  value  had  already  been 
carried  out  of  the  town  and  safely  hidden  in  the 


THE   SEA-KING    OF   DEVON.  263 

interior  of  the  country ;  while  much  of  the  treasure 
had  been  hastily  transferred  on  mules  to  Panama, 
on  the  other  side  of  the  isthmus. 

Desperate  with  this  crowning  disappointment, 
Drake  caused  Nombre  de  Dios  to  be  burned ;  and 
before  the  English  retired,  every  building  in  it  had 
fallen  a  prey  to  the  flames.  For  once  the  stout 
heart  of  the  old  sea-dog  nearly  failed  him.  His 
health  was  much  broken  by  the  repeated  calamities 
of  the  voyage,  and  had  been  seriously  affected  by 
the  death  of  Hawkins.  He  now  half -resolved  to 
give  up  the  further  pursuit  of  the  expedition  and 
to  return  crestfallen  to  England.  But  the  thought 
of  the  stigma  which  would  obscure  his  renown,  and 
the  disgrace  which  would  fall  upon  him  in  his  old 
age,  spurred  him  up  to  one  more  vigorous  attempt 
to  retrieve  his  recent  misfortunes. 

The  road  across  the  isthmus  to  Panama  was, 
as  Drake  well  knew  by  experience,  a  rough  and 
dangerous  one.  There  were  two  routes  thither. 
By  the  river  Chagres,  the  mouth  of  which  lay 
sixty  miles  from  where  the  fleet  was  anchored,  a 
flotilla  might  pass  up  to  within  about  fifteen  miles 
of  Panama.  By  the  rude,  difficult  road  across 
the  isthmus  the  way  was   through   dreary  desert 


264  DRAKE : 

expanses  and  over  rugged,  pathless  emmencesL 
This  route  was  a  wearisome  one  ;  and  besides,  the 
Enghsh  lacked  means  for  carrying  provisions  and 
arms,  and  had  no  guides  to  conduct  them  safely. 
After  a  council  of  his  chief  officers,  however, 
Drake  decided  that  an  expedition  should  be  sent  to 
Panama,  and  should  go  by  way  of  the  road.  He 
thought  the  river  the  more  dangerous,  as  his  force 
would  there  be  more  exposed  to  attack. 

A  force  of  seven  hundred  and  fifty  soldiers, 
under  the  command  of  Sir  Thomas  Baskerville,  the 
oldest  general  in  the  fleet,  was  detailed  to  make  its 
way  as  best  it  could  to  Panama.  Drake  resolved  to 
await  the  result  of  the  expedition  on  board  the  flag 
ship.  His  health  was  now  too  feeble  to  share,  as  he 
was  anxious  to  do,  the  tedious  march  of  his  troops. 
Besides,  it  might  well  be  that  in  the  absence  of  so 
large  a  force  the  fleet  might  be  attacked  by  the 
Spaniards,  who  were  known  to  be  lurking  in  the 
vicinity. 

On  the  29th  of  December  Sir  Thomas  Baskerville 
set  out  at  the  head  of  his  little  army.  At  first 
the  march  was  rapid  and  unobstructed.  On  the 
evening  of  the  second  day  the  expedition  had 
gone  twenty-seven  miles,   and  had   not   seen  or 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  26$ 

heard  of  any  opposing  force.  They  were  now 
midway  between  the  two  oceans.  The  next  morn- 
ing, however,  they  had  startling  evidence  that  the 
Spaniards  were  not  far  off.  A  large  building, 
which  was  a  half-way  store  house  between  Panama 
and  Nombre  de  Dios,  was  seen  just  ahead,  enveloped 
in  flames.  The  Spaniards  had  set  fire  to  it  rather 
than  that  it  should  fall  into  Baskerville's  hands. 
The  soldiers  had  hardly  marched  a  league  further 
when  they  espied  a  high  hill,  on  the  summit  of 
which  breastworks  had  been  hurriedly  thrown  up. 
Presently  they  saw  cannon  bristling  above  the 
breastworks,  and  now  and  then  the  head  of  a 
Spaniard  appeared.  The  fortification  commanded 
the  rough,  winding  road  over  which  the  English 
were  passing.  Just  at  this  point  the  road  ran 
between  steep  declivities,  so  that  there  seemed  to 
be  no  way  of  avoiding  the  fortified  hill.  The 
English,  however,  made  an  attempt  to  pass  by 
clambering  up  the  banks,  and  creeping  along  through 
the  brakes  and  bushes.  Some  of  them  succeeded 
in  reaching  a  spot  above  the  breastworks,  whence, 
it  seemed,  an  attack  might  be  made  upon  it.  But 
when  the  English  attempted  to  fire,  they  found 
that  their  powder  was  spoiled  by  the  heavy  rain 


206  DRAK£  : 

which  had  soaked  them  the  day  before.  It  only 
remained  to  give  up  the  attempt  to  capture  the 
breastwork. 

While  Baskerville  was  considering  what  step  to 
take  next,  one  of  his  scouts  came  in  with  news 
which  completely  discouraged  him.  Not  only  did 
the  fortified  hill  directly  in  front  of  him  form  an 
obstacle  to  his  advance,  but  the  road  ahead  pre- 
sented many  similar  strongholds  of  the  enemy; 
and  if  all  of  these  should  be  taken  and  passed  in 
turn,  there  remained,  a  short  distance  from  Panama, 
a  bridge,  where  the  Spaniards  had  strongly  in- 
trenched themselves  in  far  greater  numbers  than 
those  under  Baskerville's  command. 

The  rain  had  not  only  wet  the  powder ;  it  had 
spoiled  a  large  portion  of  the  provisions  of  the 
expedition.  To  the  certain  resistance  of  superior 
forces  was  added  the  danger  of  starvation.  Some 
of  Baskerville's  principal  officers  had  died  by  the 
way  ;  and  one  or  two,  including  the  quartermaster, 
had  been  killed  in  ihe  abortive  attempt  on  the 
fortified  hill.  The  general  was  forced  to  conclude 
that  the  expedition  had  completely  failed;  and 
that  it  would  be  fortunate  if  his  little  army  could 
reach  Nombre  de  Dies  again,  without  being  de- 
stroyed by  the  onslaughts  of  the  Spaniards. 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  OO; 

The  march  back  to  the  ships  was  a  sad  and 
painful  one.  The  men  grew  weary  with  illness; 
their  shoes,  worn  out,  dropped  from  their  blistered 
feet ;  and  the  scant  food  left  them  weak  and  inca- 
pable of  long  marches.  When  at  last  they  strag- 
gled to  the  shore  and  boarded  the  ships,  they 
were  the  most  woe-begone  company  upon  whom 
Drake  had  ever  set  eyes.  Their  failure  only  in- 
creased his  despondency.  He  became  more  ill 
than  ever,  and  now  could  scarcely  drag  himself  on 
deck.  With  all  these  calamities,  however,  his  bold 
spirit  was  still  unsubdued.  He  hoped  against  hope 
to  retrieve  his  misfortunes.  Bancroft  Librae?/ 

The  fleet  sailed  to  the  mouth  of  the  river  Cha- 
gres,  where  Drake  was  again  repulsed,  the  Span- 
iards defending  the  point  in  superior  numbers. 
Advancing  along  the  coast,  Drake,  after  a  council 
of  his  officers,  attacked  one  after  the  other  two 
Spanish  settlements  called  Granada  and  Leon. 
Here  a  gleam  of  good  fortune  lit  up  the  gloom  of 
general  calamity.  He  succeeded  in  sinking  four- 
teen small  Spanish  frigates,  and  secured  some  bars 
of  silver  and  other  treasure.  Even  so  trifling  a 
success  revived  his  ambition.  He  could  not  bear 
to  leave  America  without  one  more  effort  to 
capture  Panama  with  its  abundant  riches. 


268  DRAKE : 

He  therefore  held  his  course  for  Nicaragua  ;  but 
on  the  way  he  found  only  desolate  and  sickly  islands, 
where  his  men  died  by  the  score,  and  no  provisions 
were  to  be  had.  The  loss  of  three  of  his  captains 
reduced  Drake  again  to  despair ;  and  now  at  last, 
with  grief-stricken  heart,  he  was  forced  to  abandon 
any  further  attempt  on  Panama.  He  declared  to 
his  officers  that  these  regions  were  sadly  changed 
from  what  they  had  been  in  former  years.  "  I  once 
found  delicious  and  pleasant  harbors,"  he  said,  *'  but 
it  now  seemeth  a  waste  and  desert  wilderness." 
Then  his  spirits  would  revive,  and  he  would  say 
cheerily,  — 

"  It  matters  not,  my  men.  God  hath  many 
things  in  store  for  us.  I  know  many  means  to  do 
her  majesty  good  service,  and  to  make  us  rich. 
For  we  must  have  gold  before  we  see  England." 

But  day  by  day  the  poor  old  hero  grew  more  and 
more  melancholy,  and  pined  at  the  bitter  thought 
of  his  balked  ambition.  *'  Since  our  return  from 
Panama,"  says  one  of  his  comrades,"  he  never  car- 
ried joy  or  mirth  in  his  face ;  yet  no  man  that  loved 
him  dared  to  show  that  he  took  notice  thereof." 

The  fleet,  which  had  already  turned  its  prows 
homeward,  one  day  cast  anchor  in  the  harbor  of  the 


i 


THE  SEA-KING  OF   DEVON.  269 

island  of  Porta  Bella,  about  thirty  miles  from  the 
coast.  This  was  in  order  to  search  for  fresh  water 
and  to  sink  one  of  the  caravels,  transferring  her 
cargo  and  crew  to  a  recently  captured  vessel.  The 
harbor  was  the  best  the  men  had  seen  since  leaving 
Plymouth,  and  they  lingered  in  it  for  several  days. 
Meanwhile  Drake  had  grown,  much  to  the  grief 
of  his  comrades,  more  and  more  feeble.  The  fleet 
had  not  been  long  at  Porta  Bella  when  he  became 
so  weak  that  he  could  no  longer  leave  his  cabin. 
The  crew  began  to  whisper  gravely  to  each  other, 
and  to  move  silently  about  the  ship.  The  surgeon 
sadly  shook  his  head.  It  was  evident  that  the 
brave  old  veteran  could  not  live ;  that  his  span  of 
life  was  now  very  short.  A  high  fever  seized  him 
as  he  lay  tossing  in  his  cabin,  and  reduced  his 
already  wavering  strength  with  fearful  rapidity. 
^  The  morning  of  Jan.  28,  I596^jvas  bright,  clear 
and  genial.  Drake,  as  he  lay  on  his  couch,  felt  the 
balmy  influence  of  the  air,  and  saw  the  sun's  rays 
creeping  in  at  the  window.  To  the  surgeon's  dis- 
may he  insisted  on  rising,  dressing  himself  and 
going  on  deck.  He  declared  that  he  was  stronger, 
and  that  the  gentle  breezes  would  give  him  new  life. 
Crawling  from  his  bed  and  staggering  across  the 


270  DRAKE  : 

narrow  cabin,  he  began  to  put  on  his  clothes.  His 
attendants  looked  on  with  misgiving  and  alarm. 
He  lifted  his  doublet,  then  dropped  it  on  the  floor. 
He  reeled  and  fell  against  the  side  of  the  cabin. 
He  began  to  talk  wildly,  as  if  in  delirium.  At  last 
he  sank  with  a  groan  into  the  surgeon's  arms.  He 
was  tenderly  lifted  by  the  sturdy  hands  of  his  faith- 
ful sailors,  and  again  stretched  upon  his  couch. 

The  dull  pallor  of  death  overspread  his  bronzed 
and  wrinkled  face.  For  nearly  an  hour  his  com- 
panions breathlessly  watched  the  rigid  features. 
Once  Drake's  eyes  opened  and  looked  around, 
and  one  hand  was  feebly  lifted.  It  seemed  as  if  he 
were  about  to  speak.  But  the  hand  fell  on  the 
bed,  and  a  film  gathered  over  the  orbs ;  and  in  a 
few  moments  all  was  over.  Sir  Francis  Drake 
was  dead ! 

The  grief  and  despair  of  the  crew,  who  revered 
and  adored  their  admiral,  may  be  imagined.  All 
that  day  there  was  nothing  but  mourning  on  board 
the  ships.  The  command  of  the  expedition  now  fell 
on  Baskerville.  His  only  thought  was  to  return 
home  as  quickly  as  possible,  and  carry  the  dismal 
news.  At  first  it  was  proposed  that  Drake's  re- 
mains  should  be  embalmed  as  well  as  their  situa- 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  2Jl 

tion  would  permit,  and  taken  to  England.  But 
Baskerville  decided  that  the  most  fitting  grave  of 
the  stout  old  sea-king  was  beneath  the  waters  of 
that  mighty  deep  which  he  had  ridden  so  boldly, 
and  upon  which  he  had  won  his  world-wide  fame. 

Drake's  corpse  was  therefore  placed  in  a  leaden 
coffin  and  was  laid  in  state  on  the  deck  of  the 
flag-ship.  On  the  day  after  his  death,  the  ship 
slowly  floated  away  a  league  from  the  island.  At 
that  distance  from  any  land,  the  funeral  rites  were 
held.  Amid  the  sobs  and  groans  of  the  officers 
and  men,  the  chaplain,  standing  by  the  bier,  sol- 
emnly repeated  the  burial  service  of  the  Church. 
Then  the  appointed  signal  was  given ;  a  volley  of 
musketry  was  fired  over  the  bows  ;  the  guns  of  the 
ship  responded  with  solemn  voices ;  the  coffin  was 
slowly  lifted,  fastened  with  ropes,  and  swung  off 
the  ship's  side ;  and  in  another  moment  the  com- 
pany heard  the  heavy  splash,  which  apprized  them 
that  the  mortal  remains  of  the  hero  were  seeking 
their  eternal  resting  place,  in  the  unfathomed 
depths. 

"  The  waves  became  his  winding-sheet,  the  waters  were  his 
tomb; 
But,  for  his  fame,  the  ocean  sea  was  not  sufficient  room." 


2^2  DRAKE : 

Soon  after  this  sad  event,  Baskerville  set  sail  fol 
England.  On  the  way  he  had  a  fierce  battle  with 
the  Spanish  off  the  island  of  Cuba,  in  which  he  suc- 
ceeded in  sinking  or  burning  some  of  the  enemy's 
vessels.  It  was  late  in  March  when  he  at  last 
reached  home  and  told  the  tale  of  Drake's  death. 
The  news  was  received  with  universal  grief. 
Mingled  with  the  admiration  which  all  felt  for  his 
exploits  and  triumphs,  was  a  feeling  of  pitiful 
sympathy  for  the  old  hero's  later  misfortunes. 
Those  who  had  envied  and  maligned  him  while 
living  were  silenced  by  his  death  ;  and  every  honor 
with  which  the  nation  could  crown  his  memory 
was  lavished  upon  it. 

Drake,  though  married,  had  no  children.  His 
estate  fell  to  his  nephew,  Francis  Drake,  who 
some  years  afterward  was  made  a  baronet  by  King 
James  the  First.  The  hero's  descendants  still  live 
in  England,  and  still  own  the  landed  property  which 
belonged  to  the  illustrious  mariner  in  the  time  of 
Queen  Elizabeth. 

History  has  amply  confirmed  Drake's  fame  as 
one  of  the  greatest  among  that  brilliant  galaxy  of 
genius  which  surrounded  Elizabeth's  throne.  In 
an  age  of  adventure  and  maritime  enterprise,  he 


THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON.  2/3 

was  the  foremost  of  England's  champions  on  the 
sea.  He  ouisjripped  the  renown  of  the  famous 
admirals  who,  just  as  he  was  appearing  on  the 
scene,  had  already  carried  England's  maritime 
glory  and  power  to  a  high  pitch.  To  him,  as  the 
doughtiest  of  those  who  fought  the  "  Invincible 
Armada,"  it  is  due,  more  than  to  any  other,  that 
England  was  able  to  continue  her  career  of  Protes- 
tant progress  and  civilization. 

Drake  was  a  perfect  master  of  the  art  of  seaman- 
ship. He  was  as  familiar  with  the  minutest  duties 
of  a  common  sailor  as  with  those  of  an  admiral  in 
command  of  a  fleet ;  and  was  as  good  at  healing 
and  tending  the  wounded  as  the  most  skilful  ship's 
surgeon.  He  was,  as  we  have  seen,  as  brave  as  a 
lion;  and  he  possessed  a  spirit  which  quailed 
before  no  obstacle,  however  great,  and  which  was 
not  cast  down  by  any  defeat,  however  overwhelm- 
ing. The  first  to  sail  an  English  ship  in  the 
Pacific  and  the  furthest  Asiatic  seas,  he  may  be 
said  to  have  laid  the  foundation  of  the  mighty 
Oriental  empire  which  the  England  of  to-day  rules 
with  despotic  sway. 

He  was,  above  all,  a  patriot,  from  first  to  last 
ardently  devoted  to  his  queen  and  his  country ; 


274  DRAKE  :   THE   SEA-KING   OF   DEVON. 

exposing  fortune  and  life  in  pursuing,  plundering, 
and  chastising  Britain's  inveterate  foe  and  rival ; 
and  ever  ready  to  obey  her  call  in  the  most  desperate 
ventures  and  amid  the  most  cruel  and  long-enduring 
hardships.  Well  may  the  inheritors  of  his  blood, 
as  well  as  the  descendants  of  that  Elizabethan 
England  which  he  served  so  long,  so  valiantly  and 
so  well,  still  proudly  cherish  the  renown  and  keep 
green  the  memory  of  the  Sea-King  of  Devon  ! 


American  Heroes  and  Heroines 


By   Pauune    Carrington    Bouve      Illustrated 
l2mo     Cloth  $1.25 

THIS  book,  which  will  tend  directly  toward 
the  making  of  patriotism  in  young  Americans, 
contains  some  twenty  brief,  clever  and  attractive 
sketches  of  famous  men  and  women  in  American 
history,  among  them  Father  Marquette,  Anne 
Hutchinson,  Israel  Putnam,  Molly  Pitcher,  Paul 
Jones,  Dolly  Madison,  Daniel  Boone,  etc.  Mrs. 
Bouv^  is  well  known  as  a  writer  both  of  fiction  and 
history,  and  her  work  in  this  case  is  admirable. 
"  The  style  of  the  book  for  simplicity  and  clearness 
of  expression  could  hardly  be  excelled."  —  Boston 
Budget. 

The  Scarlet  Patch 

The  Story  of  a  Patriot  Boy  in  the  Mohawk  Valley 

By  Mary  E.  Q.  Brush  Illustrated  by  George  W.  Picknell  $1.25 
"'THHE  Scarlet  Patch*'  was  the  badge  of  a  Tory  organization,  and  a 

X  loyal  patriot  boy,  Donald  Bastien,  is  dismayed  at  learning  that  his 
uncle,  with  whom  he  is  a  "bound  boy,"  is  secretly  connected  with  this 
treacherous  band.  Thrilling  scenes  follow  in  which  a  faithful  Indian 
figures  prominently,  and  there  is  a  vivid  presentation  of  the  school  and 
home  life  as  well  as  the  public  affairs  of  those  times. 

"  A  book  that  will  be  most  valuable  to  the  library  of  the  young  boy." —  Provi' 
dence  News. 

Stories  of  Brave  Old  Times 

Some  Pen  Pictures  of  Scenes  Which 

Toole  Place  Previous  to,  or  Connected 

With,  the  American   Revolution 

By  Helen  M.  Cleveland    Profusely  illustra- 
ted    Large  i2mo    Cloth  $1.25 

ris  a  book  for  every  library,  a  book  for 
adults,  and  a  book  for  the  young.  Per- 
haps no  other  book  yet  written  sets  the  great 
cost  of  freedom  so  clearly  before  the  young, 
'consequently  is  such  a  spur  to  patriotism. 

'*  It  can  unqualifiedly  be  commended  as  a  book  for 
youthful  readers;  its  great  wealth  of  illustrations 
adding  to  its  value."  —  Chicago  N«ws, 


T9t  aal*  by  all  booksellera  or  sent  postpaid  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers, 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &   SHEPARO  CO.,  BOSTON 


Making   of    Oar    Nation    Series 

By  WILLIAM  C.  SPRAQUB 

Large  lamo,  Cloth  Illustrated  by  A.  B.  Shute 

Price  per  volume,  $1.50 

11  -    ■■ ^— r 

The   Boy  Courier  of  Napoleon 

A  Story  of  the  Louisiana  Purchase 

WILLIAM  C.  SPRAGUE,  the  notably  suc- 
cessful editor  of  "The  American  Boy," 
has  given  for  the  first  time  the  history 
of  the  Louisiana  Purchase  in  entertaining  story 
form.  The  hero  is  introduced  as  a  French 
drummer  boy  in  the  great  battle  of  Hohenhnden. 
He  serves  as  a  valet  to  Napoleon  and  later  is 
sent  with  secret  messages  to  the  French  in  San 
Domingo  and  in  Louisiana.  After  exciting  ad- 
ventures he  accomplishes  his  mission  and  is 
present  at  the  lowering  of  the  Spanish  flag,  and 
later  at  that  of  the  French  and  the  raising  oi 
the  Stars  and  Stripes. 


THE  BOr  COURIER  OF 
NAPOLEON 

OP 

LOUISIANA  PURCHAX 


••All  boys  and  girls  of  our  country  who  read  this  book  will  be  delighted  with  it, 
as  well  as  benefited  by  the  historical  knowledge  contained  in  its  pages." — Louis* 
ville,  Ky.^  Times. 

•'An  excellent  book  for  bojrs,  containing  just  enough  history  to  make  them  hunger 
for  more.     No  praise  of  this  bookcanbe  too  high." — Town  Topic.' ,  Cleveland,  O, 

•'This  book  is  one  to  fascinate  every  intelligent  American  hoy."— Buffalo  Times 

The  Boy   Pathfinder 

A  Story  of  the  Oregon  Trail 

THIS  book  has  as  its  hero  an  actual  character, 
George  Shannon,  a  Pennsylvania  lad,  who 
at  seventeen  left  school  to  become  one  of 
the  Lewis  and  Clark  expedition.  He  had  nar- 
row escapes,  but  persevered,  and  the  story  of 
his  wanderings,  interwoven  with  excellent  his- 
torical information,  makes  the  highest  type  of 
general  reading  for  the  young. 

"II  is  a  thoroughly  good  story,  full  of  action  and 
adventure  and  at  the  same  time  carrying  a  bit  of  real 
history  accurately  recorded." — Universalist  Leader^ 
Boston. 

"It  is  an  excellent  book  for  a  boy  to  read."— Aifw- 
tfr/t,  N.  J,,  Advertiser. 


\ATaC.  SPRAGUE 


For  aale  by  all  booksellers  or  seat  postpaid  on  receipt  0/ 
price  by  the  publishers 

LOTHROP,   LEE  &   SHEPARD  CO.,  BOSTON 


For  Young 
People 


pafnocts  Childi^eft 

By  H.  TwiTCHELL    Illustrated    $1.25 

WE  have  here  a  most  valuable  book,  telling 
not  of  the  childhood  of  those  who  have 
afterwards  become  famous,  but  those  who  as 
children  are  famous  in  history,  song,  and  story. 
For  convenience  the  subjects  are  grouped  as 
«»•  Royal  Children,"  **  Child  Artists,"  "Learned 
Children,"  "Devoted  Children,"  "Child  Mar- 
tyrs," and  "Heroic  Children,"  and  the  names 
of  the  "  two  little  princes,"  Louis  XVII.,  Mo- 
zart, St.  Genevieve,  David,  and  Joan  of  Arc  are 
here,  as  well  as  those  of  many  more. 

The  Stopy  of  the  Cid 

By  Calvin  Dill  Wilson    Illustrated  by  J.  W.  Kennedy    $1.25 

MR.  "WILSON,  a  well-known  writer  and  reviewer,  has  prepared  from 
Southey's  translation,  which  was  far  too  cumbrous  to  entertain  the 
young,  a  book  that  will  kindle  the  imagination  of  youth  and  entertain  and 
inform  those  of  advanced  years. 


Jasoft's  Quest 

By  D.  O.  S.  Lowell,  A.  M.,  M.  D.    Master  in 
Roxbury  Latin  School     Illustrated     $1.00 

NOTHING  can  be  better  to  arouse  the  imagin- 
ation of  boys  and  girls,  and  at  the  same 
time  store  in  their  minds  knowledge  indispens- 
able to  any  one  who  would  be  known  as  cul- 
tured, or  happier  than  Professor  Lowell's  way 
of  teUing  a  story,  and  the  many  excellent  draw- 
ings have  lent  great  spirit  to  the  narrative. 


Hepoes  of  the  Cpasades 

By  Amanda  M.  Douglas    Cloth     Fifty  full-page  illustrations    $1.50 

THE  romantic  interest  in  the  days  of  chivalry,  so  fully  exemplified  by 
the  "  Heroes  of  the  Crusades,"  is  permanent  and  properly  so.  This 
book  is  fitted  to  keep  it  alive  without  descending  to  improbability  or 
cheap  sensationalism. 

For  sale  by  all  booksellers  or  sent  postpaid  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers, 

IjOTHROP.    lee    &    SHEPARD    CO.,    BOSTON 


lK>OKS   BY  r-VERCTT  T.  TOMLINSON. 


THE  WAR  OP  1812  SERIES 


Six  flumes    Cloth    ninstrated  by  it  & 
Shute    Price  per  volame  reduced  to  $1.33 

No  American  writer  for  boys  has  ever  occupied 
a  higher  position  than  Dr.  Tomlinson,  and  the 
"War  of  181 2  Series"  covers  a  field  attempted 
by  no  other  juvenile  literature  in  a  manner  that 
has  secured  continued  popularity. 

The  Search  for  Andrew  Field 
The  Boy  Soldiers  of  1812 
The  Boy  Officers  of  1812 
Tecumseh*s  Young  Bravec> 
Guarding  the  Border 
The  Boys  with  Old  Hickoiy 


ST.  LAWRENCE  SERIES 

CRUISING    IN  THE  ST.  LAWRENCE 

Being  the  third  yolume  of  the  *'St.  Lawrence  Series "     dotb 

Illustrated    Price  $1.50 

Our  old  friends,  "Bob,**  "Ben,"  "Jock,"  and  "Bert,"  having  completed 
their  sophomore  year  at  college,  plan  to  spend  the  summer  vacation  cruisin|{ 
on  the  noble  St.  Lawrence.  Here  they  not  only  visit  places  of  historic  inter- 
est, but  also  the  Indian  tribes  encamped  on  the  banks  of  the  nvei,  and  leeo^ 
frona  them  tbek  coatcuaas,  habits,  and  quaint  legends. 

PREVIOUS  VOLUMES 

CAMPING  ON  THE  ST.   LAWRENCE 

Or,  On  the  Trail  of  the  Early  Discovefen 

Cloth    Illustrated    $1.50 

fHE  HOUSE-BOAT  ON  THE  ST.  LAWRENCE 

Or,  Following  Prontenac 
Ciotb   lUnstrated   $1.50 

BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 

STORIES  OP  THE  AMERICAN  REVOLUTION 
lint  and  Second  Series   €loth   Illustrated   $x.ooQfiCh 


Lothrop^  Lee  &  Shepard  Co..  Boston 


BRAVE  HEART  SERIES 

By  Adele  E*  Thompson 
Illustrated     12  mo     Cloth     $1.25  per  volume 

Betty  Seldon,  Patriot 

A  BOOK  that  is  at  the  same  time  fascinating  and  noble.     Historical 
events  are  accurately  traced  leading  up  to  the  surrender  of  Com- 
wallis  at  Yorktown,  with  reunion  and  happiness  for  all  who  deserve  it. 

Brave  Heart  Elizabeth 


IT  is  a  story  of  the  making  of  the  Ohio  frontier, 
life,  and  the  heroine  one  of  the  famous  Zane  U 


much  of  it  taken  from 
family  after  which  Zanes- 
ville,  O.,  takes  its  name.  An  accurate,  pleasing,  and  yet  at  times  intensely 
thrilling  picture  of  the  stirring  period  of  border  settlement. 

A  Lassie  of  the  Isles 

THIS  is  the  romantic  story  of  Flora  Macdonald,  the  lassie  of  Skye,  who 
aided  in  the  escape  of  Charles  Stuart,  otherwise  known  as  the 
''Young  Pretender." 

Polly  of  the  Pines 

THE  events  of  the  story  occur  in  the  years  1775-82.  Polly  was  an 
orphan  living  with  her  mother's  family,  who  were  Scotch  High- 
landers, and  for  the  most  part  intensely  loyal  to  the  Crown.  Polly  finds 
the  glamor  of  royal  adherence  hard  to  resist,  but  her  heart  turns  towards 
the  patriots  and  she  does  much  to  aid  and  encourage  them. 


American  Patty 

A  Story  of  1812 

PATTY  is  a  brave,  winsome  girl  of  sixteen 
whose  family  have  settled  across  the  Cana- 
dian border  and  are  living  in  peace  and 
prosperity,  and  on  the  best  of  terms  with  the 
neighbors  and  friendly  Indians.  All  this  is 
suddenly  and  entirely  changed  by  the  breaking 
out  of  war,  and  unwillingness  on  the  part  of 
her  father  and  brother  to  serve  against  their 
native  land  brings  distress  and  deadly  peril. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers^  or  sent  postpaid  on  receipt 
of  price  by  the  pubUshert 

LOTHROP,   LEE   &   SHEPARD   CO.,    BOSTON 


Makers   of   England   Series 

By  EVA  MARCH  TAPPAN.  Ph.D. 

ipvR.  TAPPAN'S   historical   works   have 

-*— ^  already  become  classics  for  the  young, 
and  well  do  they  deserve  it,  with  their  enter- 
taining descriptions,  perfect  English,  and 
historical  value.  Such  books  are  the  best 
that  can  be  placed  in  the  hands  of  children ; 
and  the  fact  that  while  being  instructive  there 
is  never  a  dull  line  is  the  highest  commen- 
dation that  can  be  offered. 

In  the  Days  of  Alfred  the  Great 

Cloth    Fully  illustrated     Price  $1.00 

In  the  Days  of  William  the  Conqueror 

Cloth     Illustrated  by  J.  W.  Kennedy     Price  $1.00 

In  the  Days  of  Queen  Elizabeth 

Cloth     Illustrated  from  famous  paintings     Price  $I.OO 

In  the  Days  of  Queen  Victoria 

Cloth     Illustrated  from  paintings  and  photographs    Price  $1.00 

MISS  TAPPAN  reads  her  authorities 
intelligently  and  selects  her  material 
wisely,  always  having  her  young  audience  well 
in  mind.  She  has  a  clear  idea  of  the  require- 
ments for  interesting  and  stimulating  young 
readers,  and  arousing  in  them  a  desire  for  fur- 
ther research.  The  entire  series  are  admir- 
ably adapted  to  this  end,  and  are  warmly 
recommended  to  the  attention  of  parents, 
teachers,  and  librarians. —  ^*  Era,''''  Philadel- 
phia, Pa. 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO. 

BOSTON 


CHILDRl^N  OF  OTHER  LANDS  SERIES 
When  I  Was  a  Boy  in  Japan 

By  Sakae  Shioya     Illustrated  from  photographs 
i2mo     Cloth     $.75 

THE  author  was  born  fifty  miles  from 
Tokio,  and  at  the  age  of  twelve  began 
the  study  of  English  at  a  Methodist  school. 
Later  he  studied  Natural  Science  in  the  First 
Imperial  College  at  Tokio,  after  which  he 
taught  English  and  Mathematics.  He  came 
to  America  in  1901,  received  tuc  degree  of 
Master  of  Arts  at  the  University  of  Chicago^ 
and  took  a  two  years'  post-graduate  course  at 
Yale  before  returning  to  Japan.  No  one 
could  be  better  qualified  to  introduce  the 
Japanese  to  those  in  America,  and  he  has 
done  it  in  a  way  that  will  delight  both 
children  and  parents. 

When  I  Was  a  Girl  in  Italy 

By  Marietta  Ambrosi    i2mo    Cloth    Illustrated    $.75 

'T'HE  author,  Marietta  Ambrosi,  was  born  in  Tyrol,  having  an  American- 
*  born  mother  of  Italian  descent,  and  a  Veronese  father.  Her  entire 
girlhood  was  spent  in  Brescia  and  other  cities  of  Northern  Italy,  and  in 
early  womanhood  she  came  with  her  family  to  America.  Her  story  gives 
a  most  graphic  account  of  the  industries,  social  customs,  dress,  pleasures, 
and  religious  observances  of  the  Italian  common  people. 

When  I  Was  a  Boy  in  China 

By  Yan  Phou  Lee     i2mo     Cloth     Illustrated  from 
photographs     $.75 

]VJEW  YORK  INDEPENDENT  says:  ''Yan  Phou  Lee  was  one  of 
^  ^  the  young  men  sent  to  this  country  to  be  educated  here,  rmd  finally 
matriculated  at  Yale,  where  he  graduated  with  honor.  *When  I  was  a 
Boy  in  China'  embodies  his  recollections  of  his  native  country.  It  is 
certainly  attractive,  with  more  room  for  nature  to  operate  and  play  in 
freely  than  is  generally  attributed  to  Chinese  life." 

For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent  postpaid  on  receipt 
of  price  by  the  publishers 

LOTHROP,    LEE   &  SHEPARD   CO.,  BOSTON 


U.  S.  SERVICE  SERIES 

By  FRANCIS  ROLT-WHEELER 

Illustrations  from  photographs  taken  In  work  for  U.  S.  Governmant 
Large  12ino    Cloth    $1.50  per  volume 


THE  BOY  WITH  THE  U.  S.  SURVEY 

APPEALING  to  the  boy's  love  of  excitement, 
this  series  gives  actual  experiences  in  the 
different  branches  of  United  States  Government 
work  little  known  to  the  general  public.  This 
story  describes  the  thrilling  adventures  of  members 
of  the  U.  S.  Geological  Survey,  graphically 
woven  into  a  stirring  narrative  that  both  pleases 
and  instructs.  The  author  enjoys  an  intimate 
acquaintance  with  the  chiefs  of  the  various 
bureaus  in  Washington,  and  is  able  to  obtain  at 
first  hand  the  material  for  the  books. 

"  There  is  abundant  charm  and  vigor  in  the  narrative 
which  is  sure  to  please  the  boy  readers  and  will  do 
much  toward  stimulating  their  patriotism  by  making 
them  alive  to  the  needs  of  conservation  of  the  vast 
resources  of  their  country." — Chicago  News. 
*'This  is  a  book  one  can  heartily  recommend  for  boys,  and  it  has  life 
enough  to  suit  the  most  eager  of  them.''— CArx'5/»a»  Register ^  Boston. 


THE  BOY  WITH  THE  U.  S.  FORESTERS 

THE  life  of  a  typical  boy  is  followed  in  all  its 
adventurous  detail — the  mighty  representa- 
tive of  our  country's  government,  though  young 
in  years — a  youthful  monarch  in  a  vast  domain  of 
forest.  Replete  with  information,  alive  with 
adventure,  and  inciting  patriotism  at  every  step, 
this  handsome  book  is  one  to  be  instantly 
appreciated. 

•*  It  is  at  once  a  most  entertaining  and  instructive 
study  of  forestry  and  a  most  delightfulstory  of  boy  life 
in  the  service.'' — Cincinnati  Times-Star. 

••  It  is  a  fascinating  romance  of  real  life  in  our 
country,  and  will  prove  a  great  pleasure  and  inspiration 
to  the  boys  who  read  it." —  The  Continent,  Chicago, 

••  No  one  beginning  to  read  this  book  will  willingly 
lay  it  down  till  he  has  reached  the  last  chapter."— 
Christian  Advocate,  Cincinnati. 

For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sea  t  postpaid  on  receipt  of 
price  by  the  publishers 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO.,  Boston 


